Home

DT700 Phone User Guide

1. ccccccccseeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeaes B 321 C PEU E FOr rE C 323 To Connect a USB Device cccccccccscceeeceeecececeneceueecueecseessueseeeeaas C 323 To Remove a USB DeVICE cccccccccceeeceeeeceeeceeeaeeceueecaeecseesaeeeeeeeses C 324 To Remove the USB Port COVE ccccccccceecceeeceeeceeeeseeeseeeeeeesaeeeees C 325 To restart USB Port Power Supply cccccccceccceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaes C 326 D Jabra Bluetooth Headset Support lor DI GUO mS conania D 329 SUPPONGO E gUIDIMET cssesseccer ap sectsece saps Gaccocestaecdes tances sesaiecoaneceecneaco cesta teaesoe D 329 Japra EASE crnina a a amend E ENRERE EE ANE EERE sinaeat D 329 SU pported FedtureS soc ccccess sispcscssedonsibenesaces ccuacdserdoneeeddnacacthectsasedenteeevees dees D 329 Connector Activation sisi aeueciesieny Sonsinstnicenecinnnnunedeee entuledwasiedenelnenoaxedeknonseusinkeas D 330 Enable a single phone for a Jabra Bluetooth headset at the phoneset COVICEC ccccecceccceeceeeseeeceeceeecueecueseussaeseueeceesenseeeeas D 330 Enable all phones for a Jabra Bluetooth headset using the XML configuration file ec cceccceecceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeees D 330 Headset Base Station Setup ccccccccscccsseeceeceeeeceeeceusceueeseeesseesaaes D 331 Enable the Headset port on your phone cceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees D 331 To set external headset ringing Optional
2. Figure 7 41 Conference softkey on DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D and ITL 32D phones u Thu Apr 22 1727 AM Wroblewski Victoria 646 Po Conference End all 2 Use the key pad to dial the telephone number of the party to be joined in the conference 3 Press the Dial softkey to initiate the call or wait a few seconds for the call to be automatically dialed 7 114 DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 7 42 BASIC PHONE OPERATION Call Transferring and Conferencing 4 After you have connected to the second call press the Shuttle softkey to switch 5 between calls without joining them in a conference Shuttle softkey ie Thu Apr 22 1250 PM Wroblewski victoria 646 i Shuttle Conference EndCall f The LCD will display the information for call you are currently on To join the two calls into a conference press the Conf or Conference softkey Note After you have joined two calls in a conference call you can no longer use conference shuttle since the calls are now in one single conference call ENDING CONFERENCE CALLS Hang Up while conferencing Attended transfer DT700 Phone User Guide If you are establishing a conference call and want to hang up on the person you are calling press the EndCall softkey If you hang up the telephone handset or press the Speaker key while the phone for the new call is still ringing the other two parties are connected in a blind transfer call Note
3. ccccceseeeeeeees 11 261 To add a Call History entry to the Personal Directory 008 11 262 To delete a specific entry from the Call History cccccceeeeeeee scene 11 267 To delete Call History for all Missed Received or Placed Calls 11 268 To delete all Call History information ccccceeceseeee esse eeeeeeeneeeaes 11 268 The Personal Directory cccccccscccceccceeecesecaceceeeaueceucesseeceeessueceeessaeenaes 11 270 Accessing the Personal Directory and Entry Details ccccceeeeeee 11 270 Cursor Pad movement in the Personal Directory csccceeeeeeees 11 270 To access the Personal Directory cccccccceecceeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeees 11 270 To view a specific Personal Directory entry cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeee eens 11 272 Presence Monitor Settings and the Personal Directory 11 273 Incoming Call Display and the Personal Directory cccceeeeee 11 274 Searching for an Entry in the Personal Directory cccceceeeeeeeeees 11 275 To search the Personal Directory ccccccceecceecceeeeseeeeeeeeaeeseeeeaeeeeas 11 275 Dialing from the Personal Directory ccccccceecceecceeeeaeeeee esse eesaeeeneeeees 11 276 To dial a number from the Personal Directory cccccseceseeeeeeeeees 11 276 Adding or Editing a Personal Directory Entry ccce
4. DND LEDS AND ICONS Table 9 5 DND LEDs and Icons Call Control Home Screen and DESI Comments Less Icon State LED is not DND is not enabled lit DT700 Phone User Guide 9 209 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Using Enhanced Programmable Keys Call Control Home Screen and DESI Comments Less Icon State DND is enabled Note DND may have been enabled through the DND key through the star codes or using a supported client application To set Do Not Disturb for your phone e While the LED for the DND key is not lit ME press the DND key The DND key s LED turns red and a DND icon amp is shown in the call control home screen to indicate that DND is set for your phone For ITL 8LD phones a DND icon is also shown next to the DND key Your phone will not ring for incoming calls until you disable DND through the DND key through the star codes or using a supported client application Note When DND is enabled the DI 700 may also play a stutter dial tone if configured for your system To disable Do Not Disturb for your phone e While the LED for the DND key is red fe press the DND key The DND key LED turns off and the DND icon is removed from the call control home screen You will now receive incoming calls on your phone Note When DND is disabled the DT 700 may continue to play the stutter dial tone if configured on your system depending on the state of Message Waiting Indic
5. DT700 Phone User Guide 8 125 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS oag Speed Dial and Programmable Keys 8 126 OPTIONAL PROGRAMMABLE KEY MODULE Additional Programmable Keys may also be added by installing the optional Programmable Key Module ITL 32D phones come with the 8LK L already attached The following table lists the Programmable Key Modules that are supported by the DT700 series of phones Pests et eset wee DT710 8LK L Key Numbering Key numbering for the 8LK L module always uses key numbers 25 through 32 no matter how many keys are on the original phone If the 8LK L module is installed on a ITL 12D phone there is a gap in the numbering of the Speed Dial keys key numbers 2 to 12 on the phone key numbers 25 to 32 on the 8LK L module DCL 60 CONSOLE TYPE A Feature Support by Model The DT730 phones support the DCL 60 Console Type A connected to the UART Side 2 Connector port to add an additional 60 line keys on the phone Each of these keys can be programmed as a Speed Dial key programmable Key or Enhanced Programmable Key Record Park Hot Desk key etc Speed Dial keys can be configure on the DCL 60 Console to allow the phone to monitor the status or presence of other users Note Only one connection to the Side 2 connector port is available on the phone so the phone can only support a DCL 60 console OR a Jabra headset Both cannot be connected to the same phone at the same time MAXIMUM NUMBER OF LINE KEYS W
6. To set external headset ringing Optional Figure 4 22 4 68 You can set your phone to ring only through your external headset The phone will not ring from the telephone speaker when you have it set to ring to the headset Note Hold reminder tone soft ring ringer volume and preview of the User Adjustable Ringtones on selection may not be supported by the headset They are only played on the DT700 speaker when Headset Ringing is set to Phone or Phone and Headset Press the Menu key Select User Settings Select Headset Select Headset options E Edit Before Dialing Clear Settings Select Ringing DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Figure 4 23 Headset ringing options Figure 4 24 Enable Disable Ringing Tone Yolurnes Select Do one of the following e To enable ringing on the headset only select L Headset e To enable ringing on the headset and the phoneset select L31 Phone and Headset Enable Headset ringing Headset Ringing fe Prone and Headset Cancel Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to accept the setting You can also press the Cancel softkey to exit without making any changes Note The setting defaults to LH Phone To set the Call Waiting volume Figure 4 25 DT700 Phone User Guide The Call Waiting Volume settings allow you to specify the call waiting tone volume for the
7. ccccccecesseeeeeeeeseeeeeees D 332 Connect Phone to Headset Base Station cccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees D 333 Using the Jabra Headset cccccccceccsceceeceeeceeecaeceseseeeceeseeseeeneesasenans D 338 To adjust the headset ringing VOIUME ccccecceeeceeceeeceeeseeeneeeeeeeees D 338 To adjust the call volume headset ccceccececeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeaes D 338 Headset Operation cccccccsscccsccceeeseseceececeeecueecaeeceueceueeeaeesseesaeesnaes D 338 Jabra Headset Troubleshooting ccccccceccseceeeeceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeaeeseeeaeeees D 339 cannot hear phone audio through my headset cccceecneeeeeeeees D 339 The headset is not working correctly cccccccecceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees D 339 connected the headset base but nothing happens on the headset when try to use my desk Phone ccceeeeeeeeeees D 340 After enabling phones for the Jabra Headset Kit some phones can no longer use their expandable Key Kits on their phones ccccccsseesssecesecoseecsecseeesuatceseceetesseeeaeteaens D 340 Applying Jabra firmware Updates cccsecccceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeneeesaees D 340 DT700 Phone User Guide Contents E ae e EE ANNE E E A E E A E 341 Third Party Software Disclaimer and Limitations cccecccseeeeseeeeeeeeees E 341 Open Source License Acknowledgement ccccceeeeeeeeeeeee
8. ccceeeseeeeeeeeeeees 10 246 To pick up a ringing call to a member of your workgroup 5 10 247 To transfer a call to a member of your workgroup c eeceeeeeeeeees 10 247 Park Extension Key aie Sasa cdvensccocuetioanedintceativeecesacedeeeseenadereesteweedessbedenaced 10 248 To park a call to a Park Extension ccccccccecceeeeeeeceeaneceeeseeaeeees 10 248 To pickup a Call on a Park ExtensIiOn ccccecceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeens 10 248 Monitor SuperviSe Key ccccccssccescecsceceeeceeeceueceuseeueesueeseeeaeeeseeeneens 10 248 To Monitor a Call Workgroup SCENAarliO cccceeceeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeaeeeees 10 248 RECON FE OV ener eee ee ee E E eee eee 10 248 To stop the recording a Calll ccccceecceeccsececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeesaeeeaeeeaes 10 248 Send to VM steered ce desde a eaaa aikaa ara aaiae 10 249 HOt DESK IN CY asaectedec apace rece teen Secsansseesteel octiegseeadaseeuccednnsescusde a a a Nia 10 249 To log out of your Hot Desk SESSION cccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 10 250 Trunk Dial KGV essri E O a iia 10 250 To seize a trunk to place a call nnnannannnnnnannnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnni 10 250 ONDER sacar see cass cc AA E EE 10 250 To set Do Not Disturb for your phone ccccecccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 10 251 To disable Do Not Disturb for your PlNOne ccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 251 Handset F
9. 3 Ringtone 3 Cancel By default your current internal ringtone is selected Use the T and J keys to scroll through the list of ringtones To listen to the ringtone scroll to that selection A single loop sample of the ringtone is played Note The DT700 only plays the ringtone if it is in the idle state If the DT700 receives an incoming call or event related to a soft ring when it is playing this ringtone it stops playing the ringtone and plays the ringtone currently configured for the received event To stop playing a ringtone and listen to another ringtone use the T and 4 keys to scroll to another ringtone To select a new ringtone scroll to the ringotne or press the number for that ringtone then press the OK soft key or the ENTER key If you select a new ringtone this ringtone will be applied to your next incoming call To exit the menu without making any changes to your current ringtone press the Cancel soft key Note Ifa ringtone label shows a character at the end of the file name the file is specified in your phone configuration file but the file itself could not be downloaded from the boot server If you select this entry it will not be saved and your ringtone settings will not change Unavailable Internal Ringtone selection internal Ringtone ame Ringtone 1 2 Ringtone 2 3 Ringtone 3 4 Ringtone 4 4 65 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION omg Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor
10. Delete Received Calls Delete Placed Calls Delete All Calls Figure 11 39 Calls Deleted Deleted All Calls Call History All information for the Missed Outgoing and Incoming Call Histories is deleted 5 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to return to the Call History screen or press the Exit key to return to the main phone screen DT700 Phone User Guide 11 269 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES THE PERSONAL DIRECTORY The DT710 ITL 6DE IP Economy DT730 ITL 8LD DESI Less DT730 ITL 12D IP Value DT 730 ITL 24D IP Value and DT730 ITL 32D IP Value model phones have a Personal Directory that is saved locally on the telephone The Personal Directory can contain entries that are created by your system administrator in addition to your own personal entries The phones support up to 200 entries in a Personal Directory This includes any Personal Directory entries that are configured by your system administrator ACCESSING THE PERSONAL DIRECTORY AND ENTRY DETAILS Cursor Pad movement in the Personal Directory When viewing a Directory use the cursor pad for the following movements through the screens Up Move the highlighted area one line up the screen _ S Down Move the highlighted area one line down the screen From the first Directory page Go back to the Left previous screen Page Back All other Directory pages Go to the previous page of Directory
11. Figure 9 15 Enter number Handset Forwarding Enter number Delete J Eak The Handset Forwarding settings pages handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Deletes previously entered character Exit Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen DT700 Phone User Guide 9 183 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 sicrcoronse Soft Key Features Explanation OK Sends contents of number field to the Web Server to set handset forwarding Hard Key Features Explanation Digit key Enter numeric digits 4 way scroll BACK key Remain on existing screen move cursor to left Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Remain on existing screen move cursor to right Directory key 4 way scroll UP key No operation Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key No operation Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Sends contents of number field to the Web Server to set handset forwarding The forwarding number can be either an internal extension or an outside telephone number e Valid Internal extensions must have a physical endpoint associated to the number e Valid outside telephone numbers must include the outside dialing access number before the telephone number e PSTN numbers can be 7 or 11 digits e 1 as first dialed digit If the first digit is a 1 the number is assumed to be an 11 digit number If the first digit is not 1 then the first 7 digits are assumed to be a
12. POWER CONSUMPTION DT710 Minimum Maximum Power Consumption DT710 ITL 2E ITL 6DE Phone Model Power Consumption 0 40W 3 84W 0 40W 3 84W Min to Max with options installed DT730 Minimum Maximum Power Consumption DT730 ITL 12D ITL 24D ITL 32D ITL 8LD Power Consumption 3 84W 3 84W 3 84W 3 84W Min to Max with options installed 6 49W 6 49W 6 49W 6 49W DT730G Minimum Maximum Power Consumption by available options Phone Model DT730G Phone Model ITL 12DG ITL 12CG Maximum Without USB 4 90W 4 90W Maximum With USB 7 40W 7 40W Maximum With All Options 11 04W 11 04W E 345 NOTICES P ae Declaration of Conformity E 346 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY CE ESKY NEC Unified Solutions t mto prohla uje e tento DT700 je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES http www nec unified com doc DANSK Undertegnede NEC Unified Solutions erkl rer herved at f lgende udstyr DT700 overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF http www nec unified com doc DEUTSCH Hiermit erkl rt NEC Unified Solutions dass sich das Ger t DT700 in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet http www nec unified com doc EESTI K esolevaga kinnitab NEC Unified Solutions seadm
13. b You will connect to the call To exit the Pickup options a Press the Cancel softkey Cancel softkey 2 Fri Apr 23 1206 Ph Select Pickup mode a You will return to the main display screen The call displays as being connected to the picked up calling party of the ringing extension 3C VOICE MAIL Press the Message key on your phone Message key Message When prompted enter your extension followed by the key When prompted enter your password followed by the key DT710 ITL 6DE DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D ITL 32D and DT730G ITL 12DG ITL 12CG phones 1 A 312 Press the Voicemail softkey DT700 Phone User Guide 3C SYSTEM FEATURES Figure A 9 Voicemail softkey SRA Fri Jul 16 10 28 AM Yictoria J Wroblewski C iceman nerca Figure A 10 Voicemail softkey from Call screen e EA Fri Jul 16 10 58 AM 2 When prompted enter your extension followed by the key 3 When prompted enter your password followed by the key 3C SYSTEM TELEPHONE SET STAR CODE COMMANDS You can use several star code commands directly from a telephone set on a 3C system Use the following star code commands to set features and perform functions from any telephone Note Not all star codes may be enabled for your system or your model of DT 700 phone Table A 2 System Star Code Commands Action Analog SIP Star Code Explanation Star Code Blind Transfer FLASH Hold Comple
14. e Hot Desk Login Logoff e Record Call e Monitor Supervise Call e Handset Call Forwarding ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEY SUPPORT BY PHONE MODEL The following table lists the combinations of Line Key Modules supported by the DT700 and whether the Microbrowser feature is supported 10 243 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 25 erocrammave Koy Table 10 2 DT700 Enhanced Programmable Keys Support Product Name Model Number Supported Key Enhanced Programmable Modules Keys Support DT710 ITL 2E 1 e None Partial Supported Programmable Keys e Enhanced BLFs e Record Call e Send to Voice Mail e ParkExt e Do Not Disturb The following additional Enhanced Programmable Key functions require a display e Monitor ITL 32D e 8LK L e Full Factory installed DT730G ITL STL42cG e 8LK L a e Speed Dial Key User defined Context Sensitive Enhanced ITL 24DG 8LK L Transfer Pickup Monitor Send To Voice Mail Key Park Extension Key DND Key Call Forward Key Hot Desk Login Logoff Record Call Monitor Supervise Call Handset Call Forwarding a On the ITL 8LD the microbrowser utilizes the topmost display only The microbrowser does not utilize the lower DESI Less display ENHANCED BLFS Enhanced BLFs provide the phone user with single press access to phone functionality depending upon the state of the phone and upon the state of the BLF s Subscribed Address e Pickup Pickup provides you with the ability
15. BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING To check common problems 12 296 Figure 12 4 Figure 12 5 Figure 12 6 If you are having problems with your DT700 phone check the following common problems If your phone has an LCD display check for any icons that indicate a problem registering or connecting to the network Registered Phone Unregistered Phone A a Network Cable Unplugged EX If your phone is not registered on the network or indicates the network cable is unplugged try plugging your phone into another active LAN port on the local area network Check both ends of the network cable that you use to connect your phone to the network for loose connections Try using another network cable to connect your phone to the network Contact your system administrator to verify that there are no problems with your local network If you are having problems with your computer network it may impact the function of your phone If you cannot make outside calls contact your system administrator to verify that there is not a problem with outside telephone service Verify that the phone is receiving power a If the phone is plugged into a PoE Power Over Ethernet jack check that the network connector is firmly plugged into the jack If possible try plugging your phone into another PoE jack on your network b If the phone uses a power cord verify that the power cord is firmly plugged into the AC outlet If possible try plugging the
16. Cursor pad Backlit LCD Backlit keypad Full duplex hands free Number of programmable keys is upgradeable DT700 Phone User Guide Table 2 3 DT700 Phone User Guide INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700O AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones DT730G Phone models Phone Model Phone Features DT730 ITL 12CG e 12 programmable keys e WQVGA LCD 4 3 inch Full color with Backlight no touch panel Gigabit ethernet support USB power port 5V 500mA Cursor pad Backlit LCD Backlit keypad Full duplex hands free DT730 ITL 24CG 24 programmable keys WQVGA LCD 4 3 inch Full color with Backlight no touch panel Gigabit ethernet support USB power port 5V 500mA Cursor pad Backlit LCD Backlit keypad Full duplex hands free DT730 ITL 12DG 12 programmable keys Full dot grayscale LCD Gigabit ethernet support USB power port 5V 500mA Cursor pad Backlit LCD Backlit keypad Full duplex hands free DT730 ITL 24DG 24 programmable keys Full dot grayscale LCD Gigabit ethernet support USB power port 5V 500mA Cursor pad Backlit LCD Backlit keypad Full duplex hands free KEYS AND PARTS Note For more information on Speed Dial Key numbering see Speed Dial Key Numbering on page 8 128 Note For more information on the DESI Less Programmable Key LCD see Programmable Key Information Display on page 5 90 The following diagrams and tables show the keys and parts that are available on DT700 and DT730G phones
17. DT700 Phone User Manual For UNIVERGE 3C Communications and SIP Net Platforms DT700 Phone User Manual For UNIVERGE 3C Communications and SIP Net Platforms HTTP WWW COMPANYNAME COM PART NUMBER 610 210R9 DT700 FIRMWARE VERSION 2 3 DT730G FIRMWARE VERSION 3 0 3C UNIFIED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM VERSION 8 5 3 NOTICES Copyright 2008 2014 NEC Corporation All rights reserved Printed in USA NEC Corporation NEC is continually upgrading and developing the products described in this publication The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Written permission is required prior to reproduction of any of the work covered here by copyright For warranty information see the License Agreement included with the software NEC the NEC logo UNIVERGE and UNIVERGE 3C hereinafter referred to as the 3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of NEC Corporation Spreed struktur and icoya are registered trademarks of Struktur AG AudioCodes AC HD VoIP HD VoIP Sounds Better IPmedia Mediant MediaPack OSN SmartTAP VMAS VolPerfect VolPerfectHD Your Gateway To VoIP and 3GX are trademarks or registered trademarks of AudioCodes Limited Windows Microsoft Outlook and Exchange are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Quintum Technologies Quintum a NET Company or any of their product family are the trademarks of Network Equ
18. Directed Park A 316 Analog Star Code FLASH 74 extension 15 Password client assigned account code 76 extension With a call connected FLASH extension or number FLASH 95 With a call connected FLASH Q4 extension SIP Star Code Hold 74 extension dial 75 Password client assigned account code 76 extension Feature not available with SIP With a call connected Hold 94 extension dial Explanation Clears the telephone uni s call forwarding conditions Once this star code is invoked you must add any appropriate forwarding conditions back to the extension Any existing forwarding conditions that were set by the phone application will still remain in effect Note A confirmation tone will sound after applying this star code command Note User centric users cannot use this star code Contact your system administrator for information on call forwarding setup for user centric users Telephone sets can transfer a party directly to another voice mailbox The phone system sends call detail information to the call detail record Note Codes are custom assigned by the 3C system administrator Callers without intercom can enter this star code to intercom a phone equipped with intercom Conferences parties Note The user must select a new line on which to place the second call for the conference Places a call to a spec
19. Extension 353 is holding a call Select an option trom below eS re i Oo CBCa eee ee To pick up a ringing call to a member of your workgroup If you are set up for a workgroup you will see a flashing red LED when there is a ringing call on any other workgroup member s phone e While your phone is idle and the other workgroup member s phone is ringing do one of the following e To place a hands free or headset call Press the key for the workgroup member then use your headset or the phone s speaker to continue the call on your phone e To use your phone handset for the call Pick up your phone handset then press the key for the workgroup member to pick up the call Non idle call states e If you are on a call and want to pick up the ringing call for the workgroup member press the key for the workgroup member to automatically put your current call on hold and pick up the ringing call e If you are on a call and want to pick up the ringing call for the workgroup member place your current call on hold and then press the key for the workgroup member to pick up the ringing call To transfer a call to a member of your workgroup 1 While on a call press the key for the workgroup member you want to transfer the call to 2 Press the Blind soft key to Blind transfer your call Figure 9 34 Transfer soft key Select an option trom below CB Clear DT700 Phone User Guide 9 203 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMM
20. Figure 8 40 Figure 8 41 Figure 8 42 10 Figure 8 43 8 140 Save softkey Mame Lab Muriber 346 speed Dial 5 Monitor visual Directory Entry Mo 4 If the Speed Dial number is already used for another entry you will see an error when you try to save the entry Speed Dial In Use Menu Display To change the Speed Dial Key number for the entry select L3 Speed Dial and enter a new Speed Dial Key number A confirmation displays telling you the speed dial has been updated Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Speed Dial Edit Confirmation Entry Updated successtully To return to the main phone screen press the Exit softkey or the Feature key Exit softkey Press soft key or wait to load page SPEED DIAL KEYS WITH PERSONAL DIRECTORY ENTRIES To program a Speed Dial Key that will also show up in your Personal Directory you can define the Speed Dial Key number when you are setting up the Personal DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Directory entry or set it up using the Feature Key and select to show the entry in the Personal Directory The Speed Dial information will be listed in the Personal Directory similar to all other Personal Directory entries and you can also view the entry information using the Feature Key To add a Programmable Key as a Speed Dial Key with a Personal Directory entry using the Feature Key 1 Enter the
21. Installing a Directory Card Optional 1 2 3 50 A directory card also known as an abbreviated dialing table can be attached to the phone The directory card can be used to record often dialed numbers or other important information Directory cards are available as options Remove the protective sheet from the cover Attach the cover to the directory card and then attach it to the directory card holder DT700 Phone User Guide INSTALLATION Note To remove the directory card pinch the two sides of the directory card holder inward until the tabs release and pull the holder out of the grooves Figure 3 18 Directory Card Connection Cover Directory Card i 4 f LA e o lo TI Holder Groove INSTALLING REMOVING LINE KEY CARD OPTIONAL To remove Line Key Panel Button Panel 1 Carefully insert a tapered rod or a standard screwdriver between the right side of the Line Key Panel and the base of the phone to loosen the panel 2 Lift out the line key panel and remove it from the phone 3 If you also need to remove the Button Panel repeat steps 1 and 2 with the Button Panel on the phone 4 Remove the Line Key Card Figure 3 19 Line Key Card Removal Line Key Panel Line Key Card DT700 Phone User Guide 3 51 To install Line Key Card 3 52 1 2 Figure 3 20 Align the holes in the Line Key Card with the buttons on the phone Align the holes in the Line Key Panel with the Line Ke
22. Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Move to next entry Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Dial the highlighted number Completed call incoming call answered outgoing call connected etc Uncompleted call incoming call not answered outgoing call not connected etc LIST CONFERENCES The administrator can configure a microbrowser page to list the Conference Bridge information for the system including available conference addresses and conference address status To view the Conference listing 1 2 3 10 236 Press the Feature key Press the Home softkey or wait 2 seconds to connect to the microbrowser home page Select Conferences DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Figure 10 25 List conferences roe fo Hot Desking Forwarding Recording On Start Supervise Call History Next Select 4 Use the up and down cursor pad keys to browse the conference bridges on the system Figure 10 26 Conference bridge listings Conferences Conference Bridge 1 6001 Conference Bridge 2 6002 Conference Bridge 3 6003 Exit Details The List Conferences page handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Opens the Conference Bridge details page Exit Exit the microbrowser and return to the appropriate call status screen Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the microbrowser home pa
23. 2 Use the cursor pad or the T Up and Down softkeys to scroll to the entry you want to delete 3 Press the More softkey and then the Delete softkey Figure 11 79 More and Delete softkeys Director Entries Celular Horne 318475551234 Lab 346 Lab 2 371 4 Seach f nad Y E O d Dea f Et 4 Press the Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to confirm Figure 11 80 Delete Entry Confirm Cancel The entry will be deleted from your Personal Directory and if there is a Speed Dial Key associated with the entry it is also deleted 5 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to return to the Personal Directory Figure 11 81 Delete Entry Complete Menu Display The entry has been deleted Note For Personal Directory entries that are set as read only by your system administrator an error is displayed and the entry is not deleted To remove Personal Directory entry information but keep Speed Dial Key information Note For more information on Speed Dial Keys see the appropriate Programmable Keys chapter for your phone configuration 1 Press the Feature key The Feature key LED lights a steady red Figure 11 82 Feature Key GD 11 290 DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES The Personal Directory 2 Press the Speed Dial Key that you want to edit The programmable key LED flashes and the Speed Dial information for the key is shown Figure 11 83 Progr
24. 4 extension 6002 is currently on a call Select an option from below Cal CB Clear f CB Reset f Exit To clear Call Back 1 Press the Call Back key 2 Press the CB Clear soft key DT700 Phone User Guide 9 205 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS oag Using Enhanced Programmable Keys Figure 9 40 CB Reset soft key CallBack Options 4 Extension 6002 is currently on a Call Select an option from below Can f CB Clear f CE Reset Y Exit MONITOR SUPERVISE KEY To Monitor a Call Workgroup scenario If you have Supervise rights over other users you can listen monitor or join barge calls for users you have Supervise rights over The workgroup member s LED on your phone will display stead red to show they are currently on a call 1 Press the key for the workgroup member 2 Press the Monitor soft key Figure 9 41 Monitor soft key Extension 352 is currently on a call Select an option trom below You can then press the Barge or Record soft key to barge on the call or start a recording of the call Press Exit to exit this screen without starting a Barge session or recording of the call Figure 9 42 Monitoring status Connected To 352 RECORD KEY To record your current call e Press the Record key A recording of your current call starts 9 206 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using Enhanced Programmable Keys To s
25. AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Figure 11 2 DT710 ITL 6DE softkeys NEC me Softkeys de Mon Mas 3 03 49PM PT Woicemaill NewCall Exit Help D DT710 ITL 6DE ECONOMY PHONE DISPLAY The DT710 ITL 6DE LCD area shows three lines of information while the DT730 and DT730G phones are capable of showing five lines of information Most screen examples in this guide are for DI 730 phones Figure 11 3 Main Menu Display for ITL 6DE Directory Call History Exit Select The T Up and Down softkeys on the phone indicate to the user when there are more options than displayed on the LCD screen Figure 11 4 T Up and Down softkeys on Change or Select Monitor Menu Display for DT710 ITL 6DE Phones Visual a a cy Alone THE HELP KEY Note This feature is not available on DT710 ITL 2E model phones Using the Help key You can use the Help key to view information about the softkeys that are displayed on your phone 1 Press the Help key 11 254 DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 11 5 2 Figure 11 6 Figure 11 7 DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES The Menu Key Help key Tue Jan 25 10 31 AM Victoria Wroblewski Help Press the softkey for which you want to see Help information Press a softkey for Additional Help Fri Movy 19 01 49 PM Press a Line or Soft Key for help You can use the T Up and Down softkeys or the
26. AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES The Personal Directory SS se Ringing SIP Net SIP Net Ringing 3C system Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use If you have Visual monitor settings for a Speed Dial entry the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown by the LED Color Table 11 5 Monitor Presence LED Colors for Speed Dial Keys Type Programmable Line Key Registered LED is not lit Unregistered LED is not lit fa Speed Dial Key Not Available LED is not lit No Monitoring DT700 Phone User Guide 11 281 9 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Ringing SIP Net Ringing 3C system Subscription Failed Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use Held 3C system Programmable Key LED LED is not lit fa Blinking Red la Blinking Green fa J LED is not lit fa J Blinking Red la Note DT700 phones do not publish presence information Depending on other phones on your system and any phone application software that you use you may see different LED behavior for different presence states You can also press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen Review the Personal Directory entry If you want to change any of the information use the cursor pad or the Up and Vv Down softkeys to scroll to that item then press the More softkey and then press
27. Call History information Missed Received and Placed Calls is deleted when the phone is restarted If you did not reboot your phone your phone may have been restarted by your system administrator to update the phone firmware or implement other system changes DT700 Phone User Guide PHONE TROUBLESHOOTING Audio The name shown on the LCD of my phone is wrong The name that shows up on the main screen of your phone is configured by your system administrator If there the name shown on your phone is incorrect contact your system administrator AUDIO There is no audio to my handset 1 Verify that the headset is firmly plugged into the HANDSET jack on the back of the telephone Figure 12 22 Handset Connection Modular Plug Coiled Cord Groove HANDSET Connector 2 Make sure the switch hook is working correctly when you lift the headset 3 Make sure the Speaker key on the telephone is not on The LED on the Speaker key is green when the Speaker is active When the Speaker is active there is no audio to your telephone handset Figure 12 23 Speaker is on GD 4 Make sure you do not have a headset enabled for the phone If the headset is enabled you will see a Headset icon and softkey when you are phone calls Figure 12 24 Headset icon and Headset softkey le thu Apr 22 1155 AM 111 Wroblewski victoria t646 Conference End all DT700 Phone User Guide 12 307 PHONE TROUBLESHOOTING Peel There
28. Contents vii Network Connections cccccccecceeeeceeeece cece eeceeeeaeeeaeeeseeesaeeeseeeaeeeseeeseeesanes 12 297 My phone cannot register On the NETWOFK cccecccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneees 12 297 My phone indicates that the network cable is unplugged 12 297 My phone cannot reconnect to the network after a IOCAl settings change wcccssinic cecesnsweduindadnsatsinondsandesoesandbasdaventaneancneatnaaneteas 12 298 cannot connect to the network through the PC port on the back of the phone cccccecccseeceeeceeeceeeeceeeceeeeeeeesaeeseeesaeees 12 298 My device connected to the PC Port lost its network connection 12 298 BO oe E EE E EEE EAEE EES 12 299 The phone does not power up Power Over Ethernet PoE 12 299 The phone does not power up Power supply ccceeceeeeeeeeeee eens 12 299 SAINI E EEEE cise ts A EAE E sno oss denne ETA E A AE T 12 299 The phone does not have a dial tOne ccccc cece secceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeees 12 299 The phone cannot make any calls ccecseeccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeseeens 12 300 The phone cannot make any external calls cccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 300 A Speed Dial Personal Directory entry is not working correctly 12 301 Telephone numbers from the Personal Directory or Call History are not dialing correctly ccccceccceccseecseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 12 301 The phone does n
29. DCL 60 console SPEED DIAL KEY CONFIGURATION Speed Dial Keys can be configured on the available Programmable Keys on your phone Speed Dial Keys allow you to use a single key to dial an internal extension such as a Help Desk an external telephone number or a star hash code Note The programmed digits associated with the Speed Dial Key are dialed as is by the DT700 and are not be subject to parsing or control by the DT 700 local 8 127 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS oag Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Digit Map The SIP server interprets the digits This allows for arbitrary dial strings including star codes to be defined as a Speed Dial DT710 ITL 2E SPEED DIAL CONFIGURATION In the case of the ITL 2E there are is only one Programmable Key The key on the left is the Line Key and the key on the right is the programmable Speed Dial Key The Speed Dial Key is programmed by your system administrator DT710 ITL 6DE DT730 AND DT730G SPEED DIAL CONFIGURATION All programmable keys not used as Line Keys can be configured as Speed Dial Keys Each Speed Dial Key can be configured with a number and optional name The number may be a star code Speed Dial Key Numbering Speed Dial Key numbering starts at number 2 with the first Programmable Key on the DT 00 phone If that Programmable Key is not programmed as a Line Key it can be programmed as Speed Dial Key number 2 If the first available Programmable Key is programmed as a Line Key
30. Figure 10 31 No search results Directory Results No matching entries The error screen handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation OK Exit the microbrowser and return to the appropriate call status screen 10 242 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Enhanced Programmable Keys Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the Search page Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key No operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key No operation Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key No operation Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS The Enhanced Programmable Keys feature for Standard SIP DT700 extends the Programmable Keys functionality by providing context sensitive access to advanced microbrowser features by a single key press The Enhanced Programmable Key functionality is backwards compatible with the existing Programmable Key functionality of DT 700 The following features have been implemented as Enhanced Programmable Keys e Speed Dial Key User defined Speed Dial Keys e Context Sensitive Enhanced BLF Key Call Call Back Transfer Pickup Monitor e Send To Voice Mail Key e Park Extension Key e DND Key e Call Forward Key e Call Back Key e Shortcut keys to access microbrowser web pages from the 3C System Web Server
31. INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES P o DT700 and DT730G Series Phones Figure 2 1 Table 2 4 ITL 24CG DT730G Series 2 3 16 6 5 T 8 an 9 10 Car Ge WHA E 12 13 14 T 11 15 ITL 24CG DT730G Series Keys and Parts 1 Call Indicator Lamp The Call Indicator Lamp at top corner of the display flashes when a Call is offered to the phone Also if you have Voice Mail service the Lamp lights steadily when a message has been left 2 Color LCD The color LCD Liquid Crystal Display provides call status activity information plus date time and softkey operation 3 Exit key This key allows you to exit from the Menu or Help mode and go back to the telephone main screen 4 Softkeys The softkeys show the available features for your current activity Any feature shown at the bottom of the LCD is available The appropriate key is displayed on the screen according to the call handling process 5 Help key Press the Help key and then press a softkey to display information about that softkey DT700 Phone User Guide 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DT700 Phone User Guide Programmable Keys Feature key Recall key Answer key Mic key Menu key Hold key Transfer key Speaker key Cursor pad USB Charging Port INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones The first programmable key is reserved as the Line Key Line Keys allow the user
32. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project E 341 NOTICES Po o Third Party Software Disclaimer and Limitations 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIA
33. STAR CODES AND PIN CODES IN PLACED CALLS PIN code masking may be enabled on your phone If it is enabled all digits dialed after the are replaced with x on the display and in the phone s Call History The number also cannot be dialed using the Recall key on the phone Each digit after the star code appears on the display for 2 seconds before it is changed to an x to allow time to verify the dialed digit Note PIN code masking is not used when entered Speed Dial Keys or Personal Directory entries CALL DURATION DT710 ITL 6DE phone Call duration is displayed in MM SS format for the first hour of a call and then HH MM format for the remainder of the call Figure 7 14 Call timer for DT710 ITL 6DE phone I Mon May 3 04 49PM Lab 346 O econ Endal DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D ITL 32D and DT730G ITL 12DG ITL 12CG phones Call duration is displayed in HH MM SS format Figure 7 15 Call timer for DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D ITL 32D and DT730G ITL 12DG ITL 12CG phones u Thu Apr 22 1127 AM Wroblewski victoria 646 Conference EndiCall ENDING A CALL To end a phone call hang up the phone handset or press the EndCall softkey Figure 7 16 EndCall softkey Thu Apr 22 1127 AM Wroblewski Victoria 646 7 106 DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC PHONE OPERATION Basic Call Operation REDIALING A NUMBER To redial the last number that was dialed from the phone press the
34. Select Maintenance Select Side 2 Connector Mode DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 3 28 6 Figure 3 29 10 11 12 Figure 3 30 13 DT700 Phone User Guide INSTALLATION Side 2 Connector Mode Maintenance Select DCL 60 Enable DCL 60 Press the OK softkey Press the Exit softkey Press the Exit softkey Press the Yes softkey to restart the phone Note You must restart the phone to fully enable the DCL 60 connector mode After the phone finishes rebooting disconnect the phone from power Remove the side panel from the phone Remove Side Panel from Terminal Attach the connection bracket to the phone using 3 of the provided screws 3 57 Figure 3 31 Attach connection bracket to phone Prepare the DCL 60 Console 1 Connect the 10 pin connector cable to the DCL 60 2 Position the cable through the cable groove Figure 3 32 Press the cable into groove Groove Connect the DCL 60 Console to the phone 1 Press the tab on the port cover on the left side of the back of the phone to release the protective cover that is over the SIDE 2 port Remove the cover Figure 3 33 Remove SIDE 2 port cover Side port cover 2 Slide the supplied DCL 60 module on to the connection bracket attached to the phone 3 Use 2 of the supplied screws to connect the bracket to the DCL 60 3 58 DT700 Phone User Guide INSTALLATION Figure 3 34 Screw DCL 60 module to the connector bracket 4 Co
35. You can also press this key to answer a waiting call Press key to mute the microphone The LED on this key flashes when the microphone is muted Press the key again to un mute the microphone Press this key to access the features and settings provided on the local telephone menu such as Call History Personal Directory or User Settings Press this key to place a call on hold Press this key to transfer a call Controls the built in soeaker which can be used for Hands Free dialing and conversations The LED on this key lights when the speaker is active Use this key to navigate to various features The up and down keys on the cursor pad can be used to adjust the volume of the phone This port located behind the LCD screen can be used to charge USB devices Fo o INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones ITL 32D DT730 SERIES PHONE LAYOUT AND PARTS Figure 2 5 ITL 32D DT730 Series Phone Layout Wien C L E 16 MY ON ON C oS MOS oO a A CON 30 A M E S 11 14 15 DT700 Phone User Guide Table 2 8 DT700 Phone User Guide INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones ITL 32D DT730 Series Keys and Parts 1 10 11 12 13 Call Indicator Lamp LCD Exit key Softkeys Help key Programmable Keys Feature key Recall key Answer key Mic key Menu key Hold ke
36. You can set your phone to prompt you to confirm the number when dialing Personal Directory Speed Dial or Call History entries For example if you dial external numbers from your Call History often you can set your dial preferences to edit before dialing so you can enter the outside line access code when your phone dials If you dial mostly internal numbers or use Personal Directory entries that have the outside line access code already programmed into the number you can set the dial preference so the telephone numbers dials directly Note The Dial Preference you select is applied to both the Call History and Personal Directory Speed Dials 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select User Settings 3 Select 6 Edit Before Dialing Figure 4 47 Edit Dial Preference r Select 4 Select your dialing preference DT700 Phone User Guide 4 77 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION og Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Figure 4 48 Dial Preference options Edit Before Dialing Cancel Disable When dialing from the Personal Directory or Call History numbers will be dialed as they appear in the Personal Directory or Call History If your system requires an outside line access code you may not be able to dial entries using the Call History Enable When dialing Personal Directory or Call History entries you will be prompted to edit confirm the number before the phone dials 5 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to a
37. e To enter special characters press the L key For a list of special characters see Speed Dial and Personal Directory Character Sets in the DT700 Phone User Guide e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys Use the telephone keypad to enter a phone number for the entry and press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Enter Telephone Number 0 Enter Murnber Oo y Ow Delte Cancel Up to 24 characters may be entered for the number Only digits and may be entered e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys e You can also press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen To use the Programmable Key you originally pressed for the Speed Dial press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Or If you want to use a different Programmable Key for the Speed Dial use the telephone keypad to enter the other Programmable Key number and press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Figure 8 50 Select Speed Dial Number Figure 8 51 Table 8 4 DT700 Phone User Guide Enter Speed Dial Kev The number of available Sped Dial Keys and their associated numbers depend on your model of DT 700 phone For more information on the va
38. features 2 4 keys and parts 2 20 to 2 22 layout 2 20 Speed Dial Key Numbering 5 94 8 129 8 130 J Jabra Bluetooth headset 2 41 Jabra Headset Support Connector Activation D 330 Supported DT700 Phones D 329 Supported Headsets D 329 Troubleshooting D 339 K Key Modules and Key Kits 2 36 Keypad entry Character Sets 4 85 Keypad first letter uppercase entry mode icon 2 30 4 87 12 303 Keypad lowercase entry mode icon 2 30 4 87 12 304 Keypad numeric entry mode icon 2 30 4 87 12 304 Keypad uppercase entry mode icon 2 30 4 87 12 303 Index INDEX keys and parts ITL 2E 2 24 to 2 26 ITL 6DE 2 22 to 2 24 ITL 12CG 2 8 to 2 9 ITL 12D 2 18 to 2 20 ITL 12DG 2 12 to 2 13 ITL 24CG to 2 7 ITL 24D 2 16 to 2 18 ITL 24DG 2 10 to 2 11 ITL 32D 2 14 to 2 16 ITL 8LD 2 20 to 2 22 L LAN cable connect 3 47 Language changing 4 71 LCD Backlight Timeout 4 75 contrast 4 74 ITL 6DE 2 23 ITL 12CG 2 8 ITL 12D 2 19 ITL 12DG 2 12 ITL 24D 2 17 ITL 24DG 2 10 ITL 32D 2 15 ITL 8LD 2 21 troubleshooting 12 305 Line Key Card 3 51 Line Key Panel remove 3 51 local configuration settings troubleshooting 12 298 Max Calls viewing 4 84 Menu key 4 64 8 123 11 255 ITL 6DE 2 23 ITL 12CG 2 9 ITL 12D 2 19 ITL 12DG 2 13 ITL 24CG 2 7 ITL 24D 2 17 ITL 24DG 2 11 ITL 32D 2 15 ITL 8LD 2 21 setup with 4 64 Menu List 2 32 Message Key ITL 2E 2 25 Message Waiting 7 119 B 320 Messaging advanced 7 119 Mic key ITL 2E 2 2
39. no details for programmed entries can be shown The programmed keys for the user will still be available for however may keys that phone supports and all entries in the user s Personal Directory are also available THE SCROLL KEY Pressing the Scroll key once will advance you to the next page in the DESI Less display For example if the icon for page 3 is flashing to indicate an event on that page you would press the Scroll Key twice to scroll from the first page to the third page of the DESI Less display Page Scrolling Example 1 Flashing Line 1 Denise Andrew Ethap Ben Charles 2 Press twice to go to Page 3 5 93 DT730 ITL 8LD WITH DISPLAY P o DT730 ITL 8LD DESI Less Display Note For more information about configuring programmable keys as Speed Dial Keys on ITL 8LD phones see Speed Dial Key Programming Examples on page 8 135 Speed Dial Key Numbering for ITL 8LD Phones For details on the Speed Dial Key numbering for the ITL 8LD phone see the example below Figure 5 5 DT7 30 ITL 8LD Speed Dial Key Numbering Page Page Page Page rage Page Page mersi 9 17 13 21 29 2 10 18 6 14 22 30 3 11 19 7 15 23 31 4 12 20 8 16 24 32 5 94 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 SECURITY FEATURES Note See the Administrator s Guide for information on security settings for DT 700 phones DT700 phones support several security protocols for secure systems All security settings for DT700 are programmed by yo
40. recibir el tratamiento adecuado para su destrucci n o reciclaje y deben ser depositados en las instalaciones designadas para ello La selecci n de residuos tiene ventajas significativas los materiales utiles pueden ser reciclados y se previene la dispersi n de sustancias no deseadas en la cadena de reciclaje municipal lo cual contribuye a la protecci n de la salud humana y del medio ambiente Le informamos que la eliminaci n de residuos de productos el ctricos o electr nicos a trav s del sistema municipal de recogida de basuras puede acarrear multas Para poder facilitar la recolecci n de residuos y su posterior reciclaje se ha llegado a acuerdos para la recolecci n y reciclaje local en todos los pa ses miembros de la Uni n Europea En caso de que deba deshacerse de alguno de sus productos el ctricos o electr nicos le rogamos compruebe los acuerdos contractuales que su compa a ha hecho en el momento de la adquisici n de dichos productos Puede encontrar toda la informaci n acerca de la recolecci n de residuos y su posterior reciclaje en la direcci n www nec unified com weee PARA PA SES NO PERTENECIENTES A LA UNI N EUROPEA La eliminaci n de productos el ctricos o electr nicos en pa ses no pertenecientes a la Uni n Europea debe ser realizada de acuerdo a la normativa local Si no existe ning n acuerdo con NEC Unified Solutions o con su distribuidor local le rogamos contacte con las autoridades locales para obtener
41. then the next available programmable key can be programmed as Speed Dial Key number 3 etc For details on the Speed Dial Key numbering for each phone see the examples below Figure 8 14 32 Key Phone Speed Dial Key Numbering Exit Help O a ca caa eca O 8 128 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Figure 8 15 24 Key Phone Speed Dial Key Numbering Speed Dial Key Numbering for ITL 8LD Phones For details on the Speed Dial Key numbering for the ITL 8LD phone see the example below DT700 Phone User Guide 8 129 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Figure 8 18 DT730 ITL 8LD Speed Dial Key Numbering Page Page Page Page Page mae Page Page omy 9 17 13 21 29 2 10 18 6 14 22 30 3 11 19 T 15 23 31 4 12 20 8 16 24 32 Speed Dial Key Numbering for Expansion Modules For supported expansion modules 8LK L and DCL 60 Speed Dial Key numbering for the expansion model starts at the next available number Table 8 1 Expansion Module Numbering Examples Module Speed Dial Key Numbers 8LK L 12 13 to 20 Phone 24 Key 25 to 32 Phone DCL 60 12 Key 13 to 72 Phone 24 Key 25 to 84 Phone 32 Key 33 to 92 Phone ITL 8LD 33 to 92 Presence Monitor Settings and Speed Dial Keys If you have Visual monitor settings for a Speed Dial entry the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown by the LED Color Table 8 2 Monitor Presence LED Col
42. you can set your phone so you do not need to confirm when a number is dialed 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select User Settings 3 Select 6 Edit Before Dialing Figure 12 13 Edit Dial Preference O Select 4 Select your dialing preference Figure 12 14 Dial Preference options Edit Before Dialing Cancel e Disable When dialing from the Personal Directory or Call History numbers will be dialed as they appear in the Personal Directory or Call History If your system requires an outside line access code you may not be able to dial entries using the Call History Enable When dialing Personal Directory or Call History entries you will be prompted to edit confirm the number before the phone dials DT700 Phone User Guide 12 301 PHONE TROUBLESHOOTING E 5 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to accept the setting You can also press the Cancel softkey to exit without making any changes The phone does not ring 1 Figure 12 15 cannot reconnect to 12 302 Turn up the ringer volume a Press the 4 key on the cursor pad while it is in the on hook status to turn up the ringer volume b If you do not hear ringer tone contact your system administrator Check that you do not have the phone set to ring only on a headset a Press the Menu Key b Select User Settings c Select Headset Ringing and then Disable to disable headset ringing d Press the OK softkey or Enter key on th
43. 4 Up Y Down keys on the cursor pad to scroll through the help information if needed Delete softkey Help screen Press the Exit softkey to return to the previous screen Note Help screens may not be available for all the softkeys on your phone THE MENU KEY The Menu Key and cursor pad on the DT710 ITL 6DE DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D and ITL 32D and DT730G ITL 12CG ITL 12DG phones lets you access additional settings and features for your phone 11 255 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES 11 256 Figure 11 8 Figure 11 9 Menu Key Menu CALL HISTORY Note These feature are not available on DT710 ITL 2E model phones You can view information about Missed Calls Placed Calls and Received Calls on your telephone The LCD screen displays the phone number date and time for each call When you have missed any calls the Missed Calls icon and a message display on the LCD Missed Calls icon and message a hu Apr 2z 1117 AM Yictoria J vvroblewski Mes Fruit 1023aM Yictoria J vvroblewski 3 New Missed Calls cern Newall 3 New Missed Calls cern Newall STAR CODES AND PIN CODES IN PLACED CALLS PIN code masking may be enabled on your phone If it is enabled all digits dialed after the are replaced with x on the display and in the phone s Call History The number also cannot be dialed using the Recall key on the phone Each digit after the st
44. 610 210r9 DT700 Phone User Guide DOCUMENT REVISION HISTORY 610 210r2 Revisions for phone firmware version NEC Std SIP 1 2 x and later 610 210r3 Revisions for Sphericall release for v7 0 3 NEC Std SIP 1 1 610 210r4 Revisions for phone firmware version NEC Std SIP 2 0 x and later 610 210r5 Revisions for phone firmware version NEC Std SIP 2 1 x and later 610 210r6 Revisions for phone firmware version NEC Std SIP 2 2 x and later 610 210r7 March 2013 Revisions for e DT700 phone firmware version NEC Std SIP 2 3 x and later e DT730G phone firmware version NEC Std SIP 3 x and later e 3C Unified Communication System 8 1 3 7 and later 610 210r8 November 2013 Revisions for e 3C Unified Communication System 8 5 3 and later 610 210r9 April 2014 Revisions for e DT700 phone firmware version NEC Std SIP 2 3 28 15 and later DT700 Phone User Guide P N 610 210r9 Vv vi DOCUMENT FEEDBACK To submit feedback comments changes or additional information related to this document please contact your NEC Technical Assistance Center s Please use the local regional contact information listed above for contact information When contacting NEC TAC please have the following information available DOCUMENT INFORMATION Document Name and Product Number System Release Version REGIONAL CONTACTS NEC HEADQUARTERS amp ASIA OPERATIONS NEC Corporation 7 1 Shiba 5 chome Minato ku Tokyo 108 8001 Japan Telephone 81 3 3454 1111 Fax 81 3
45. 6470 ITL 24CG Yes e Jabra PRO 9400 series LINK 14201 XX e Jabra GO 6470 ITL 12DG Yes e Jabra PRO 9400 series LINK 14201 XX e Jabra GO 6470 ITL 24DG Yes e Jabra PRO 9400 series LINK 14201 XX e Jabra GO 6470 For more information on using the Bluetooth headset with your DT700 phone see Appendix D Jabra Bluetooth Headset Support for DT 700 Phones 2 41 INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES I 5 03 casicmen 2 42 DT700 Phone User Guide INSTALLATION BEFORE YOU BEGIN e Remove the phone from its packaging and inspect the phone for any damages e Verify that a station account has been created for the user and DT700 phone e These steps only outline the setup of the equipment and physical connection of the phone to the network For information on configuring a DT 700 phone for connection to the network contact your system administrator e Read through the installation procedures and assemble any equipment required to install the phone 10 BASE T 100 BASE T TX LAN cable power adapter tapered rod screwdrivers etc ADJUSTING ANGLE OF TILT LEG The angle of the tilt leg can be adjusted in four levels Figure 3 1 Tilt Levels Fourth Level Third Level Second Level oo First Level To raise tilt leg 1 Turn the phone upside down 2 Adjust the tilt leg in the direction of the arrow until you hear it click DT700 Phone User Guide 3 43 Figure 3 2 Raise Tilt Leg Tilt Leg
46. 7 digit number A page displays the success or failure of the operation Figure 9 16 Handset forwarding added success Handset Forwarding all Forwarding added The Handset Status screens handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the previous screen Redial key 9 184 DT700 Phone User Guide 6 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll FORWARD key No operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key No operation Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key No operation Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Multiple handset forwarding conditions may be enabled for your phone To add additional forwarding conditions use the microbrowser to enter the additional forwarding conditions To set Handset forwarding using star codes 1 2 Lift the handset from the phone Dial 72 lt forwarding number gt All calls to your phone will be forwarded to the configured number s Multiple handset forwarding conditions may be enabled for your phone To enter additional numbers hang up the phone and then lift the handset to enter an additional number example 72 forwarding number hang up 72 another forwarding number hang up To set Condition
47. Data Clear Confirmation acceptable user actions keys Acceptable User Actions Keys Description The following section describes behavior on certain specific user actions key events pertaining to this screen Digit key No Operation 4 way scroll BACK key Redial key Discard changes and return to Clear Settings 4 way scroll FORWARD key No Operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key No Operation Volume UP key 4 way scroll DOWN key Volume No Operation DOWN key ENTER key Restore all User settings to their default values Note There are no menu items associated with Confirm Menu settings To Clear Personal Directory 1 Press the Menu key User Settings 2 Select 5 Clear Settings or LU Clear Settings Note The number of the menu item may differ based on the Edit Before Dialing settings on your phone 3 Select Clear Personal Directory DT700 Phone User Guide 4 79 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION oag Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Figure 4 50 Clear Personal Directory Clear Personal Directory Clear Personal Directory And Speed Dial Entries Cancel The confirmation screen manage the following events Table 4 4 Clear Confirmation softkeys Discard changes and return to Clear Settings OK Erase all Personal Directory entries and Speed Dial Key information on the phone Table 4 5 Data Clear Confirmation acceptable user actions keys The following section describes behavior on certai
48. Desk session DT700 Phone User Guide 1 2 Press the Hot Desk key to open the Hot Desk login screen Enter your user name and password and press the OK soft key to log on to the phone The following screen is shown Press the OK to exit the screen The LED on the Hot Desk key turns off when you exit this screen Note Due to system polling it may take up to 5 minutes before your name and extension are shown on the phone after you log in 10 249 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 5 Frocrammavie Koy To log out of your Hot Desk session 10 250 1 Table 10 4 While you are in a Hot Desk session press the Hot Desk Key You are logged out off the phone and the following screen is shown Press OK to exit the screen The LED on the Hot Desk key turns off when you exit this screen TRUNK DIAL KEY The Trunk Dial key is used to monitor the availability of trunks on your system and to place calls using specified trunks on the system TRUNK PRESENCE LEDS Trunk Presence LEDs LEDisnot Trunk not registered with the system lit oF Trunk is not in service Trunk channels available to make outside calls Busy All trunk channels are occupied To seize a trunk to place a call e When the Trunk Dial key LED is green fo to indicate that the trunk is available press the Trunk Dial key If the trunk is online and in service and there is an available line on the trunk the phone will allo
49. Dial key programmable Key or Enhanced Programmable Key Record Park Hot Desk key etc INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES 2 40 Figure 2 28 Figure 2 29 Speed Dial keys can be configure on the DCL 60 Console to allow the phone to monitor the status or presence of other users Note Only one connection to the Side 2 connector port is available on the phone so the phone can only support a DCL 60 console OR a Jabra headset Both cannot be connected to the same phone at the same time MAXIMUM NUMBER OF LINE KEYS WITH THE DCL 60 The following tables describe the maximum number of line keys supported on each DT 00 model when DCL 60 configuration modes is enabled It also specifies the index associated with the first and last DCL 60 Console key All the keys from key 1 to key 60 are numbered sequentially DCL 60 DCL 60 Product Model Name DCL 60 Max Line Console Console Last Name Mode Keys First Key Key 60 Number Number DCL 60 LEDS Note The LEDs on the DCL 60 Console are updated sequentially starting from the first key on the module so if all keys on the phone need to be updated for an event there may be a delay between the time the first key is updated and the time when the last key is updated Each key on the DCL 60 Console has two LEDs situated at each corner of the key The LED on the left is red and the LED on the right is green Left LED Right LED If the line key is configured to monitor an ent
50. Display indicates the status of 802 1x authentication along with a counter that indicates the time in seconds since the supplicant initiated the authentication process when the phone is negotiating security This counter stops incrementing if the 802 1x authentication process is stopped e g on detection of LAN port down and it restarts when the 802 1x authentication is restarted DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 SECURITY FEATURES Connecting S021 Connecting Press Exit to Reset The Connecting screen is displayed when the DT700 is re sending EAPOL Start requests after receiving an EAPOL Success response from the switch authenticator This case happens when the authenticator is not configured with a valid authentication server Held S024 Held f1 Press Exit to Reset The Held screen is displayed when the DT 700 receives an EAPOL Failure from the authenticator in response to the EAP Response Identity message This case happens when the authenticating server or the supplicant have incorrect credentials Acquired connection olz ie Acquired Press Exit to Reset The Acquired screen is displayed intermittently when the DT700 has received an EAPOL Request Identity before it attempts to send an EAPOL Response Identity message with the requested credentials Parameter missing A021 Parameter s
51. Do not hang up the telephone handset or press the Speaker key unless you want the two calls to be connected in a blind transfer call You can hang up the telephone handset or press the Speaker key after you connect with all the callers To end a three party conference call press the EndCall softkey or hang up the telephone handset You will disconnect from both parties but they will still be connected with one another until they each hang up their telephone TRANSFERRING CALLS Note Transfer operations cannot be completed if the person you are trying to transfer the call to places you on hold or if the call from you is placed in a held state before the transfer operation completes The operation fails and you remain connected to the caller the same as before you started the transfer operation An Attended Transfer is when you consult with the other party before transferring the call You connect the two callers and you are then disconnected from the call While on a call press the Transfer key 7 115 BASIC PHONE OPERATION Po om Call Transferring and Conferencing Figure 7 43 Transfer Key C This puts the current call on hold so you can start to transfer the call 2 Use the key pad to dial the telephone number to which the call is to be transferred 3 Press the Dial softkey or wait a few seconds for the call to be automatically dialed Figure 7 44 Transfer to Number D Thu Apr 22 12 55 PM aj2 4 After the other party an
52. Enhanced BLFs provide the phone user with single press access to phone functionality depending upon the state of the phone and upon the state of the BLF s Subscribed Address e Pickup Pickup provides you with the ability to answer a call that is being offered to ringing on a Subscribed Address Note that the 3C system always picks up the oldest call on the Subscribed Address e Supervise Barge Monitor Supervise provides Barge and Monitor functionality A user with Supervisor privileges can listen to the call session between extensions and if required the user can barge into the session For more information on configuring a system and users for Barge Monitor or using Barge Monitor see the UNIVERGE 3C Supplemental Features Guide This functionality requires the administrator to configure the phone user with the Supervisor permission in the 3C system e Transfer Transfer allows the phone user to perform a transfer of the connected call or held call that is in focus to the Subscribed Address A Transfer operation on a non connected call or held call that is not in focus has no operation e Call Back Call Back functionality allows the phone user to set call back ona Subscribed Address When that address becomes idle the phone notifies the user by providing visual and audible indications through the key LED and by playing a soft ring On receiving the notification the user can place a call to the Subscribed Address either by pressing th
53. Features Explanation Move to previous menu item does not show if first menu item is selected Move to next menu item does not show if last menu item is selected Exit Exit the microbrowser and return to the appropriate call screen Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to microbrowser home page Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Dial the highlighted number Directory key 4 way scroll UP key Move to previous entry Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Move to next entry Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Dial the highlighted number Completed call incoming call answered outgoing call connected etc Uncompleted call incoming call not answered outgoing call not connected etc To view the Conference listing 9 192 1 2 Press the Feature key Press the Home softkey or wait 2 seconds to connect to the microbrowser home page DT700 Phone User Guide 3 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Select List Conferences Figure 9 24 List Conferences 4 amp Hot Desking Login C Handset Forwarding A Start Recording Call C1 Supervise a Call View System Call History Prd List Conferences Search Directory Use the up and down cursor pad keys to browse the conference bridges on the system Figure 9 25 Conference bridge listings DT700 Phone User Guide Conference Bridge 4 574 A Conference Bridge 5 575 Conference Bridge 6576 Co
54. If you have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the headset If you do not have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the speaker on the phone You can also press this key to answer a waiting call Press key to mute the microphone The LED on this key flashes when the microphone is muted Press the key again to un mute the microphone Press this key to access the features and settings provided on the local telephone menu such as Call History Personal Directory or User Settings Press this key to place a call on hold Press this key to transfer a call INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES I 05706 212077506 series Phones Figure 2 6 14 Speaker key Controls the built in soeaker which can be used for Hands Free dialing and conversations The LED on this key lights when the speaker is active 15 Cursor pad Use this key to navigate to various features The up and down keys on the cursor pad can be used to adjust the volume of the phone 16 Programmable Keys Additional Programmable line keys Programmable Key numbering starts with Key 25 at the top and to key number 32 for the ITL 32D phone ITL 24D DT730 SERIES PHONE LAYOUT AND PARTS ITL 24D DT730 Series 6 EN P A A R_ ABC DEF TOCO 10 I off rs J Tuv J wez magu OOO b S S en l 11 12 13 14 15 iii DT700 Phone User Guide Table 2 9 DT700 Phone User Gui
55. Keys see Speed Dial and Programmable Keys on page 8 124 To edit a Personal Directory entry 1 Press the Menu key or cursor pad to access the Personal Directory 2 Use the T Up and Down softkeys or the 4 Up LY Down keys on the cursor pad to scroll to the entry you want to edit 3 Press the More softkey and then the Edit softkey DT700 Phone User Guide 11 283 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Figure 11 69 More and Edit softkeys Directory Entries Cellular 61645559876 Home 618475551234 Lab 346 Lab 2371 4 Doone of the following Use the Telephone Keypad a Use the telephone keypad to select the number of the field you want to edit Use the softkeys a Use theT Up and Down softkeys to scroll to the field you want to edit b Press the More softkey and then the Edit softkey to edit the field Figure 11 70 More and Edit softkeys Save _ Exit gt Use the Cursor Pad a Use the 4 Up and Y Down keys on the Cursor pad to scroll to the field you want to edit b Press Enter on the cursor pad to edit the field 5 Edit the desired field s Name a To edit the name use the telephone keypad and cursor pad Use the left cursor key on the cursor pad to backspace and then press the Delete softkey to delete the character that is before the cursor Or To delete the entire name entry press the Delete softkey 11 284 DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HI
56. Mas 3 03 49PM 346 Yoicemalill NewCall Thu Aug 30 2 56 AM Richard Thomas 1002 DT700 Phone User Guide 2 27 INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES P o DT700 and DT730G Series Phones Table 2 14 Icons Registered Indicates the phone is currently registered with a SIP server Unregistered Indicates the phone is currently not registered with any SIP servers This may indicate a problem connecting to the SIP server Network Cable Indicates a problem with the phone s Unplugged Fa connection to the network The problem may be with the network cable or the LAN port your phone is connected to Check both ends of the network cable that you use to connect your phone to the network for loose connections Try using another network cable to connect your phone to the network or try connecting to another active LAN port on the network Dialing This icon appears when you are dialing a number If you have Call Pickup on your system this icon also appears when you are in Pickup mode Call Pickup is only available on 3C systems Ringing Incoming Indicates an incoming telephone call Ringing Outgoing Indicates that the number you have dialed is ringing This icon only displays for numbers that are monitored by the system such as internal numbers Active Call E Indicates you are currently on a call Missed Call Appears when there is a missed call Once you check the missed call log in the Call History
57. ON The telephone is busy It is also possible to program a dedicated function feature under the Programmable Keys Speed Dial keys Function Activation De Activation and Status Monitoring can be done for the following functions e Follow me e Automatic Ring Back e Call Forwarding on Busy Extension e Night Extension absence presence e Executive Secretary absence presence e Group absence presence e Don t disturb e Call Pickup Pressing the key activates the function The corresponding LED is switched ON Pressing the key once more de activates the function The LED is switched OFF One of the Programmable Keys Speed Dial keys can be programmed with the Do Not Disturb DND function When activated indialling parties will fall back to an operator Press the speed dial key programmed with the DND function LED is ON or dial the activate prefix Press the speed dial key once more LED is OFF or dial the cancel prefix to cancel DND Ask your system administrator for more details B 319 Figure B 1 SIP NET PREFIXES The SIP Net prefixes to activate or de activate the various features are different per customer s configuration Ask your System Administrator for those prefixes MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION The DT700 phones have a call indicator lamp at the right top corner of the unit that lights steadily when a voice message has been left An icon also displays on call status screens Depending on y
58. Personal Directory the same name and same number are not allowed An error is displayed if you create an entry with the same name and same number as an existing entry Figure 11 76 Directory Duplicate Not Allowed Menu Display Duplicate Entry Mot Allowed If the Speed Dial number for a new Personal Directory entry is already used for another entry you will see an error when you try to save the Personal Directory entry Press the OK softkey then select L3 Speed Dial to edit the Speed Dial number before trying to save the entry again Figure 11 77 Speed Dial In Use Menu Display Note For more information on Speed Dial Keys see Speed Dial and Programmable Keys on page 8 124 7 A confirmation displays telling you that the entry has been updated Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Figure 11 78 Edit Entry Successful Entry Updated successtully DELETING A PERSONAL DIRECTORY ENTRY Deleting Personal Directory entries will also delete any Speed Dial Key information that is saved with the Personal Directory Entry To remove an entry from the Personal Directory and still keep it as a Speed Dial entry see To remove Personal Directory entry information but keep Speed Dial Key information on page 11 290 To delete a Personal Directory entry 1 Press the Menu key or cursor pad to access the Personal Directory DT700 Phone User Guide 11 289 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES
59. Redial key Figure 7 17 Redial Key for DT710 ITL 2E phones ress J Figure 7 18 Redial from Cursor Pad for DT710 ITL 6DE and DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D and ITL 32D phones Redial HOLD RESUME A CALL To hold resume a call 1 While on a call press the Hold key to place the call on hold Figure 7 19 Hold Key If the SIP server supports music on hold the other party hears music on hold 2 To resume the held call press the Hold key or press the Resume softkey Figure 7 20 Call on Hold and Resume softkey Thu Apr 22 1149 AM 1M Wroblewski Victoria 646 EndCall j Resume F Conference Newall e DT710 ITL 6DE Phones On hold duration is displayed in MM SS format for the first hour and then HH MM for the remainder of the call The maximum duration is 99 59 59 e DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D and ITL 32D Phones On hold duration is displayed in HH MM SS format The maximum duration is 99 59 59 Note During a held call you can dial another party by pressing the NewCall softkey which provides dial tone DT700 Phone User Guide 7 107 BASIC PHONE OPERATION I 25 21 operon If you have problems reconnecting to a call after it is put on hold press the EndCall softkey to terminate the call USING A HEADSET TO MAKE AND RECEIVE CALLS If you have a headset attached to your phone and your phone has been configured for the headset see To enable an external headset on page 4 67 you can eith
60. Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Figure 4 9 Adjust Headset call volume b Tue May 4 09 30 AM Wroblewski Victoria 646 To adjust the call volume speaker Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Press the 4 Up Y Down key on the Cursor pad during speaker phone operation You must press the Up LY Down key multiple times and cannot press and hold to adjust the volume Adjust Speaker call volume I Tue May 4 09 28 AM Wroblewski Victoria 646 BASIC SETUP WITH THE MENUS AND CURSOR PAD The Menu Key and cursor pad on the DT710 ITL 6DE DT 730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D and ITL 32D and DT730G ITL 12CG ITL 12DG phones lets you access additional settings and features for your phone Menu Key Menu ae DESI less Display LCD Settings The LCD settings for the ITL 8LD apply to both the main LCD screen and the DESI less display screen simultaneously You cannot set different LCD Contrast or LCD Backlight settings for each screen To select an Internal Ringtone 4 64 1 2 The internal ringtone is used for all incoming internal calls Press the Menu key Select User Settings DT700 Phone User Guide 3 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Select Ringtone Figure 4 12 Ringtone menu 4 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 DT700 Phone User Guide Ringtone Select Internal Ringtone Internal Ringtone Internal Ringtone 1 Ringtone 1 C 2 Ringtone 2
61. Table 11 7 Monitor Presence LED Colors for Speed Dial Keys aoe Programmable yP Key LED Line Key Registered LED is not lit Unregistered LED is not lit la Speed Dial Key Not Available LED is not lit No Monitoring DT700 Phone User Guide 11 287 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Tbe Programmable yP Key LED BLF LED is not lit la Ringing SIP Net Blinking Red Ringing 3C system Blinking Green Subscription Failed Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use Held 3C system Note DT700 phones do not publish presence information Depending on other phones on your system and any phone application software that you use you may see different LED behavior for different presence states b Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey 6 Press the Save softkey to save the entry information Figure 11 75 Save softkey Note For entries that are set as read only by your system administrator an error is displayed and the entry is not changed Entries are uniquely defined by the combination of number and name For the purpose of uniquely defining an entry the name is case insensitive Multiple entries with the same number and different names are allowed and multiple entries with the same name and different numbers are allowed Multiple entries with 11 288 DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES The
62. To add a Programmable Key Speed Dial Key without a Personal Directory entry cccccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 8 136 To add a Programmable Key as a Speed Dial Key with a Personal Directory entry using the Feature Key 0006 8 141 To add a Programmable Key as a Speed Dial Key with a Personal Directory Entry from the Personal Directory 8 145 To add a Speed Dial Key to an existing Personal Directory entry 8 150 To configure a Programmable Key as a Speed Dial Key for a star hash code gee necessicsnecsdecsnstersebanventdadsesdaasaseceateeiceueesvacescenePeedense 8 155 Editing Speed Dial KeyS ccccseccsecceseeceeeceeeceeseeseeceeeseueeeueesueesaeeeaess 8 159 To edit a Speed Dial Key cccccccsccsseecseeceeeceeeceueceueceueeseeecseeseaeenaes 8 159 Deleting Speed Dial KeyS ccccccccsccceeeceeeceeeceueeeeeecueeceeeeeeeseeesaeeeaans 8 166 To delete the Speed Dial information ONLY from a Personal Directory Entry ccccccccccsecceceeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeaees 8 166 To delete an entire Speed Dial and Personal Directory entry 8 169 To delete a Speed Dial Only ntry ccc ccceeccseccseeeseeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeeaees 8 170 9 DT700 Microbrowser and Enhanced Programmable Key csssessesseeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 9 173 Using the MICrODrOWSET cccccccseeceeeeneeeceeeceeceeeeaeeeaeeeseeeseeesaueeaeseaeeeseeenes 9
63. To lower tilt leg 1 Turn the phone upside down 2 While lifting the center of the stopper adjust the tilt leg in the direction of the arrow until you hear it click Figure 3 3 Lower Tilt Leg Tilt Leg To remove tilt leg 1 Turn the phone upside down 2 Lower the tilt leg to first level 3 Remove the indicated portions a and b of the stopper from grooves A and B on the tilt leg and then widen the tilt leg 3 44 DT700 Phone User Guide INSTALLATION Figure 3 4 Remove Tilt Leg a f ri Tr k 4 Fa i se F ii in F a i a p i Fi at y ins i sat Leg A 4 While pushing the two hooks slide the tilt leg downward Remove the tilt leg from the terminal Figure 3 5 Remove Tilt Leg Hook yy Hook VY re To attach tilt leg 1 Turn the phone upside down 2 Align the hooks c through h of the tilt leg over the appropriate slots C through H of the phone 3 Slide the tilt leg upward until the hooks c and b click into place DT700 Phone User Guide 3 45 Figure 3 6 Tilt Leg Attach 4 Fit the indicated portions a and b of the stopper into grooves A and B on the tilt leg Figure 3 7 Tilt Leg Attach CONNECTING THE PHONE To attach the handset 1 Insert the coiled cord plug into the HANDSET connector on the back of the phone until you hear a click 2 Thread the coiled cord through the groove as shown in the figure below 3 46 DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 3 8 INS
64. a call from a specific extension dial 93 the extension example 93346 You will connect to the call To pick up a call on DT710 ITL 6DE DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D ITL 32D and DT730G ITL 12DG ITL 12CG phones 1 When anew call arrives press the Pickup softkey Figure A 1 Pickup softkey A Thu Apr 22 0845 AM Yictoria J vvroblewski Woicernail Mewcal 2 Depending on the type of call you want to pick up do one of the following To answer a call ringing on a specific extension a Press the Extn softkey A 310 DT700 Phone User Guide Figure A 2 Figure A 3 Figure A 4 Figure A 5 DT700 Phone User Guide 3C SYSTEM FEATURES Extn softkey 2 Fri Apr 23 1206 Pll Select Pickup mode b Enter the number of the extension you want to pick up Enter extension Fri Apr 23 12 13 PM Enter Extension c Press the Pickup softkey d You will connect to the call To answer a call from a Pickup Zone a Press the Zone softkey Zone softkey 2 Fri Apr 23 1206 Ph Cancel b Enter the zone number from which you want to pick up the call Enter Zone number Fri Apr 23 12 14 PM End all c Press the Pickup softkey d You will connect to the call A 311 Figure A 6 Figure A 7 DT710 ITL 2E phone 1 Figure A 8 To answer a call from your Pickup Group a Press the Group softkey Group softkey a Fri Apr 23 1206 Ph select Pickup mode
65. a name or a number The search string field has focus upon entering this page The keypad is in lower case character entry mode by default when entering the Search Directory page To toggle to numeric entry mode press the key Uppercase character mode is not supported Searches are not case sensitive Supported search characters Lowercase characters eT ele ee ee ee 2 ee ee ed ee S ae Sd S M eee DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Numeric characters o1 2 3 4 8 eB 2 0 Maximum number of search results 64 The Search Directory search string field accepts a maximum of 24 characters The Search Directory page handles the following events Hard Key Features Explanation Digit key Enter digits numeric digits only key Toggles between lower case character and numeric entry modes 4 way scroll BACK key Remain on existing screen move cursor to left Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Remain on existing screen move cursor to right Directory key 4 way scroll UP key No operation Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key No operation Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Sends contents of search string field to the Web Server The web server returns the sorted results last name first name Figure 9 29 Search results page H A 694 Dalal Amit amp 641 Raut Amit B 644 Mungikar Amruta B 538 Beckmann Andrew If no entries in
66. a phone that is part of a functioning UNIVERGE 3C system UNIVERGE Devices e DT700 SIP Phones UNIVERGE 3C or SIP Net systems All acronyms abbreviations or descriptive terms imply general adherence under the UNIVERGE 3C product brand and serve as easy to use terminology throughout the system For a reference of system features and terms for the UNIVERGE 3C system please see the appendices of this manual SUPPORTED PHONE MODELS This document details the entire line of phones in the DT 700 model lineup Not all phones listed in this document may be supported in all regions For information on specific models supported in your country or region contact your NEC reseller or support organization DT700 Phone User Guide 1 1 1 2 DT700 Phone User Guide INTRODUCTION TO THE DT 7 00 AND DT730G PHONES DT700 AND DT730G SERIES PHONES PLATFORM COMPATIBILITY The various models of DT 700 and DT730G SIP phones can be used on various communication server platforms including the following e NSIP NECi firmware on the Univerge platforms e 3C system platform equipped with Open SIP firmware e SIP Net platform equipped with Open SIP firmware This manual describes the general functionality of DT 700 phones running on a platform equipped with Open SIP firmware and either the 3C system or SIP Net platform For general information on using the phone see the Quick Reference Guide for the specific phone model For information on
67. accept the setting 7 Connect the headset to the phone a Insert the headset cord plug into the HEADSET connector on the back of the phone until you hear a click b Thread the cord through the groove as shown in the figure below Figure 3 14 Headset Connection Phone I R 4 AOZ A EAM h NZ f j 1 fi i A i Cable Groove Headset To connect a computer Optional Note Any devices connected to the phone s PC port will momentarily disconnect from the network when the phone is rebooted or if disconnect if there is a loss of power to the phone You can connect a computer to the network through the phone using a LAN cable if there are a limited number of available ports on your local area network Note If a device that is connected through the PC port on the back of the phone is having connection issues contact your system administrator to verify that the PC port is enabled on the phone 1 Insert the LAN cable into PC connector on the back of the phone until you hear a click DT700 Phone User Guide 3 49 Figure 3 15 LAN Cable Connection 2 Figure 3 16 3 Figure 3 17 C Connector LAN Cable LAN Cable Plug Thread the LAN cable through the groove on the back of the phone LAN Cable Connection LAN Cable Groove Lead the LAN cable out through the groove on the tilt leg as shown in the figure below LAN Cable Connection oe CE LAN Cable C _ lt fEESS Tilt Leg Groove
68. administrator Retrieves a ringing call or an on hold call at the ae we entered extension a Pickup Retrieves a ringing call from anywhere within the se Rea Group Pickup area FLASH Hold Places a call into a park zone or an address area Q Q where calls can be retrieved from any telephone ona phone system Deactivation the number of the park the number of the park zone as announced by zone as announced by operator operator dial 91 91 Retrieves a call from the park zone extension the number of the park the number of the park entered zone as announced by zone as announced by If there is more than one call in the zone it will take operator operator the oldest call in the zone Number determined by Number determined by Contact your 3C system administrator for information your 3C system your 3C system regarding your organization s paging system administrator administrator Paging DT700 Phone User Guide A 317 A 318 DT700 Phone User Guide SIP NET SYSTEM FEATURES Example DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS SPEED DIAL KEYS The Programmable Keys Speed Dial keys can be pre programmed with an internal telephone number for example a colleague s number of which the status can be monitored by means of the LEDs This Status Monitoring can only be done for internal numbers When the LED is e OFF The telephone is idle e FLASHING The telephone is ringing e
69. and Call Forwarding features 10 252 DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES These procedures outline some of the advanced features available on the economy and value phones in the DT700 series lineup Depending on the model of your phone and the configuration of your system not all features may be available on your phone Note The DT710 ITL 6DE phone has a smaller screen display than is shown in the examples in this section You may have to scroll using the cursor pad and softkeys to see all available options The following symbols represent the DT700 s directional cursor pad and key pad User actions Keys Digit key Select corresponding menu Item 4 way scroll BACK key lt Return to User Settings menu Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key gt Select highlighted menu item Directory key 4 way scroll UP key 4 Move to previous menu item Volume UP key 4 way scroll DOWN key v Move to next menu item Volume DOWN key ENTER key Select highlighted menu item center button on cursor pad Note The softkeys are buttons that change function depending on the situation Each softkey s current function is displayed on the LCD screen above the button on the phone Figure 11 1 DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D ITL 32D softkeys Tue Jan 25 10 31 AM Victoria Wroblewski Soft keys pT cicernail NewCall Exit Help DT700 Phone User Guide 11 253 CALL HISTORY
70. cursor pad and key pad User actions Keys Digit key Select corresponding menu Item 4 way scroll BACK key lt Return to User Settings menu Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key gt Select highlighted menu item Directory key 4 way scroll UP key 4 Move to previous menu item Volume UP key 4 way scroll DOWN key v Move to next menu item Volume DOWN key ENTER key Select highlighted menu item center button on cursor pad Note The softkeys are buttons that change function depending on the situation Each softkey s current function is displayed on the LCD screen above the button on the phone Figure 8 1 DT730 and DI730G softkeys Tue Jan 25 10 31 AM Victoria Wroblewski Soft keys pt cicernail NewCall Exit Help DT700 Phone User Guide 8 121 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Figure 8 2 DT710 ITL 6DE softkeys NEC Softkeys J Mon Mas 3 03 49PM PT Woicemaill NewCall Exit Help D C DT710 ITL 6DE ECONOMY PHONE DISPLAY The DT710 ITL 6DE LCD area shows three lines of information while the DT730 and DT730G phones are capable of showing five lines of information Most screen examples in this guide are for DI 730 phones Figure 8 3 Main Menu Display for ITL 6DE Directory Call History Exit Select The T Up and Down softkeys on the phone indicate to the user when there are more options than displayed on the LCD screen Figure 8 4 T Up and Down softkeys on Change or Select Monit
71. decide not to complete the conference the new call can be terminated by pressing the EndCall softkey Press the Conf key or press the Conference softkey after the other party has answered their phone to complete the conference Conference Calls a Thu Apr 22 1232 PMI TE 18475559976 Wroblewski Victoria t646 Endall DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC PHONE OPERATION Call Transferring and Conferencing HOLD RESUME CONFERENCE CALL To hold resume a conference call 1 While on a conference call press the Hold key or press the Hold softkey to put the call on hold The other parties in the conference call will hear music on hold Figure 7 36 Conference on hold Ea Thu Apr 22 1232 PMI 411 18475559976 Wroblewski Victoria t646 2 To resume the conference call press the Hold key or press the Resume softkey To call another party while on a conference call Note This feature may not be available on all systems For more information contact your system administrator 1 While on a conference call press the Hold key or press the Hold softkey to put the call on hold The other parties in the conference call will hear music on hold 2 Press the NewCall softkey to start a new phone call Figure 7 37 Start a new call a Thu Apr 22 1232 PM 18475559976 Wroblewski Victoria t646 Resume 3 Use the key pad to dial the telephone number of the party to be joined in the conference 4 Press the Dial
72. dial an internal number from the Call History using the handset 1Press the Menu key 2Select Call History 3Select either Missed Calls Received Calls or Placed Calls to view a call history list 4Use the cursor pad or the T Up and Down softkeys to scroll to the number you want to call 5To dial the call directly lift the telephone handset or press the Speaker key initiate the call To dial an external number from the Call History 1 2 3 5 Press the Menu key Select Call History Select either Missed Calls Received Calls or Placed Calls to view a call history list Use the cursor pad or the T Up and Down softkeys to scroll to the number you want to call Press the Options softkey or press Enter on the cursor pad Figure 11 23 Options softkey 6 DT700 Phone User Guide Placed Calls Thu Apr 22 114 arm Wroblewski Victoria 346 Thu Apr 22 11 21am 9194755951234 Select Dial 11 261 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Figure 11 24 Call History Options Call History Option Dial 918475551234 Directory Add Select If prompted press the OK softkey You can also use the Delete softkey and cursor pad to enter a different number than is shown on the LCD If calls cannot be dialed directly from the Call History you may need to add an outside access code to the number before it is dialed if required by your system Figure 11 25 Dial the number from the C
73. entries D Page Forward Go to the next page of Directory entries Select View Directory entry information To access the Personal Directory 1 Doone of the following Using the Menu Key System Without Corporate Directory a Press the Menu key b Select 4 Personal Directory Using the Menu Key System With Corporate Directory a Press the Menu key b Select Directory c Select Personal Directory 11 270 DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES The Personal Directory Figure 11 40 Main Menu Display Using the cursor pad System Without Corporate Directory a Press the Directory key right cursor pad key Figure 11 41 Directory Key from the Cursor Pad Redial b Select 4 Personal Directory Using the cursor pad System With Corporate Directory a Press the Directory key right cursor pad key Figure 11 42 Directory Key from the Cursor Pad Redial b Select Directory c Select Personal Directory Figure 11 43 Directory Entries Menu Display Personal Directory Corporate Directory DT700 Phone User Guide 11 271 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES 2 Use the T Up and Down softkeys or the 4 Up LY Down keys on the cursor pad to scroll through the Personal Directory 3 Press the More softkey twice and then press the Exit softkey or press the Exit key to return to the main
74. for Handset Forward are available in all languages supported by both the 3C system and the phoneset The 3C system currently supports some languages e g Japanese that the phoneset does not support The phone currently supports some languages e g Croatian that the 3C system does not support The Microbrowser pages are be available in all languages supported by both the 3C system and the phone This currently includes Dutch NLD English UK English USA French France German Italian Portuguese Brazil Spanish Mexico Spanish Spain and Swedish Note To set a Handset Forwarding Condition 1 Press the Feature Key 2 Press the Home soft key or wait 2 seconds to connect to the microbrowser home page 3 Select Forwarding 10 222 DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Figure 10 12 Handset Forwarding C f Hot Desking Recording Start Supervise Call History Conferences Next Select Exit This menu handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Move to previous menu item does not show if first menu item is selected Move to next menu item does not show if last menu item is selected Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Select highlighted menu item Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Exit the micro browser to the appropriate call Redial key status screen 4 way scroll FORWARD
75. functionality specific to the 3C system platform see Appendix A 3C System Features For information on the functionality specific to the SIP Net platform see Appendix B SIP Net System Features NEC IP PHONE LINEUP This section describes the currently supported lineup of NEC IP phones Note For supported languages and other system requirements please refer to the System Requirements document Table 2 1 DT710 Phone models Phone Model Phone Features DT710 ITL 2E IP Economy e 2 programmable keys ITL 6DE IP Economy e 6 programmable keys e Cursor pad e LCD display DT700 Phone User Guide 2 3 INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES P o DT700 and DT730G Series Phones Table 2 2 DT730 Phone models Phone Model Phone Features ITL 8LD IP Value ITL 12D IP Value ITL 24D IP Value ITL 32D IP Value e 32 programmable keys Full dot grayscale LCD XML open interface Cursor pad Backlit LCD Backlit keypad Full duplex hands free Number of programmable keys is upgradeable DESI Less programmable keys on full dot grayscale LCD 12 programmable keys Full dot grayscale LCD Cursor pad Backlit LCD Backlit keypad Full duplex hands free Number of programmable keys is upgradeable 24 programmable keys Full dot grayscale LCD Cursor pad Backlit LCD Backlit keypad Full duplex hands free Number of programmable keys is upgradeable 32 programmable keys Full dot grayscale LCD
76. home page Select Handset Forwarding Select Clear forwarding Figure 9 17 Clear forwarding Handset Forwarding Forward immediately Forward when pusy Forward after 30 seconds Clear forwarding This page handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Move to previous menu item does not show if first menu item is selected Move to next menu item does not show if last menu item is selected Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Select highighted menu item Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the previous screen Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key No operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key Remain on existing screen move cursor up Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Remain on existing screen move cursor down Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen The phone clears all of the handset forwarding settings that are applied to the phone Note This only clears the handset forwarding settings applied to the phone Administrator configured or system level forwarding settings are not deleted To clear Handset forwarding using star codes 9 186 1 2 Lift the handset from the phone Dial 73 All handset forwarding settings that are applied to the phone are cleared DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 9 18 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS U
77. information this icon disappears Indicates that the current call is on hold Call Count The first number shows which call has the ajz EII focus and the second number shows the total number of calls Provides notification of incoming voice mail Once the user has checked the voice mail this icon disappears N 28 DT700 Phone User Guide INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700O AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones Page Count The first number shows the page you are l currently on and the second number shows the total number of pages in the current menu Cursor Display of the cursor pad keys up down left and right that can be used to navigate the menus from the current cursor position Transfer Conference Transfer the primary call to a secondary call Call OR Initiate a 3 party conference call Transfer Conference Ringing Indicates that the number you have dialed for the Transfer or Conference is ringing This icon only displays for calls that are monitored by the system such as internal calls Transfer To Hold primary and consult Conference With Hold primary and consult Transfer Conference Shuttle Primary Call Indicates that you are transferring the call into a held state Indicates that you are connecting to a conference that is in a held state Focus is on the primary call Transfer Conference Focus is on the secondary call Shuttle Secondary Call Call Conferencing This ic
78. is available The appropriate key is displayed on the screen according to the call handling process DT700 Phone User Guide 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DT700 Phone User Guide Help key Programmable Keys Feature key Recall key Answer key Mic key Menu key Hold key Transfer key Speaker key Cursor pad USB Charging Port INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones Press the Help key and then press a softkey to display information about that softkey The first programmable key is reserved as the Line Key Line Keys allow the user to select which line to operate on Any programmable keys not used as Line Keys can be programmed as Speed Dial Keys by the user or system administrator Numbers up to 24 digits can be assigned to Speed Dial Keys The numbers may be a telephone number or star hash codes This key displays a set of menu options that provide additional capabilities such as speed dial key programming and microbrowser applications 3C systems Press this key to get a dial tone If you are currently on a call the current call will be placed on hold and a new call will be started SIP Net Platforms See the Hold key Press this key to answer an incoming call If you have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the headset If you do not have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the speaker on the phone
79. is recorded from both participants in the call and from your phone line e Monitor record Audio is recorded from both partici pants in the call but not from your phone line Exit Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Barge Opens the Barge page and starts a Barge session on the call where you can speak to all parties on the call Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Returns to the Select Call screen Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key No operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key No operation Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key No operation Volume DOWN Key Off Hook handset If speaker is ON turn speaker OFF move audio to handset and keep focus on current screen If headset is active move audio to handset and keep focus on current screen Speaker key Off Hook handset behavior If speaker is OFF turn Speaker ON and keep focus on current screen If speaker is ON activate handset and keep focus on current screen Headset active behavior Turn Speaker ON and keep focus on current screen 10 234 DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser The Select Call page automatically updates every 30 seconds VIEW SYSTEM CALL HISTORY selecting the View System Call History item allows the user to view the call logs maintained by the 3C system Note that the 3C system s call logs may not be identical
80. key Select highlighted menu item Directory key 4 way scroll UP key Move to previous menu item Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Move to next menu item Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Select highlighted menu item 4 Select the handset forwarding option that you want to set ee a ee Forward immediately The incoming call will be forwarded to destination s immediately Forward when busy The incoming call will be forwarded to destination s if there is an existing call in progress DT700 Phone User Guide 10 223 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 siccoronse o a Forward after 30 seconds The incoming call will be forwarded to destination s if it is not answered in 30 seconds Clear forwarding Clear all handset forwarding conditions To set immediate forwarding Immediate forwarding will forward all incoming calls to the destination number s immediately Figure 10 13 Immediate forwarding Handset Forwarding Forward when busy Forward after 30 seconds Clear forwarding T Exit Select To set busy forwarding Busy forwarding will forward calls to the destination number when your phone is busy there is a call in progress Figure 10 14 Busy forwarding Handset Forwarding Forward immediately Forward after 30 seconds Clear forwarding Select To set forwarding after 30 seconds Forwarding after 30 seconds will forward the call only after it has rung on your phoneset for 30
81. key to return to the main phone screen DT700 Phone User Guide 8 153 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS oag Speed Dial and Programmable Keys 8 154 Figure 8 70 Figure 8 71 Figure 8 72 Confirm Addition to Personal Directory Confirmation Entry Updated successtully Entries are uniquely defined by the combination of number and name For the purpose of uniquely defining an entry the name is case insensitive Multiple entries with the same number and different names are allowed and multiple entries with the same name and different numbers are allowed Multiple entries with the same name and same number are not allowed An error is displayed if you create an entry with the same name and same number as an existing entry Directory Duplicate Not Allowed Menu Display Duplicate Entry Mot Allowed To change the name or number select LH Name or L Number to edit the field before trying to save the entry again If the Speed Dial number for a new Personal Directory entry is already used for another entry you will see an error when you try to save the Personal Directory entry Select 3 Speed Dial to edit the Speed Dial number before trying to save the entry again Speed Dial In Use Menu Display Speed Dial Key Already in Use STAR HASH CODES USAGE WITH SPEED DIAL KEYS You can program Speed Dial Keys with star nash codes in addition to internal and external telephone numbers For example you can set up a Speed Dial Key that us
82. m s informaci n DT700 Phone User Guide E 351 NOTICES omg WEEE Proauct Disposal Information E 352 INFORMATION SUR L ENLEVEMENT DU PRODUIT FR POUR LES PAYS DE LA COMMUNAUTE EUROPEENNE Le symbole ci contre est plac sur votre produit pour vous informer de X ne jamais jeter parmi les d chets municipaux les produits lectriques et lectroniques EE Les produits lectriques et lectroniques incluant les c bles fiches et autres accessoires devraient tre jet s s par ment afin de permettre son propre traitement recuperation et recyclage Ces produits seront emporte vers un tablissement designe qui dispose des meilleures techniques pour le traitement recuperation et le recyclage Le tri des dech ts a des avantages significatifs les mat riaux co teux peuvent tre recycles on vite ainsi la dispersion de substances indesirables dans les systemes de dechets municipaux Tout cela contribue au respect de la sant et de l environnement Soyez informe qu une amende peut tre impos e pour depot illegal des produits lectriques et lectroniques par le section g n rale des d chets municipaux Pour vous faciliter le tri des d chets dans le cadre du respect de l environnement des dispositions ont t prises pour la collecte locale et le recyclage Dans le cas ou vos produits lectriques et lectroniques doivent tre enlev s vous tes pri s de consulter votre fournisseur ou le contrat relatif l acquisiti
83. monitoring are e None Do not monitor presence state changes for this Speed Dial Key e Visual Presence state is shown visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key when a Speed Dial is assigned to the entry and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory and on the DESI Less display of the ITL 8LD phone e Visual and Soft Ring Presence state is shown visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key when a Speed Dial is assigned to the entry and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory and on the DESI Less display of the ITLO8LD phone When a call is ringing on the monitored terminal play a soft ring tone DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES The Personal Directory Note Option 3 Visual and Soft Ring is only valid for SIP Net platforms Contact your system administrator to determine if Soft Ring is available on your system If you have Visual Monitor Settings for an entry in the Directory that also has an assigned Speed Dial the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown in the Directory Table 11 6 Monitor Presence Icons eee ae Speed Dial Key Not Available No Monitoring Ringing SIP Net SIP Net Ringing 3C system Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use If you have Visual monitor settings for a Speed Dial entry the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown by the LED Color
84. o e reciclagem Estes produtos devem ser enviados para instala es especiais para serem tratados da melhor maneira possivel e recuperados e reciclados com as t cnicas dispon veis A elimina o por triagem tem vantagens significativas evita a dispers o de substancias n o desejadas no fluxo de lixo municipal contribuindo assim para a protec o da sa de humana e do ambiente Por favor tenha em considera o que a elimina o ilegal de produtos el ctricos e electr nicos no fluxo de lixo municipal est sujeita a multa De modo a facilitar a elimina o selectiva e a reciclagem ambiental foram criadas estruturas para a recolha local e reciclagem No caso de produtos el ctricos e electr nicos que necessitem de ser eliminados por favor consulte o seu fornecedor ou as condi es contratuais estabelecidas a quando da aquisi o desses produtos Em www nec unified com weee pode encontrar informa o sobre elimina o selectiva e reciclagem ambiental PARA PA SES FORA DA UNI O EUROPEIA A elimina o de produtos el ctricos e electr nicos em pa ses fora da uni o europeia deve ser feita de acordo com as normas locais Caso n o exista um acordo com o seu fornecedor por favor contacte as autoridades locais para mais informa o AVFALLSINFORMATION SV UNION F R L NDER INOM DEN EUROPEISKA UNIONEN Er produkt har blivit m rkt med symbolen avbildad till v nster f r att X informera er om att elektriska och elektroniska p
85. of your phone If you are troubleshooting problems with your phone you may need to know the IP Address of your phone 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select 6 Status 3 Select Network Information DT700 Phone User Guide 4 83 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION og Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Figure 4 56 Select Network Information Status Terminal Information 4 Use the cursor pad or the T Up and Down softkeys to scroll to the IP Address screen Figure 4 57 IP Address Network Information 5 Press the Exit softkey to return to the Status menu Note You cannot change these settings on your phone To change any of these settings contact your system administrator To view the maximum numbers of calls you can handle on your phone The maximum number of calls you can handle concurrently is determined by your system administrator but you can view the maximum number of calls that are allowed concurrent on your phone from the Status menu 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select 6 Status 3 Select SIP Information Figure 4 58 Select SIP Information Status Ww Terminal Information 4 Use the cursor pad or the T Up and Down softkeys to scroll to the Max Calls screen 4 84 DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION Speed Dial and Personal Directory Character Sets Figure 4 59 MaxCalls SIF Information 5 Press the Exit softkey to return to the Status menu Note You cannot change
86. pertaining to this screen Digit key No Operation 4 way scroll BACK key Redial key Discard changes and return to Clear Settings 4 way scroll FORWARD key No Operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key No Operation Volume UP key 4 way scroll DOWN key Volume No Operation DOWN key ENTER key Clear all Call History information on the phone Note There are no menu items associated with Confirm Menu settings DT700 Phone User Guide 4 81 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION og Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad To restart your phone Note Any devices connected to the phone s PC port will momentarily disconnect from the network when the phone is rebooted 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select 5 Reboot Phone Figure 4 52 Main menu screen Menu cle 4 Reboot Phone 3 Press the OK softkey or Enter key on the cursor pad to restart the phone Figure 4 53 Confirm Reboot Reboot Phone Cancel You will not have a dial tone on the phone or be able to make calls until the phone restarts and re registers on the network Note If you cannot restart the phone using the Menus unplug the phone from power and the network for ten seconds then reconnect the telephone to your network and power to perform a restart VIEWING PHONE SETTINGS If you are having problems with your phone you may want to view the hardware version firmware version or network information for your phone This menu item may not be availa
87. phone screen Figure 11 44 Exit softkey Directory Entries Celular 8185475059876 Hore 1847555 1232 Lab 346 Lab 2 371 i Help To view a specific Personal Directory entry 1 While in the Personal Directory scroll to the entry you want to view and do one of the following e Press Enter on the cursor pad Or e Press the More softkey twice and then the Detail softkey to view the details for that entry Figure 11 46 Detail softkey L Directory Entries Celular 818475559876 Home 61647555 1234 Lab 346 Lab 2371 T 4 Search gt Add Delete 2S ee ae p This displays the name and number for the entry along with the Speed Dial and Monitor settings 11 272 DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES The Personal Directory Figure 11 47 Personal Directory Entry display Press the Exit softkey to exit details screen and return to the Personal Directory Figure 11 48 Exit softkey Marne ab Nurniber S26 Speed Cal iF Visual Figure 11 49 Exit Key Help Presence Monitor Settings and the Personal Directory If you have Visual Monitor Settings for an entry in the Directory that also has an assigned Speed Dial the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown in the Directory Table 11 3 Monitor Presence Icons ee Unregistered EA met E Speed Dial Key Not Available TE No Monitoring DT700
88. return to the previous screen Monitor If you have set a Speed Dial for the entry you can set Monitor settings for the entry Note Monitoring can only be done on other lines that are internal to your system You cannot monitor external or outside lines Valid options for monitoring are e None Do not monitor presence state changes for this Speed Dial Key Visual Presence state is shown visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key when a Speed Dial is assigned to the entry and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory and on the DESI Less display of the ITL 8LD phone e Visual and Soft Ring Presence state is shown visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key when a Speed Dial is assigned to the entry and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory and on the DESI Less display of the ITLO8LD phone When a call is ringing on the monitored terminal play a soft ring tone Note Option 3 Visual and Soft Ring is only valid for SIP Net platforms Contact your system administrator to determine if Soft Ring is available on your system If you have Visual Monitor Settings for an entry in the Directory that also has an assigned Speed Dial the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown in the Directory Monitor Presence Icons e p e Unregistered EA met UR Speed Dial Key Not Available FE No Monitoring DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES C
89. search characters Lowercase characters se EEREEPAEEEENNEELINN ee ee ae EN ee ee eee EE EP O a O 6 C ee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee a 10 240 DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Lowercase characters DEPP pee te te Pe eee Maximum number of search results 64 The Search Directory search string field accepts a maximum of 24 characters The Search Directory page handles the following events Hard Key Features Explanation Digit key Enter digits numeric digits only key Toggles between lower case character and numeric entry modes 4 way scroll BACK key Remain on existing screen move cursor to left Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Remain on existing screen move cursor to right Directory key DT700 Phone User Guide 10 241 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 siccoronse Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll UP key No operation Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key No operation Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Sends contents of search string field to the Web Server The web server returns the sorted results last name first name Figure 10 30 Search results page Directory Results 3004 No 5 DT730 old 3002 No 3 DT730CG 3003 No 4 DT730CG 3000 No 1 DT730DG 3001 No 2 DT730DG eer If no entries in the 3C System Directory match the search string an error appears
90. seconds 10 224 DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Figure 10 15 Forwarding after 30 seconds Handset Forwarding Forward immediately Forward when busy Clear forwarding Select Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the microbrowser Home page Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Select the highlighted item and proceed to the settings Directory key screen to enter phone number s if applicable 4 way scroll UP key Remain on existing screen move cursor up Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Remain on existing screen move cursor down Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Select the highlighted item and proceed to the settings screen to enter phone number s if applicable 5 Use the phoneset keypad and the microbrowser pages to set the desired forwarding number s and press the OK soft key Figure 10 16 Enter number Handset Forwarding Delete Back DT700 Phone User Guide 10 225 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 siccorouse 10 226 The Handset Forwarding settings pages handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Deletes previously entered character Exit Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen OK Sends contents of number field to the Web Server to set handset forwarding Hard Key Features Explanation Digit key Enter numeric digits 4 wa
91. startup display messages on the DESI Less phone are shown on the 1st LCD The 2nd LCD does not show any message while the phone is rebooting PROGRAMMABLE KEY INFORMATION DISPLAY The DESI Less label less lower LCD on the ITL 8LD phone allows you to access the 32 available Programmable keys on 4 pages using the Scroll key to navigate between pages Scroll key Line 1 Denise Andrew Ethan Ben Fran Charles Gail The Page Icon indicates the currently displayed page You can change pages using the Scroll key The display offers the following Programmable Keys on the four pages available on the display Page 1 Line Key and 7 Programmable Keys Page 2 8 Programmable Keys Page 8 Programmable Keys Page 8 Programmable Keys Total Programmable Keys 31 Programmable Keys The name or number assigned to each configured key is shown If Presence Monitoring is configured for the key an icon shows the current presence status of that line The current page number is also show DT700 Phone User Guide DT730 ITL 8LD WITH DISPLAY DT730 ITL 8LD DESI Less Display Figure 5 3 ITL 8LD Line 4 Ki Il Denise i Andrew f 2 i Ethan a FA Ben II j Fran 13 Il Charies II 4 Il Gai Scroll ay MP T AS a Monitor Icons Table 5 1 Monitor Presence Icons for ITL 8LD phones Programmable LED Key LED DESI Less Icon Line Key Registered LED is not lit Type Unregistered LED is not lit Speed Dial Key N
92. sundhedsfare V r venligst opm rksom pa at man kan blive p lagt en b de ved ulovlig bortskaffelse af elektrisk og elektronisk udstyr sammen med usorteret husholdningsaffald For at sikre separat bortskaffelse og milj m ssig fornuftig genbrug er der lavet arrangementer til lokal indsamling og genanvendelse det tilf lde dine elektriske og elektroniske produkter skal bortskaffes s referer venligst til din leverand r eller den kontraktlige overenskomst din virksomhed har tegnet i forbindelse med erhvervelse af disse produkter P www nec unified com weee findes information om separat bortskaffelse og milj m ssig fornuftig genbrug DT700 Phone User Guide NOTICES WEEE Product Disposal Information FOR LANDE UDENFOR DEN EUROP ISKE UNION Bortskaffelse af elektriske og elektroniske produkter i lande udenfor den Europ iske Union skal ske i overensstemmelse med lokale regulativer Hvis der ikke er lavet nogen aftale med din leverand r s kontakt venligst den lokale myndighed for mere information INFORMACI N SOBRE ELIMINACI N DE PRODUCTOS ES PARA PA SES PERTENECIENTES A LA UNI N EUROPEA La imagen representada aqu ha sido adherida al producto para X informarle que los dispositivos el ctricos y electr nicos no deben ser nunca eliminados como basura convencional Los productos el ctricos y electr nicos incluyendo cables enchufes y accesorios deben ser eliminados separadamente de forma que puedan
93. that your phone is recognized as registered on the network Your phone must be registered on the network to make calls Figure 12 11 Registered Phone Figure 12 12 Unregistered Phone A a If you phone is not registered on the network try plugging your phone into another open port on the local area network The phone does not have a dial tone 1 If you need an outside access code to get to an outside line you may not hear the outside dial tone until you press the outside access code 2 Verify that the phone is receiving power DT700 Phone User Guide 12 299 PHONE TROUBLESHOOTING es 5 Press the Menu key then go to 6 Status Network Information and verify that the phone has an IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and DNS Server listed If any of this information is missing there may be a problem with your connection to the network Contact your system administrator Restart the phone a Press the Menu key b Select Reboot c Press the OK softkey or Enter key on the cursor pad to restart the phone Note If you cannot restart the phone using the Menus unplug the phone from power and the network for ten seconds then reconnect the telephone to your network and power to perform a restart If you are still having problems with your phone contact your system administrator The phone cannot make any calls 1 4 If you are using a headset try using the phone handset to make a telephone call If the p
94. the 3C System Directory match the search string the following page appears DT700 Phone User Guide 9 197 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 05 erocrammave Koy Figure 9 30 No search results Mo matching entries This screen handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation OK Exit the microbrowser and return to the appropriate call status screen Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the Search page Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key No operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key No operation Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key No operation Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS The Enhanced Programmable Keys feature for Standard SIP DT700 extends the Programmable Keys functionality by providing context sensitive access to advanced microbrowser features by a single key press The Enhanced Programmable Key functionality is backwards compatible with the existing Programmable Key functionality of DT 700 The following features have been implemented as Enhanced Programmable Keys e Speed Dial Key User defined Speed Dial Keys e Context Sensitive Enhanced BLF Key Call Call Back Transfer Pickup Monitor e Send To Voice Mail Key e Park Extension Key e DND Key e Call Forward Key 9 198 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Enhanc
95. the Edit softkey Press the Save softkey to save your changes Figure 11 65 Save softkey 10 11 282 Edit Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to return to the Personal Directory or press the Exit key to return to the main phone screen DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES The Personal Directory Figure 11 66 Confirm Addition to Personal Directory Confirmation Entry Updated successtully Entries are uniquely defined by the combination of number and name For the purpose of uniquely defining an entry the name is case insensitive Multiple entries with the same number and different names are allowed and multiple entries with the same name and different numbers are allowed Multiple entries with the same name and same number are not allowed An error is displayed if you create an entry with the same name and same number as an existing entry Figure 11 67 Directory Duplicate Not Allowed Menu Display Duplicate Entry Mot Allowed If the Speed Dial number for a new Personal Directory entry is already used for another entry you will see an error when you try to save the Personal Directory entry Press the OK softkey then select L31 Speed Dial and press the More softkey and then the Edit softkey to edit the Speed Dial number before trying to save the entry again Figure 11 68 Speed Dial In Use Menu Display Note For more information on Speed Dial
96. the Line Key Line Keys allow the user to select which line to operate on Any programmable keys not used as Line Keys can be programmed as Speed Dial Keys by the user or system administrator Numbers up to 24 digits can be assigned to Speed Dial Keys The numbers may be a telephone number or star nash codes This key displays a set of menu options that provide additional capabilities such as speed dial key programming and microbrowser applications 3C systems Press this key to get a dial tone If you are currently on a call the current call will be placed on hold and a new call will be started SIP Net Platforms See the Hold key Press this key to answer an incoming call If you have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the headset If you do not have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the speaker on the phone You can also press this key to answer a waiting call Press key to mute the microphone The LED on this key flashes when the microphone is muted Press the key again to un mute the microphone Press this key to access the features and settings provided on the local telephone menu such as Call History Personal Directory or User Settings Press this key to place a call on hold Press this key to transfer a call 2 23 INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES F o DT700 and DT730G Series Phones 14 Speaker key Controls the built in speaker which can be used for
97. the back of the headset base station D 336 DT700 Phone User Guide JABRA BLUETOOTH HEADSET SUPPORT FOR DT700 PHONES Jabra Headset Figure D 14 HEADSET port to Jabra headset base 8 Restart the phone a Press the Menu key b Select Reboot c Press the OK softkey or Enter key on the cursor pad to restart the phone Note If you cannot restart the phone using the Menus unplug the phone from power and the network for ten seconds then reconnect the telephone to your network and power to perform a restart 9 Connect the power adapter to the handset base station in accordance with the manufacturer instructions then run the desk phone setup wizard Settings Advanced Setup Desk Phone on the headset base station a When prompted to connect to a desk phone select Yes We recommend using the Guided setup a If prompted about equipment for Remote Call Control select Yes b If prompted select Electronic hookswitch adapter c When prompted for the cable type for your adapter select UART d Continue with the setup wizard including the call to configure dial tone setup Follow the manufacturer s directions for any additional connections you want to make with the headset base DT700 Phone User Guide D 337 JABRA BLUETOOTH HEADSET SUPPORT FOR DT700 PHONES E lt USING THE JABRA HEADSET To adjust the headset ringing volume e Press the l Up Y Down key on the Cursor pad while on hook You must pre
98. through the received call information Figure 11 20 Received Call Information Received Calls Thu Apr 22 O70 pm Wroblewski Victoria 646 Thu Apr 22 12 56pm Wroblewski 18475559876 Options The phone stores call information for the most recent 50 calls displaying the newest entries first For multiple phone calls from the same telephone number the most recent time and date information for that number is shown If you have a Personal Directory entry that matches a number in your Call History the name from the Personal Directory is shown 5 Press the Exit softkey to return to the Call History menu OUTGOING PLACED CALLS To view Outgoing Calls 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select Call History Figure 11 21 Call History 3 Select lt Outgoing 11 260 DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Call History Figure 11 22 Outgoing Calls Call History Missed Calls Received Calls Placed Calls Use the Up and Down softkeys to scroll through the missed call information The phone stores call information for the most recent 50 calls displaying the newest entries first For multiple phone calls from the same telephone number the most recent time and date information for that number is shown If you have a Personal Directory entry that matches a number in your Call History the name from the Personal Directory is shown DIALING NUMBERS FROM THE CALL HISTORY To
99. to a member of your workgroup You can use a programmed key to directly place calls to other workgroup members While your phone and the other workgroup member s phone is idle do one of the following e To make a hands free or headset call Press the key for the workgroup member you want to call then use your headset or the phone s speaker to continue the call on your phone e To use your phone handset for the call Pick up your phone handset then press the key for the workgroup member to continue the call on your phone To pick up a ringing call to a member of your workgroup If you are set up for a workgroup you will see a flashing green LED when there is a ringing call on any other workgroup member s phone While your phone is idle and the other workgroup member s phone is ringing do one of the following e To place a hands free or headset call Press the key for the workgroup member then use your headset or the phone s speaker to continue the call on your phone e To use your phone handset for the call Pick up your phone handset then press the key for the workgroup member to pick up the call To transfer a call to a member of your workgroup DT700 Phone User Guide While you are connected to a call press the key for the workgroup member to transfer your call to that workgroup member Your current call is placed on hold and the phone attempts the transfer If you have multiple calls on hold the phone will tr
100. to answer a call that is being offered to ringing on a Subscribed Address Note that the 3C system always picks up the oldest call on the Subscribed Address 10 244 DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Enhanced Programmable Keys e Supervise Barge Monitor Supervise provides Barge and Monitor functionality A user with Supervisor privileges can listen to the call session between extensions and if required the user can barge into the session For more information on configuring a system and users for Barge Monitor or using Barge Monitor see the UNIVERGE 3C Supplemental Features Guide This functionality requires the administrator to configure the phone user with the Supervisor permission in the 3C system Transfer Transfer allows the phone user to perform a transfer of the connected call or held call that is in focus to the Subscribed Address A Transfer operation on a non connected call or held call that is not in focus has no operation Call Back Call Back functionality allows the phone user to set call back ona Subscribed Address When that address becomes idle the phone notifies the user by providing visual and audible indications through the key LED and by playing a soft ring On receiving the notification the user can place a call to the Subscribed Address either by pressing the Call soft key or by dialing the address using the keypad SINGLE PRESS BEHAVIOR To place a call
101. to automatically put your current call on hold and pick up the ringing call e If you are on a call and want to pick up the ringing call for the workgroup member place your current call on hold and then press the key for the workgroup member to pick up the ringing call To transfer a call to a member of your workgroup 1 While on a call press the key for the workgroup member you want to transfer the call to 2 Press the Blind soft key to Blind transfer your call Your current call is placed on hold and the phone attempts the transfer If you have multiple calls on hold the phone will transfer the call that is currently in focus Note To place an attended consult transfer call press the Transfer key on your phoneset Once an attended consult transfer is started use the Transfer key on the phoneset to complete the transfer Figure 10 33 Transfer Key C Non idle call states e Ifthe other workgroup member s line is currently connected to another call you will also have the option to monitor the current call for that user if you have Supervise privileges e Ifthe other workgroup member has a call on hold you will also see an option to pickup the call that user has on hold DT700 Phone User Guide 10 247 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 25 Frocrammavie Koy PARK EXTENSION KEY To park a call to a Park Extension e While on a call press the Park Extension key Your current call is parked at the
102. to release the protective cover that is over the ports Remove the cover DT700 Phone User Guide 3 55 Figure 3 27 5 To install 8LK L Line Prepare the phone 3 56 Connect the 8LK L Cable Connection Side 1 Cable pn Connector Port Cover Connect the cable from the 8LK L to the side option connector on the terminal and close the cover Reattach the side panel to the phone Key Card Optional From the bottom use an object to gently pry off the button panel for the 8LK L module Align the holes in the Line Key Card with the buttons on the phone Align the holes in the Button Panel with the telephone keypad buttons on the phone and then push the four corners of the panel until the panel clicks into place DCL 60 CONSOLE TYPE A INSTALLATION WARNING TO PREVENT POSSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE DCL 60 CONDOLE OR THE PHONE TERMINAL DURING INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL DISCONNECT THE LINE CORD LAN CABLE AND THE AC DC ADAPTER FROM THE PHONE TERMINAL TO POWER OFF THE TERMINAL DURING THE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Note Do not disconnect the module from a phone while the phone is powered on If you need to disconnect the module power off the phone before disconnecting the DCL 60 module Use the menus on the front panel of the phone to configure the Side 2 Connector port for the DCL 60 Press the Menu key Select 4 Admin Settings Use the keypad and cursor key to enter the User Name and Password to access the Admin menu
103. 0 Phone User Guide Figure 8 29 Figure 8 30 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Using a headset Press the desired Speed Dial Key Or Press the Feature Key then press the Speed Dial Key to view the Speed Dial details then press the Dial softkey Note Speed Dials are dialed as they are programmed into the phone If you get a fast busy signal when you attempt to dial using a Speed Dial Key you may need to program an outside line access code into the Speed Dial number To edit the number before dialing Press the Feature Key and then press the desired Speed Dial Key Press the Dial softkey Dial softkey Speed Dial Key Entry Home Humber 1841475501234 Speed Dial ft Monitor Mone Delete Use the Cursor Pad and phone keypad to edit the number as needed then press the OK softkey Edit the Number 818475551234 Delete Cancel Note Any changes made to the number are only used for dialing one time They are not saved in the selected Speed Dial Key configuration Note To change the options about being prompted to confirm the number before your phone dials external numbers see To edit the Dial Preference on page 4 77 SPEED DIAL KEY PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES Speed Dial Keys can be programmed in two ways e Using the Feature Key e Added from the Personal Directory When you program a Speed Dial Key using the Feature Key you can select to also add the entry
104. 00 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES The Corporate Directory Figure 11 90 Directory Entries Menu Display 2 Enter your search criteria and press the OK softkey To edit your search criteria use the a Left gt Right keys on the cursor pad and the Delete softkey To cancel the search press the Back softkey to return to the Directory menu or the Exit softkey to exit to the main call screen 3 Usethe T Up and Down softkeys or the 4 Up LY Down keys on the cursor pad to scroll through the Corporate Directory search entries 4 Press the Exit softkey or press the Exit key to return to the main phone screen Figure 11 91 Exit Key Help To dial a number from the Corporate Directory e Pres the Dial softkey If you are dialing an external number and the outside access code is not programmed into the Corporate Directory entry you may need to add the outside access code to the number before it is dialed depending on the configuration of your system Figure 11 92 Dial the number from the Personal Directory Delete The phone dials the telephone number DT700 Phone User Guide 11 293 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Note To change the dialing preferences for dialing numbers from the Personal Directory see To edit the Dial Preference on page 4 77 Presence Monitor Settings and the Corporate Directory If you have Visual Monitor Settin
105. 00 Phone User Guide D 331 JABRA BLUETOOTH HEADSET SUPPORT FOR DT700 PHONES E lt Figure D 3 Select Headset E Edit Betore Dialing Clear Settings 4 Select Enable Disable Figure D 4 Headset Options 5 Select Enable Figure D 5 Enable Headset Cancel 6 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to accept the setting To set external headset ringing Optional You can set your phone to ring only through your external headset The phone will not ring from the telephone speaker when you have it set to ring to the headset Note Hold reminder tone soft ring ringer volume and preview of the User Adjustable Ringtones on selection may not be supported by the headset They are only played on the DT 700 speaker when Headset Ringing is set to Phone or Phone and Headset 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select User Settings 3 Select Headset D 332 DT700 Phone User Guide JABRA BLUETOOTH HEADSET SUPPORT FOR DT700 PHONES Jabra Headset Figure D 6 Select Headset options E Edit Betore Dialing Clear Settings 4 Select Ringing Figure D 7 Headset ringing options Enable Disable Ringing Tone Yolurnes Select 5 Do one of the following e To enable ringing on the headset only select Headset e To enable ringing on the headset and the phoneset select L3 Phone and Headset Figure D 8 Enable Headset ringing Headset Ringing fe Fh one 4 ng Headset 6 Press Enter on the cursor pad
106. 1 programmable key The key on the left is the Line Key The key on the right is a programmable key can be used as a Speed Dial Key This Speed Dial Key can only be programmed by your system administrator DT710 ITL 2E Programmable Key Line Key Speed Dial Key DT710 ITL 6DE AND DT730 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS The DT710 ITL 6DE DT 730 and DT730G phones have multiple Programmable Keys but in all cases the key on the upper left represents the Line Key and all other keys can be programmed as Speed Dial Keys DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Figure 8 10 DT710 and DT730 Programmable Keys pS ar 1St Programmable Key Pd NEC Speed Dial Key 2 2d Programmable Key Speed Dial Key 3 15t Line Key etc 3 Programmable Key Speed Dial Key 24 etc 1 Programmable Key Speed Dial Key 32 DT730G PROGRAMMABLE KEYS The DT730G phones have multiple Programmable Keys and the key on the upper left represents the Line Key All other keys can be programmed as Speed Dial Keys Figure 8 11 DT730G Programmable Keys 1St Programmable Key Speed Dial Key 2 2d Programmable Key Speed Dial Key 3 15t Line Key i etc iv ir A ape A ged SS SS FS Nie Nien PORS A tun A vee Maru J LOOO A a V a iat fon ji Roca O her fencer NT
107. 173 Feature Key with the MICrODroWSe L ccccccceececeeeceeceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeaeeaes 9 173 To view the Microbrowser Home page ccsccceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeesees 9 174 HOL Ue Se UN ecesna senescence AE EEE E a E 9 176 To Login using Hot D SKING ccc cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeseees 9 176 To Logout of Hot Desking SESSION cccceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesees 9 179 iv Contents DT700 Phone User Guide CONTENTS Handset Forwarding cccccccscccsecceseceeeceueccueccueeceesueesaeesseesseecenesaueeeas 9 180 To set a Handset Forwarding Condition c cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 181 To set Handset forwarding using Star COCES cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 185 To set Conditional Handset forwarding No Answer using star codes 9 185 To set Conditional Handset forwarding Busy using star codes 9 185 To clear Handset Forwarding Conditions ccccccsccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 185 To clear Handset forwarding using Star COdES cccseccseeeaeeeseeeeeees 9 186 AN EOC ON MI aides ae ected get ets senesced aescew oct ee an oatic ET 9 187 S pervise a Callesin nein ana aA EEOSE ARKAE OEREN NEA 9 187 View System Call History cccccccscccseeecseeceeeceeeceeceeeseeeeceeeseuessgeseueeees 9 191 To view call logs via the Microbrowser cccecececeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseees 9 191 To view the Conf
108. 268 all Incoming calls 11 268 all Missed calls 11 268 all Received calls 11 268 specific entry 11 267 Personal Directory entry 11 289 Speed Dial Key 8 166 Speed Dial and Personal Directory Entry 8 169 Speed Dial information from a Per sonal Directory entry 8 166 Speed Dial Only entry 8 170 Delete softkey 2 34 2 35 DESI Less Display ITL 8LD 2 21 5 90 Dial Preference 4 77 Troubleshooting 12 301 Dial softkey 2 34 7 104 7 105 Dialing 2 28 dialing a number from the Call History 11 261 a number from the Personal Directory 11 276 from the Call History 11 261 placing calls 7 104 preferences 4 77 redialing 7 107 using a Speed Dial 8 134 Directory Card 3 50 Directory Key 2 26 11 271 11 292 ITL 2E 2 25 display name troubleshooting 12 307 Do Not Disturb DND icon 2 29 SIP Net B 319 DT700 Lineup 2 3 DT710 2 3 ITL 2E layout and parts 2 24 ITL 6DE display 4 61 7 102 8 122 11 254 layout and parts 2 22 DT730 2 4 2 5 ITL 12D layout and parts 2 8 2 12 2 18 ITL 24D layout and parts 2 10 2 16 ITL 32D layout and parts 2 14 ITL 8LD layout and parts 2 20 E edit Personal Directory entry 11 283 Speed Dial Key 8 159 EndCall softkey 2 34 7 106 ending calls 7 106 Enter Key 2 26 Exit Key 2 35 Exit key ITL 6DE 2 23 ITL 12CG 2 8 ITL 12D 2 19 ITL 12DG 2 12 ITL 24CG 2 6 ITL 24D 2 17 ITL 24DG 2 10 ITL 32D 2 15 ITL 8LD 2 21 Exit softkey 2 35 external call 7 104 F Feature key 8 132 9 173 10 213 ITL 2E 2 25 IT
109. 29 Handset Ringing Volume 2 31 Headset 2 29 Headset Call Volume 2 31 Hold 2 28 Keypad first letter uppercase entry mode 2 30 4 87 12 303 Keypad lowercase entry mode 2 30 4 87 12 304 Keypad numeric entry mode 2 30 4 87 12 304 Keypad uppercase entry mode 2 30 4 87 12 303 Missed Calls 2 28 Network Cable Unplugged 2 28 Page Count 2 29 Registered 2 28 Ringing Incoming 2 28 Ringing Outgoing 2 28 Soft Ring Volume 2 31 Speaker Volume 2 31 Transfer 2 29 Transfer ringing 2 29 Transfer shuttle Primary 2 29 Transfer shuttle Secondary 2 29 Unregistered 2 28 Voice mail 2 28 IEEE802 3af E 345 Incoming Received Calls 11 259 Installation 3 43 to 3 59 internal call 7 105 IP address viewing 4 83 ITL 2E features 2 3 keys and parts 2 24 layout 2 24 Programmable Keys 8 124 DT700 Phone User Guide ITL 6DE Conf softkey 7 112 7 114 features 2 3 keys and parts 2 22 layout 2 22 phone display 4 61 7 102 8 122 11 254 Speed Dial Key Numbering 8 129 ITL 12CG keys and parts 2 8 to 2 9 ITL 12D features 2 4 2 5 keys and parts 2 18 to 2 20 layout 2 8 2 12 2 18 Speed Dial Key Numbering 8 129 ITL 12DG keys and parts 2 12 to 2 13 ITL 24CG keys and parts to 2 7 ITL 24D features 2 4 2 5 keys and parts 2 16 to 2 18 layout 2 10 2 16 Speed Dial Key Numbering 8 129 ITL 24DG keys and parts 2 10 to 2 11 ITL 32D features 2 4 keys and parts 2 14 to 2 16 layout 2 14 ITL 8LD DESI Less Display 5 90
110. 2D 2 19 ITL 12DG 2 12 ITL 24CG 2 6 ITL 24D 2 17 ITL 24DG 2 10 ITL 32D 2 15 ITL 8LD 2 21 Call Pickup A 310 ITL 2E A 310 Pickup Group A 312 Pickup Zone A 311 specific extension A 310 Call Recording icon 2 30 Call Waiting 7 109 to 7 111 calls answering 7 103 conferencing 7 111 to 7 115 duration 7 106 ITL 6DE 7 106 holding 7 107 placing 7 104 rejecting 7 103 transferring 7 115 to 7 118 Cancel softkey 2 35 CE Declaration of Conformity E 346 to E 348 CF Busy icon 2 29 Index CF Immediate icon 2 29 CF No Answer icon 2 30 characters alphabetic 4 85 symbols 4 85 Color LCD ITL 24CG 2 6 Concurrent Calls 7 109 shuttle 7 111 Conf key ITL 2E 2 25 7 112 7 114 Conf softkey 2 34 ITL 6DE 7 114 Conference icon 2 29 conference call 7 112 ending 7 115 Hang Up 7 115 hold 7 113 shuttle 7 114 split 7 113 Conference softkey 2 34 7 112 7 114 Conference ringing icon 2 29 Conference shuttle Primary Icon 2 29 Conference shuttle Secondary icon 2 29 Conferencing Calls 7 111 to 7 115 contrast LCD 4 74 Corporate Directory 11 292 to 11 294 viewing 11 292 Cursor icon 2 29 Cursor Pad details 2 26 to 2 27 Directory key 11 271 11 292 ITL 6DE 2 24 ITL 12CG 2 9 ITL 12D 2 20 ITL 12DG 2 13 ITL 24CG 2 7 ITL 24D 2 18 ITL 24DG 2 11 ITL 32D 2 16 ITL 8LD 2 22 Redial Key 7 107 setup with 4 64 D Data Clear 12 298 Data Clear settings 4 78 4 80 Declaration of Conformity CE E 346 to E 348 delete Call History All 11
111. 3 55 To install 8LK L Line Key Card Optional ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 3 56 DCL 60 Console Type A Installation ccccccccecceeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeseeeeesaees 3 56 Prepare the phone aos cnsciece anreenccecsen senenies aedvuncaindnosecnneusaeancrmacdenndaandtqoeeaneees 3 56 Prepare the DCL 60 COnsole ccccccccscecseeceeeceeeeceeeseeeseeseeeeaeeseeeenes 3 58 Connect the DCL 60 Console to the phone ccccceccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeaees 3 58 To install DCL 60 Line Key Card Optional ccccceeccsseeeseeeeeeeeeneees 3 59 4 Basic Settings Configuration ccscccsecseeseeseeeseeeeneneeesens 4 61 Basic Setup with the Cursor Pad or Up Down KeYS ccccseceeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 4 62 To adjust the ringing VOIUME c cece ceeceeeeceeecceeeceeeceueeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeees 4 62 To adjust the Soft Ring volume SIP Net Platforms eee 4 62 To adjust the headset ringing volume cccceccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeseeeees 4 63 To adjust the call volume handset ccccccseeecsseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeees 4 63 To adjust the call volume headset ccccccccseseccaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaeeees 4 63 To adjust the call volume speaker cee cceecccseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseees 4 64 Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad ccccccseccseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeesaees 4 64 To select an Internal Ringtone
112. 3798 1510 Website www nec co jp EUROPE MIDDLE EAST AND AFRICA NEC Enterprise Solutions The corporate headquarters of NEC Enterprise Solutions is located at NEC Enterprise Solutions Anton Philipsweg 1 1223 KZ Hilversum Netherlands Telephone 31 35 689 9111 Fax 31 35 689 1450 Website www nec enterprise com P N 610 210r9 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 Phone User Guide NORTH AMERICA NEC Corporation of America 6535 N State Highway 161 Irving TX 75039 2402 Telephone 1 800 240 0632 800 2400 NEC Fax 1 888 318 7932 Authorized Associates and Resellers Phone 1 800 752 6275 Fax 214 262 5566 Website www necam com WORLDWIDE OFFICES For the latest information on offices in your area visit www nec com and select your area P N 610 210r9 vii viii P N 610 210r9 DT700 Phone User Guide CONTENTS DT700 Phone User Guide NOtiC S o c ceccecceccescccesceeececsecsersersarserseesersssersseceeesarseesaeseevarsreseversnnsessereerseeseeseas iv Document Revision History cccceeeeeseeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeseaeeceeeesseeesseeesseeeseneesaeees V Document Feedback ccccccccccescecsececsececseeecsececseeeneeeecseeeseesenesensesenensensetens vi Document Information ceccceececeseeceeeeceececeseceueeseuseseueescueeeeseeeseeeenseeenaess vi I A IENE se sence 1 1 Supported Phone Models ccccseeccsseeceeeeceseeceeecceeeeeeeeseeesseeeseeeeseeeeaes 1 1 Introduction to the DT
113. 4 32 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Select Headset options E Edit Betore Dialing Clear Settings Se Select Select Tone Volumes Tone Volumes options Enable Disable Ringing Select Hold Reminder Volume Hold Reminder volume To change the volume level press the Delete softkey and use the telephone keypad to enter new volume level Adjust Hold Reminder Volume Hold Reminder Yalurmej Ott to 19 O D Cancel Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to accept the setting You can also press the Cancel softkey to exit without making any changes Note The setting defaults to 19 maximum tone volume To change the Display Language 1 DT700 Phone User Guide Press the Menu key 4 71 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION og Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad 2 3 Figure 4 33 Select User Settings Select 2 Language Select Language options E Edit Betore Dialing Clear Settings Select the desired language and press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to accept the setting The new menu screens will now display in the language you have selected You do not need to restart the phone to change the language You can also press the Cancel softkey to exit without making any changes Note The default language on the phone is English To set the Date Format Figure 4 34 4 72 Determines whether tim
114. 5 ITL 6DE 2 23 ITL 12CG 2 9 ITL 12D 2 19 ITL 12DG 2 13 ITL 24CG 2 7 ITL 24D 2 17 ITL 24DG 2 11 ITL 32D 2 15 ITL 8LD 2 21 Missed Calls add to Personal Directory 11 262 delete 11 268 dialing 11 261 icon 2 28 message clearing 11 258 viewing 11 258 Monitor Icons ITL 8LD 5 91 Monitor Settings 8 138 8 143 8 157 8 162 Personal Directory 8 138 8 143 8 147 8 152 8 162 11 264 11 273 11 280 11 287 11 294 Speed Dial Keys 8 130 8 148 8 152 8 163 11 265 11 281 11 287 More gt gt gt softkey 2 35 12 304 N Network Cable Unplugged icon 2 28 network connection troubleshooting 12 297 Network Information 4 83 NewCall softkey 2 34 7 104 7 105 Numeric Character Set 4 86 O OK softkey 2 35 OpenSSL E 341 Options softkey 2 35 11 261 11 262 Outgoing Placed Calls 11 260 outside line accessing 7 104 P Page Count icon 2 29 Page Icon 5 90 Page Number ITL 8LD 5 93 Personal Directory 11 270 to 11 294 add 11 278 add from Call History 11 262 add Speed Dial 8 150 delete entry 11 289 duplicate entries 11 278 edit 11 283 entry add Speed Dial 8 150 delete 11 289 remove Personal Directory infor mation but keep Speed Dial information 11 290 search 11 275 viewing 11 272 incoming calls 11 257 11 274 manipulating Personal Directory 11 277 remove Personal Directory information but keep Speed Dial information entry 11 290 search entry 11 275 viewing 11 270 phone settings changing 4 61 viewing 4 82 P
115. 6 ie o OO Table 2 16 Volume Display Icons Handset Ringing Shows the ringing volume of the handset for Volume incoming calls Soft Ring Volume Shows the soft ring volume of the handset for incoming calls Handset Call Volume Shows the volume level of the handset when you are on a Call Speaker Call Volume Shows the volume level of the speaker while you are on a Call O Headset Call Volume m Shows the volume level of the headset when d A you are on a call MENU KEY From the Menu key you can use various application features such as Personal Directory Call History and User Settings DT700 Phone User Guide 2 31 INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES Po ae DT700 and DT730G Series Phones Figure 2 16 Menu Key Menu To display the Menu List using the Menu Key 2 32 Figure 2 17 Press the Menu key while the current time displays on the LCD screen The Menu List is displayed on the LCD Use the keys on the Cursor Pad to select the desired Menu Item Main Menu Display OOO wes OO ee oe Personal Directory Opens the Personal Directory Call History Invokes Call History You can view infor mation about Missed Calls Placed Calls and Received Calls User Settings Invokes User Settings including headset options date time options LCD contrast settings and language options Admin Settings Invokes Administrator Settings User Name and Password required Reboot Phone Allow
116. 700 and DT730G Phones 2 3 DT700 and DT730G Series Phones cece ceeececeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaeeeesaeeeesaeeeesaes 2 3 Platon Compatibil y srcccoscexcodetincusdssusscennis saia EEE NE 2 3 NEC IP PHONG LGU D sivcsccctese sees ewcteecedcaninistecesiesnncdceiatabicedseunsssbetesennsedexbusiesss 2 3 INGVS and ANS susdatuasuscestsannetossncdeunsiswssdauystvansinalnavantassnnadaupisanediensnrunneraaiewandive 2 5 To display the Menu List using the Menu Key ccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 32 Optional EQUIDMOIM oiccciiactecaendocieaescancesiccedSandondsdeddecssncedbexwesoadedesdeanseddanctideaceescebes 2 36 Gigabit Ethernet Adapter cccccceececesseeceeseeceeueecseeeeseuseeceueeesaaeeessaeees 2 38 Side 2 Connector Mode Support cccecccceecccececeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeas 2 39 DCL 60 Console Type A iicdicxnnzcuiiieniarssus Soancencatacnencsuutensiessautaudeaedeulesteieatites 2 39 Jabra Headset SUPPOrt 0 ceccccecccceceececeeeeceese sees ceseeesseeesseesseeessneeseas 2 41 Be aN r e E E E 3 43 Before You Begin swecnsinnsinsusuicce snodnaduinsstsimdiiaddersadestmsdiiaaatwrdeavcduinnnddikedeantdacedoasine 3 43 Adjusting Angle of Tilt Leg n00nnaannnnanenannnonnnosnenonrrnsrersnrrrsnrrserersnrrserenne 3 43 Torase MUO O eniinn oe EEE ROAR NEENA man ERARE ERRER 3 43 TOONE UNE ROO aee a E E AEE E EE 3 44 To remove tilt leg cece cecceeecceeseceeseeeeseceeeceeseceeseeseeeess
117. ABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Selecting Supervise invokes the following XML page allowing the user to select an address group they have the right to supervise Address groups that the user does not have the right to supervise are not shown Note Supervise shows only connected calls Held calls are not shown Calls made to a secondary address are shown as if they were made to the primary address Conference calls cannot be supervised When you select Supervise one of the following occurs e lf you do not have Supervise privileges the following error is shown Figure 10 19 No Supervise Privileges Select Address Group User does not have supervise rights on an address group e If you have Supervise privileges the Supervise page from the web server is shown listing the address groups available to the user Figure 10 20 Supervise a call select Address Group Exit Select The Select Address Group page handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation When you do not have Supervise privileges Returns to the microbrowser home page DT700 Phone User Guide 10 231 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 siccorouse Soft Key Features Explanation Return to the Call Control screen When you have Supervise privileges Return to the Call Control screen Select the highlighted menu item Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the Home page Re
118. ABLE KEYS oag Using Enhanced Programmable Keys Your current call is placed on hold and the phone attempts the transfer If you have multiple calls on hold the phone will transfer the call that is currently in focus Note To place an attended consult transfer call press the Transfer key on your phoneset Once an attended consult transfer is started use the Transfer key on the phoneset to complete the transfer Figure 9 35 Transfer Key Non idle call states e Ifthe other workgroup member s line is currently connected to another call you will also have the option to monitor the current call for that user if you have Supervise privileges Figure 9 36 Monitor soft key Extension 352 is currently on a call Select an option trom below e Ifthe other workgroup member has a call on hold you will also see an option to pickup the call that user has on hold Figure 9 37 Pickup soft key Extension 353 is holding a call Select an option trom below Ee Oo CBCa Ent see PARK EXTENSION KEY To park a call to a Park Extension e While on a call press the Park Extension key Your current call is parked at the Park Extension All users who have a Park Extension key for that number will be able to see there is a call parked on that extension 9 204 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using Enhanced Programmable Keys To pickup a call on a Park Extension e While your p
119. Answer key Answer key ener A Headset icon displays on the LCD along with the call information DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC PHONE OPERATION Call Waiting Concurrent Calls Figure 7 23 Headset icon and Headset softkey w3 f frh Apr 22 1155 AM TE Wroblewski victoria t646 Conference End all If you want to transfer the call to your telephone handset lift the telephone handset to continue the call If you want to transfer back to the headset press the Headset softkey then place the telephone handset back on hook Note While you are on a call if you press the Headset softkey while the telephone handset is on hook your call will be dropped Make sure you pick up the telephone handset to continue your call before you press the Headset softkey To transfer the current call to your headset Figure 7 24 1 While on a call using the telephone handset press the Headset softkey to transfer the call to your headset then place the telephone handset back on hook Headset icon and Headset softkey le fe frhu Apr 22 1155 AM 111 Wroblewski victoria 646 Conference EndCall A Headset icon displays on the LCD If you want to transfer the call to your telephone handset pick up the telephone handset again Note While you are on a call if you press the Headset softkey while the telephone handset is on hook your call will be dropped Make sure you pick up the telephone handset to continue your call bef
120. BLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Tee Programmable yP Key LED BLF LED is not lit la Ringing SIP Net Blinking Red Ringing 3C system Blinking Green Subscription Failed Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use Held 3C system Note DT700 phones do not publish presence information Depending on other phones on your system and any phone application software that you use you may see different LED behavior for different presence states You can also press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen 8 Press the Save softkey to save your changes Figure 8 62 Save softkey Murniber 815475551234 Speed Dial 4 Monitor Mone 9 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to return to the Personal Directory or press the Exit key to return to the main phone screen DT700 Phone User Guide 8 149 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS oag Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Figure 8 63 Figure 8 64 Figure 8 65 Confirm Addition to Personal Directory Confirmation Entry Updated successtully Entries are uniquely defined by the combination of number and name For the purpose of uniquely defining an entry the name is case insensitive Multiple entries with the same number and different names are allowed and multiple entries with the same name and different numbers are allowed Multiple entries with the same name and same number are not allowed An error is displ
121. C System Web Server the Web Server attempts to validate your login and displays a success or failure page Figure 9 7 Hot Desking login success Jot Desking Login Figure 9 8 Hot Desking login failure Hot Desking Login Incorrect password The Hot Desking Status screen handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Return to the microbrowser Home page Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the microbrowser Home page Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key No operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key Remain on existing screen move cursor up Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Remain on existing screen move cursor down Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen 9 178 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser To Logout of Hot Desking session 1 Press the Feature Key 2 Press the Home soft key or wait 2 seconds to connect to the microbrowser home page 3 Select Hot Desking Logout Figure 9 9 Hot Desking Logout NIVERGE 3C 2 4 A Hot Desking Logout Q Start Recording Call Q Supervise a Call View System Call History 4 The phone will log out of your Hot Desking session Figure 9 10 Hot Desking logged out ot Desking Logout 4 ou have been logged out successfully This page handles t
122. Call View System Call History a List Conferences Search Directory Use the keypad to enter your Extension and Password then click the OK soft key Log in The Hot Desking Extension field has focus when entering the Hot Desking Login page and the keypad is in numeric entry mode When the Hot Desking Password field has focus the characters entered are hidden by characters The Hot Desking Extension and Password fields accept a maximum of 24 characters The Hot Desking Login page handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Deletes previously entered character Return to the microbrowser Home page Exit Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen OK Sends contents of extension and password fields to the Web Server Hard Key Features Explanation Digit key Enter numeric digits 4 way scroll BACK key Remain on existing screen move cursor to left Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Remain on existing screen move cursor to right Directory key 4 way scroll UP key Move between Extension and Password fields Volume UP Key 9 177 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 sicrcoronse Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll DOWN key Move between Extension and Password fields Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Sends contents of extension and password fields to the Web Server When the DT700 sends the contents of the extension and password fields to the 3
123. D PARTS ITL 8LD DT730 Series 2 ail 4 N FPI RESSE 16 11 DT700 Phone User Guide INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700O AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones Table 2 11 ITL 8LD DT730 Series Keys and Parts 1 Call Indicator Lamp The Call Indicator Lamp at top corner of the display flashes when a Call is offered to the phone Also if you have Voice Mail service the Lamp lights steadily when a message has been left 2 LCD The LCD Liquid Crystal Display provides call status activity information plus date time and softkey operation 3 Exit key This key allows you to exit from the Menu or Help mode and go back to the telephone main screen 4 Softkeys The softkeys show the available features for your current activity Any feature shown at the bottom of the LCD is available The appropriate key is displayed on the screen according to the call handling process 5 Help key Press the Help key and then press a softkey to display information about that softkey 6 DESI Less Programmable The first programmable key is reserved as the Line Key Line Key LCD Keys allow the user to select which line to operate on Any programmable keys not used as Line Keys can be programmed as Speed Dial Keys by the user or system administrator or Microbrowser keys Numbers up to 24 digits can be assigned to Speed Dial Keys The numbers may be a telephone number or star hash codes 7 Feature key This key displays a set of m
124. Deletes previously entered character Return to the microbrowser Home page Exit Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen OK Sends contents of extension and password fields to the Web Server Hard Key Features Explanation Digit key Enter numeric digits 4 way scroll BACK key Remain on existing screen move cursor to left Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Remain on existing screen move cursor to right Directory key 4 way scroll UP key Move between Extension and Password fields Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Move between Extension and Password fields Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Sends contents of extension and password fields to the Web Server When the DT700 sends the contents of the extension and password fields to the 3C System Web Server the Web Server attempts to validate your login and displays a success or failure page 10 218 DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Figure 10 8 Hot Desking login success Hot Desking Login Login successful Figure 10 9 Hot Desking login failure Hot Desking Login Incorrect password The Hot Desking Status screen handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Return to the microbrowser Home page Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the microbrowser Home pag
125. Dial Key see Editing Speed Dial Keys on page 8 159 Use the telephone keypad to enter a name for the Speed Dial and press Enter onthe cursor pad or the OK softkey Speed Dial Name Screen Enter Mame Forward Cellular O O O O 8 155 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Speed Dial and Programmable Keys 8 156 4 Figure 8 78 Up to 24 characters may be entered for the name e Press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen e To switch between first letter uppercase all uppercase all lowercase and numbers for keypad entry press the key on the keypad e To add a space to an entry press e To enter special characters press the key For a list of special characters see Speed Dial and Personal Directory Character Sets in the DT700 Phone User Guide e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys Use the telephone keypad to enter the star code or hash code including any outside access code and additional digits for the entry and press Enter amp on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Example Enter 72818475559876 to set up a Speed Dial that forwards to the external telephone number 1 847 555 9876 Forwarding star code 72 Outside Access Code if required 8 External telephone number 1 847 555 9876 72818475559876 Enter Forwarding St
126. Dial Key that you want to edit The programmable key LED flashes and the Speed Dial information for the key is shown Scroll Key Programmable Key LED DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 8 35 Figure 8 36 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Note If the Speed Dial has already been programmed the name and number information displays You will need to press the Exit softkey and select another programmable key Use the telephone keypad to enter the name and press Enter onthe cursor pad or the OK softkey Speed Dial Name Screen Enter Mame Abe 4 Up to 24 characters may be entered for the name e Press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen e To switch between first letter uppercase all uppercase all lowercase and numbers for keypad entry press the key on the keypad e To add a space to an entry press e To enter special characters press the key For a list of special characters see Speed Dial and Personal Directory Character Sets in the DT700 Phone User Guide e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys Use the telephone keypad to enter a phone number for the entry and press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Enter Telephone Number Enter Murnber Delete Up to 24 characters may be entered for the num
127. EYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys EDITING SPEED DIAL KEYS You can edit Speed Dial Key settings using the Feature Key if they are set up as just Speed Dial entries or Speed Dial entries with associated Personal Directory entries To edit a Speed Dial Key 1 Enter the programmable mode for your phone The Feature key LED lights a steady red Figure 8 86 Feature Key cD Note For information on how to enter the programmable mode for your phone see Using the Feature Key on page 8 132 2 Do one of the following ITL 24CD ITL 12CG ITL 24DG ITL 12DG ITL 32D ITL 24D ITL 12D and ITL 6DE Phones e Press the programmable key that you want to set as a Speed Dial Key The programmable key LED flashes Figure 8 87 Programmable Key LED fa Ga ITL 8LD Phones e Press the Scroll Key to scroll to the desired page then press the Speed Dial Key that you want to edit The programmable key LED flashes and the Speed Dial information for the key is shown Figure 8 88 Scroll Key Figure 8 89 Programmable Key LED 3 Press the Edit softkey Figure 8 90 Edit softkey Speed Dial Key Entry Lak Nurniber S26 Speed Dial F Monitor Yisyal Delete 4 Do one of the following DT700 Phone User Guide 8 159 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Speed Dial and Programmable Keys 8 160 Figure 8 91 Figure 8 92 Use the Telephone Keypad a Use the telephone keypad to select the number of the field you want to edit Us
128. For PoE Terminals e Disconnect and then and reconnect the LAN cable from the back of the phone Note When the LAN cable is reconnected verify that the cable is connected to the LAN port and not the PC port C 326 DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G USB PORT For AC Adapter Terminals 1 Disconnect the LAN cable from the back of the phone 2 Disconnect the AC adapter cable from the back of the phone 3 Reconnect the LAN cable to the back of the phone Note When the LAN cable is reconnected verify that the cable is connected to the LAN port and not the PC port 4 Reconnect the AC adapter cable to the back of the phone DT700 Phone User Guide C 327 C 328 DT700 Phone User Guide JABRA BLUETOOTH HEADSET SUPPORT FOR DT 700 PHONES DT700 Phone User Guide SUPPORTED EQUIPMENT Supported NEC IP Phones e DT730 ITL 8LD e DT730 ITL 12D e DT730 ITL 24D e DT730 ITL 32D e DT730G ITL 12CG e DT730G ITL 12DG e DT730G ITL 24CG e DT730G ITL 24DG Note The DT710 ITL 2E and ITL 6DE models of phones do not have a headset jack therefore they do not support headset connections Supported Headsets EHS Adapter Using the Jabra LINK 14201 31 EHS Adapter you can connect one of the following Jabra headset to a supported phone e Jabra PRO 9XXX series e Jabra GO 6XXX JABRA HEADSET SUPPORTED FEATURES The following features are supported using the headset e Headset audio stream control e Headset ringing e Answer i
129. GO 6470 e Consult the documentation for your headset for further troubleshooting connected the headset base but nothing happens on the headset when try to use my desk phone e Make sure your DT700 desk phone is the current target See the documentation for your headset for more information e Make sure the audio link to the desk phone is active e g by tapping the headset multifunction button or touching the activate audio link icon on the touch screen e Make sure that the phone has an active connection to the phone network i e its handset is off the hook or its headset button is pressed e Re run the desk phone set up wizard Settings Advanced Setup Desk Phone Make sure you select IQ for the adapter type After enabling phones for the Jabra Headset Kit some phones can no longer use their expandable Key Kits on their phones The DCL 60 Line Key Module mode is enabled by default for the Side 2 connector If you enabled the Side 2 connector for the Jabra Headset kit in the default master configuration file dt 000000000000 cfg or dt OO0000000000g cfg it applies to all phones on the network and overrides any local settings Any DCL 60 Line Key Modules will be disabled You will need to do one of the following e Manually enable the Side 2 connector for the DCL 60 Line Key Module at each physical phoneset device with a DCL 60 Line Key Module e Change the configuration file back to the default for the Side 2
130. Guide INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES Optional Equipment All DT730G phones support Gigabit Ethernet on both the LAN and PC ports Gigabit Ethernet is enabled by setting the Speed and Duplex setting for each port to AutoNegotiate EAP LOGOFF AND THE GBA L GIGABIT ETHERNET ADAPTER The DT700 s internal LAN and PC Ethernet ports support data rates of 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps The GBA L gigabit Ethernet adapter is an external peripheral that allows the PC to connect to the network at a data rate of 1 Gbps The GBA L is a standalone Ethernet switch equipped with 1gigabit Ethernet ports for the network and PC anda 100 Mbps Ethernet port for the DT 700 The GBA L does not signal the DT700 when a PC is connected to or disconnected from the GBA L PC port Therefore EAP Logoff is not supported when the DT 7 00 is equipped with a GBA L Gigabit Ethernet adapter SIDE 2 CONNECTOR MODE SUPPORT Not all DI 700 phones have access to Side 2 Connector mode options Also different models of phones may have different levels of support for the available options Side 2 Connector Support by phone model Support Support mao m lt f gt meo e mae rsm me rosea mae resme DCL 60 CONSOLE TYPE A Feature Support by Model The DT730 phones support the DCL 60 Console Type A connected to the UART Side 2 Connector port to add an additional 60 line keys on the phone Each of these keys can be programmed as a Speed
131. Hands Free dialing and conversations The LED on this key lights when the speaker is active 15 Cursor pad Use this key to navigate to various features The up and down keys on the cursor pad can be used to adjust the volume of the phone ITL 2E DT710 SERIES PHONE LAYOUT AND PARTS Figure 2 10 ITL 2E DT710 Series Phone Layout OON OO ff W 2 24 DT700 Phone User Guide Table 2 13 DT700 Phone User Guide INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones ITL 2E DT710 Series Keys and Parts 1 10 11 12 13 14 Call Indicator Lamp Programmable Key Recall key Feature key Redial Key Conf Key Answer key Mic key Message Key Directory Key Hold key Transfer key Speaker key Up Down Key The Call Indicator Lamp at top corner of the display flashes when a call is offered to the phone Also if you have Voice Mail service the Lamp lights steadily when a message has been left The first programmable key is reserved as the Line Key Line Keys allow the user to select which line to operate on Any programmable keys not used as Line Keys can be programmed as Speed Dial Keys by the user or system administrator Numbers up to 24 digits can be assigned to Speed Dial Keys The numbers may be a telephone number or star nash codes 3C systems Press this key to get a dial tone If you are currently on a call the current call will be place
132. ITH THE DCL 60 The following tables describe the maximum number of line keys supported on each DT700 model when DCL 60 configuration modes is enabled It also specifies the DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 8 12 Figure 8 13 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys index associated with the first and last DCL 60 Console key All the keys from key 1 to key 60 are numbered sequentially Model Name Keys DCL 60 LEDS Note The LEDs on the DCL 60 Console are updated sequentially starting from the first key on the module so if all keys on the phone need to be updated for an event there may be a delay between the time the first key is updated and the time when the last key is updated DCL 60 Console First Key Number DCL 60 Console Last Key 60 Number DCL 60 Mode Product Name DT730 Each key on the DCL 60 Console has two LEDs situated at each corner of the key The LED on the left is red and the LED on the right is green Left LED Right LED If the line key is configured to monitor an entry the LED shows the current presence state of the entry using red green color and steady blinking flashing light DCL 60 WITH A ITL 8LD PHONE The DCL 60 console can be connected to an ITL 8LD phone but the lower LCD on the phone only shows information for the first 32 programmable keys that are on the phone The display does not show any information about programmable keys on the
133. L EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com LIBSRTP SRTP library and the test drivers distributed with it are licensed under the following BSD based license Copyright 2001 2005 Cisco Systems Inc All rights reserved libSRTP Redistribution Conditions E 342 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution e Neither the name of the Cisco Systems Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission
134. L 6DE 2 23 ITL 12CG 2 9 ITL 12D 2 19 ITL 12DG 2 13 ITL 24CG 2 7 ITL 24D 2 17 ITL 24DG 2 11 ITL 32D 2 15 ITL 8LD 2 21 find Personal Directory entry 11 275 firmware version viewing 4 83 G GBA L 2 38 Index H handset attach 3 46 ringing volume icon 2 31 soft ring volume icon 2 31 volume call 4 63 hands free see Speaker Key Hang Up conference call 7 115 headset answer calls 7 108 call waiting volume 4 69 connecting 3 48 4 67 enable 4 67 hold reminder volume 4 70 icon 2 29 Jabra 2 41 make calls 7 108 ringing 4 68 D 332 ringing volume icon 2 31 softkey 7 108 transfer calls 7 109 using 7 108 volume call 4 63 D 338 ringing 4 62 4 63 D 338 Help key 2 35 ITL 6DE 2 23 ITL 12CG 2 9 ITL 12D 2 19 ITL 12DG 2 13 ITL 24CG 2 6 ITL 24D 2 17 ITL 24DG 2 11 ITL 32D 2 15 ITL 8LD 2 21 using 2 35 8 122 11 254 12 295 Hold icon 2 28 hold call 7 107 conference call 7 113 Hold key ITL 2E 2 25 ITL 6DE 2 23 ITL 12CG 2 9 ITL 12D 2 19 ITL 12DG 2 13 ITL 24CG 2 7 ITL 24D 2 17 ITL 24DG 2 11 ITL 32D 2 15 ITL 8LD 2 21 icon icons 2 28 Active Call 2 28 DT700 Phone User Guide Icon Display 2 27 to 2 31 icons Call Conferencing 2 29 Call Conferencing Hold 2 29 Call Count 2 28 Call Recording 2 30 Call Volume 2 31 CF Busy 2 29 CF Immediate 2 29 CF No Answer 2 30 Conference 2 29 Conference ringing 2 29 Conference shuttle Primary 2 29 Conference shuttle Secondary 2 29 Cursor 2 29 Do Not Disturb DND 2
135. LE KEYS I 1 sicrcoronse If you press the Monitor soft key on a call that you are already monitoring a Monitor screen appears Figure 9 21 Monitor detail AgentDriver Donald Extension353 Connected Toalrabtree Torm Soft Key Features Explanation Record Toggles call recording If not currently recording starts recording If currently recording stops recording e Barge record Audio is recorded from both participants in the call and from your phone line e Monitor record Audio is recorded from both partici pants in the call but not from your phone line Exit Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Barge Opens the Barge page and starts a Barge session on the call where you can speak to all parties on the call Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Returns to the Select Call screen Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key No operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key No operation Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key No operation Volume DOWN Key 9 190 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Hard Key Features Explanation Off Hook handset If speaker is ON turn speaker OFF move audio to handset and keep focus on current screen If headset is active move audio to handset and keep focus on current screen Speaker key Off Hook handset behavior If speaker is OFF turn Speaker ON and keep focus on
136. LESHOOTING cannot hear phone audio through my headset e Make sure the headset base is powered on e Verify that your phone is connected to the network and working correctly e Check the physical connections between the headset base station and your phone Connects Jabra Headset ere Using Base Side 2 connector EHS Adapter AUX Port port Headset port Telephone Headset port Cable graphic e Ensure that all cables are firmly seated e Verify the headset is enabled on the phone a Press the Menu key on the phone b Select User Settings c Select Headset d Select Enable Disable e Select Enable f Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to accept the setting e Contact your system administrator to verify that the Side 2 Connector is enabled on your phone The headset is not working correctly e Make sure the headset base is receiving power e Verify the headset is charged DT700 Phone User Guide D 339 JABRA BLUETOOTH HEADSET SUPPORT FOR DT700 PHONES ee 1222 e Verify that the headset base is configured to use an IQ adapter for the connection to your desk phone e Contact your network administrator to verify that the Jabra Headset Kit mode is enabled on the Side 2 port on your phone e Restart your phone You must restart the phone to fully enable the Jabra Headset Kit for the Side 2 Connector e Make sure you are using a supported headset model Jabra PRO 9400 series or Jabra
137. LOD Settings LCD Contrast 5 The default backlight timeout in seconds for your system is shown To change the timeout press the Delete softkey and use the telephone keypad to enter new backlight timeout DT700 Phone User Guide 12 305 PHONE TROUBLESHOOTING 5s 22 0 017 Figure 12 20 Set Backlight Timeout 6 LCD Backlight Timeout Delete Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to accept the setting You can also press the Cancel softkey to exit without making any changes Note Setting the Backlight Timeout to O zero disables the timeout and the LCD Backlight will remain lit at all times need to reset the language on my phone 1 2 3 The language on your phone may reset to either the default for your system or the default for the phone English when you restart the phone depending on the configuration of your system Press the Menu key Select User Settings Select 2 Language Figure 12 21 Select Language options 4 E Edit Betore Dialing Clear Settings Select the desired language and press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to accept the setting The new menu screens will now display in the language you have selected You do not need to restart the phone to change the language You can also press the Cancel softkey to exit without making any changes Note The default language on the phone is English The Call History information on my phone is gone 12 306
138. Missing Press Exit to Reset The Parameter s Missing screen is displayed when the username password or both are set to empty values in 802 1x credentials 6 97 Fo o DT700 SECURITY FEATURES ERRORS AND DEBUGGING TLS ERRORS The DT700 phone closes the TLS connection and logs an appropriate error on sending or receiving any of the following fatal alert messages defined in RFC 2246 e Close notify e Unexpected message e Bad record mac e Decryption failed e Record overflow e Decompression failure e Handshake failure e Bad certificate e Unsupported certificate e Certificate revoked e Certificate expired e Certificate unknown e Illegal parameter e Unknown CA e Access denied e Decode error e Decrypt error e Export restriction e Protocol version e Insufficient security e Internal error e User cancelled If any of the above errors are encountered an error message displays on the phone The most common error messages are Table 6 4 TLS Errors TLS Bad Certificate e Bad certificate TLS Certificate Expired e Certificate expired 6 98 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 SECURITY FEATURES TLS Unknown CA e Unknown CA TLS Unknown Certificate e Certificate unknown TLS Unsupported Cert e Unsupported certificate 802 1X STATUS amp DEBUGGING MESSAGES The current 802 1X status of the DT700 phone is displayed on the Network Information status screen Menu Status Network Information If 802 1x st
139. N CO 11 2 18 DT700 Phone User Guide Table 2 10 DT700 Phone User Guide INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones ITL 12D DT730 Series Keys and Parts 1 10 11 12 13 Call Indicator Lamp LCD Exit key Softkeys Help key Programmable Keys Feature key Recall key Answer key Mic key Menu key Hold key Transfer key The Call Indicator Lamp at top corner of the display flashes when a Call is offered to the phone Also if you have Voice Mail service the Lamp lights steadily when a message has been left The LCD Liquid Crystal Display provides call status activity information plus date time and softkey operation This key allows you to exit from the Menu or Help mode and go back to the telephone main screen The softkeys show the available features for your current activity Any feature shown at the bottom of the LCD is available The appropriate key is displayed on the screen according to the call handling process Press the Help key and then press a softkey to display information about that softkey The first programmable key is reserved as the Line Key Line Keys allow the user to select which line to operate on Any programmable keys not used as Line Keys can be programmed as Speed Dial Keys by the user or system administrator Numbers up to 24 digits can be assigned to Speed Dial Keys The numbers may be a telephone number or star nash co
140. N Key ENTER key Select the highlighted menu item DT700 Phone User Guide 10 215 10 216 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Hot Desking On OR Hot Desking Off Recording Start OR Recording Stop Supervise A A Call History Conferences a Hot Desking On If you are not logged in this opens the Hot Desking Login screen Hot Desking Off If you are logged in this opens the Hot Desking Logout screen Opens the Handset Call Forwarding screen Recording Start Opens the Start Recording screen This option only displays if you have a call that is available for recording Recording Stop Opens the Stop Recording screen This option only displays when you have a call that is currently recording Opens the Supervise screen Opens the View Call Log screen Opens the List Conferences screen Opens the Search Directory screen The Hot Desking menu items do not appear if your phone is not enabled for Hot Desking From the microbrowser pages the following softkeys are shown depending on the page Soft Key Features Explanation Dil Phonebook Dial the highlighted entry Show details about the highlighted menu item DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Soft Key Features Explanation Select the highlighted menu item Delete the previous character Exit Exit the Microbrowser and re
141. NDSET CALL FORWARDING SETTINGS ON THE 3C SYSTEM Note Handset Forwarding settings for the 3C system are not mutually exclusive and can be added cumulatively You can select a forwarding setting and enter any phone number internal or external for the condition and then activate the new setting Handset forwarding can be set either using the phone s microbrowser application or using 3C System Star Codes Handset Forwarding conditions are persistent until cleared by the user using the phoneset star codes or changed by supported 3C system client applications or a system administrator using the 3C administrator Forwarding conditions that are set using the handset are denoted in the phone and 3C Administrator application by a destination description of entered at handset The handset forwarding conditions are shown in every forwarding profile for the user Changing or deleting a handset forwarding condition in one forwarding profile will also update the view in all other profiles If the primary address of the phone has any other forwarding conditions the handset forwarding conditions are pre pended to all profiles All forwarding conditions are evaluated by the MGC when processing a call regardless of where they are invoked SERVICE CONDITIONS e Multiple Handset Forwarding Conditions must be enabled for the user in the System Initialization settings for users to set multiple Handset Forwarding conditions e Microbrowser screens
142. Note Monitoring can only be done on other lines that are internal to your system You cannot monitor external or outside lines 11 279 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Figure 11 64 Monitor Settings Select Monitor C 2 visual 3 Visual and Soft Ring Valid options for monitoring are e None Do not monitor presence state changes for this Speed Dial Key Visual Presence state is shown visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key when a Speed Dial is assigned to the entry and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory and on the DESI Less display of the ITL 8LD phone e Visual and Soft Ring Presence state is shown visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key when a Speed Dial is assigned to the entry and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory and on the DESI Less display of the ITLO8LD phone When a call is ringing on the monitored terminal play a soft ring tone Note Option l2 Visual and Soft Ring is only valid for SIP Net platforms Contact your system administrator to determine if Soft Ring is available on your system If you have Visual Monitor Settings for an entry in the Directory that also has an assigned Speed Dial the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown in the Directory Table 11 4 Monitor Presence Icons eee Unregistered Eri n E Speed Dial Key Not Available TE No Monitoring 11 280 DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY
143. P Net Ringing 3C system Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use You can also press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen 7 Select Show in Directory and press the OK softkey Figure 8 52 Show in Directory Directory Entry 1 Do Not Show in Directory Show in Directory You can also press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen 8 Press the Save softkey to save your changes Figure 8 53 Save softkey Mame Lab Number 346 speed Dial 5 Monitor visual Directory Entry Yes Edt Ext If the Speed Dial number is already used for another entry you will see an error when you try to save the entry 8 144 DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 8 54 Figure 8 55 10 Figure 8 56 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Speed Dial In Use Menu Display Speed Dial Key Already in Use To change the Speed Dial Key number for the entry select L3 Speed Dial and enter a new Speed Dial Key number A confirmation displays telling you the speed dial has been updated Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Speed Dial Edit Confirmation Entry Updated successtully To return to the main phone screen press the Exit softkey or the Feature Key Exit softkey Press soft key or wait to load page Program Exit f Home To add a Programmable Key as a Speed Dial Key with a Personal Directory Entry from the Pe
144. Pad To select an External Ringtone 4 66 1 2 3 Figure 4 15 4 Figure 4 16 Press the Menu key Select User Settings Select Ringtone Ringtone menu Ringtone Internal Ringtone External Ringtone Select External Ringtone External Ringtone External Ringtone 14 Ringtone 1 2 Ringtone 2 3 Ringtone 3 Cancel By default your current external ringtone is selected Use the T and keys to scroll through the list of ringtones or use the phone keypad to select a specific ringtone To listen to the ringtone scroll to that selection A single loop sample of the ringtone is played Note The DT700 only plays the ringtone if it is in the idle state If the DT700 receives an incoming call or event related to a soft ring when it is playing this ringtone it stops playing the ringtone and plays the ringtone currently configure for the received event To stop playing a ringtone and listen to another ringtone use the T and 4 keys to scroll to another ringtone or use the phone keypad to select a specific ringtone To select a new ringtone scroll to the ringotne or press the number for that ringtone then press the OK soft key or the ENTER key If you select a new ringtone this ringtone will be applied to your next incoming call To exit the menu without making any changes to your current ringtone press the Cancel soft key Note If a ringtone label shows a character at the end of the
145. Park Extension All users who have a Park Extension key for that number will be able to see there is a call parked on that extension To pickup a call on a Park Extension e While your phone is idle and the Park Extension LED is flashing do one of the following e To place a hands free or headset call Press the Park Extension key then use your headset or the phone s speaker to continue the call on your phone e To use your phone handset for the call Pick up your phone handset then press the Park Extension key to pick up the call from that address MONITOR SUPERVISE KEY To Monitor a Call Workgroup scenario If you have Supervise rights over other users you can listen monitor or join barge calls for users you have Supervise rights over The workgroup member s LED on your phone will display stead red to show they are currently on a call 1 Press the key for the workgroup member 2 Press the Monitor soft key You can then press the Barge or Record soft key to barge on the call or start a recording of the call Press Exit to exit this screen without starting a Barge session or recording of the call RECORD KEY To record your current call e Press the Record key A recording of your current call starts To stop the recording a call e Press the Record key The call recording will stop CALL RECORDING INDICATION If call recording indication is enabled for your account the DT 700 phone indicates call recording stat
146. Phone User Guide 11 273 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES SS se Ringing SIP Net SIP Net Ringing 3C system Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use eooo ee Figure 11 50 Presence Icons in the Personal Directory Directory Entries Celular 818475559876 Home 61847555 1244 Lah 246 Available Lab 2 371 A Busy t Search e ae oe Incoming Call Display and the Personal Directory When the DT700 receives an incoming call it will search the Personal Directory for the calling party number If a matching entry is found the DT 700 will display the name specified in the entry Figure 11 51 Incoming Call Name from the Personal Directory Display Thu Apr 22 1116 AM Newall Note Incoming call information must match the Personal Directory entry s Number information exactly as it is entered in the Personal Directory for it to show up as a match when you receive an incoming call For example if you have any outside access codes or star hash code information in a Personal Directory number the incoming call display won t recognize the incoming phone number as an exact match to the Personal Directory 11 274 DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES The Personal Directory SEARCHING FOR AN ENTRY IN THE PERSONAL DIRECTORY To search the Personal Directory 1 Press the Menu key or cursor pad to access t
147. Pickup Newall Exi Help i DT700 Phone User Guide 7 101 Figure 7 2 DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D ITL 32D and DT730G ITL 12DG softkeys Tue Jan 25 10 31 AM Victoria Wroblewski Soft keys pt cicernail NewCall Exit Help Figure 7 3 DT710 softkeys ITL 6DE O U ONEC Softkeys E E T Exit Help C CD DT710 ITL 6DE ECONOMY PHONE DISPLAY The DT710 ITL 6DE LCD area shows three lines of information while the DT730 and DT730G phones are capable of showing five lines of information Most screen examples in this guide are for DI 730 phones Figure 7 4 Main Menu Display for ITL 6DE Directory Call History Exit Select The T Up and Down softkeys on the phone indicate to the user when there are more options than displayed on the LCD screen Figure 7 5 T Up and Down softkeys on Change or Select Monitor Menu Display for DT710 ITL 6DE Phones Visual ot of d 7 102 DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 7 6 BASIC PHONE OPERATION Basic Call Operation BASIC CALL OPERATION ANSWERING CALLS Incoming Call Display Thu Apr 22 1116 AM 14 Wroblewski Victoria 646 Newall To answer an incoming call Using the handset Lift the telephone handset Using the speaker Press the Speaker key Using a headset Press the Answer key If you are in the Personal Directory Call History or Menu screens Press the Line Key to view the caller information then use one of the me
148. Presence state is shown visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory e Visual and Soft Ring Presence state is shown visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory When a call is ringing on the monitored terminal play a soft ring tone Note Option 3 Visual and Soft Ring is only valid for SIP Net platforms Contact your system administrator to determine if Soft Ring is available on your system If you have Visual Monitor Settings for an entry in the Directory that also has an assigned Speed Dial the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown in the Directory Table 8 5 Monitor Presence Icons Se ae Unregistered Lees oot 6 U6 DT700 Phone User Guide 8 147 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS oag Speed Dial and Programmable Keys ee Speed Dial Key Not Available No Monitoring Ringing SIP Net SIP Net Ringing 3C system Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use If you have Visual monitor settings for a Speed Dial entry the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown by the LED Color Table 8 6 Monitor Presence LED Colors for Speed Dial Keys Type Programmable Line Key Registered LED is not lit fa J Unregistered LED is not lit fa J Speed Dial Key Not Available LED is not lit No Monitoring 8 148 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMA
149. S BEHAVIOR To place a call to a member of your workgroup 9 202 Figure 9 31 You can use a programmed key to place calls to other workgroup members While your phone and the other workgroup member s phone is idle do one of the following To place a hands free or headset call Press the key for the workgroup member you want to call An outbound call is made to the workgroup member Use your headset or the phone s speaker to continue the call on your phone To use your phone handset for the call Pick up your phone handset Press the key for the workgroup member An outbound call is made to the workgroup member Continue the call on your phone Non idle call states e If you are on a call you will see a screen that gives you the option to Blind transfer your currently held call to that workgroup member Transfer soft key Extension 353 is idle Select an option trom below Note If you actually want to place an attended consult transfer call rather than a Blind transfer call press the Transfer key on your phoneset Once an attended consult transfer is started use the Transfer key on the phoneset to complete the transfer DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using Enhanced Programmable Keys Figure 9 32 Transfer Key e Ifthe user has a call on hold you will see a screen that gives you the option to Pickup the call on that user s line Figure 9 33 Pickup soft Key
150. STORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES The Personal Directory Figure 11 71 Edit name Edit Mame Ho Up to 24 characters may be entered for the name e Press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen e To switch between first letter uppercase all uppercase all lowercase and numbers for keypad entry press the key on the keypad e To add a space to an entry press e To enter special characters press the L key For a list of special characters see Speed Dial and Personal Directory Character Sets in the DT700 Phone User Guide e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys b Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Number a To delete the entire number entry press the Delete softkey Or To edit the entry use the left cursor key on the cursor pad to backspace and then press the Delete softkey to delete the number that is before the cursor Use the telephone keypad to edit the number Figure 11 72 Edit Number Edit Murnber Delete Up to 24 characters may be entered for the number Only digits and may be entered e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys e You can also press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous sc
151. TALLATION Handset Connection _____ Modular 7A Plug lam Coiled Cord HANDSET Connector To connect LAN cable to the phone 2 Figure 3 9 3 DT700 Phone User Guide You will need a 10 BASE T 100 BASE T TX LAN cable Straight to connect the phone to your network Connect the 10 BASE T 100 BASE T TX LAN cable to the LAN port on the DT700 phone and to an open port on a device such as a Hub or PoE Power Over Ethernet switch on the local area network Thread the LAN cable through the groove on the back of the phone Phone LAN Connection To LAN To PC Groove If you have not connected the DT700 phone to a PoE jack connect the AC DC adapter to the phone as shown below 3 47 Figure 3 10 AC Adapter Connection Connector for AC Adapter AC Adapter Plug Groove AC Adapter Cord To connect a headset Optional Note For information on connecting a Jabra Bluetoothe headset to your phone see Appendix D Jabra Bluetooth Headset Support for DT 700 Phones There is no connector for a headset on the DT710 ITL 2E phone 1 Press the Menu key on the phone 2 Select User Settings 3 Select Headset Figure 3 11 Select Headset E Edit Before Dialing Clear Settings 4 Select Enable Disable Figure 3 12 Headset Options 5 Select Enable 3 48 DT700 Phone User Guide INSTALLATION Figure 3 13 Enable Headset Cancel 6 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to
152. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE DT700 Phone User Guide NOTICES Third Party Software Disclaimer and Limitations GETTEXT NetBSD Foundation s TNF License BSD license DT700 Phone User Guide Copyright 2008 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following discl
153. Table 8 7 Monitor Presence Icons eee ae Speed Dial Key Not Available No Monitoring Ringing SIP Net SIP Net Ringing 3C system Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use If you have Visual monitor settings for a Speed Dial entry the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown by the LED Color Table 8 8 Monitor Presence LED Colors for Speed Dial Keys aoe Programmable yP Key LED Line Key Registered LED is not lit l Unregistered LED is not lit la Speed Dial Key Not Available LED is not lit No Monitoring 8 152 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Tee Programmable yP Key LED BLF LED is not lit la Ringing SIP Net Blinking Red Ringing 3C system Blinking Green Subscription Failed Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use Held 3C system Note DT700 phones do not publish presence information Depending on other phones on your system and any phone application software that you use you may see different LED behavior for different presence states You can also press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen 7 Press the Save softkey to save your changes Figure 8 69 Save softkey Murniber 815475551234 Speed Dial 4 Monitor Mone 8 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to return to the Personal Directory or press the Exit
154. Unattended Transfer 7 117 Unregistered icon 2 28 Up Down Key cursor pad 2 26 ITL 2E 2 25 setup with 4 62 Up Down Keys cursor pad 4 62 ITL 2E 4 62 Up Down softkey 2 35 V viewing Corporate Directory 11 292 firmware version 4 83 IP address 4 83 Max Calls 4 84 Missed Calls 11 258 Personal Directory 11 270 Personal Directory Entry 11 272 Received Calls 11 259 Speed Dial Key 8 133 Voice mail 7 119 3C system A 312 icon 2 28 Voicemail softkey 2 34 7 119 volume call handset 4 63 headset 4 63 D 338 speaker 4 64 call icon 2 31 handset ringing icon 2 31 headset icon 2 31 ringing headset 4 62 4 63 D 338 soft ring icon 2 31 speaker icon 2 31 W Wall Mounting 3 52 clearance requirements 3 53 WEEE E 349 to E 355 Index DT700 Phone User Guide NEC Empowered by Innovation
155. User Guide JABRA BLUETOOTH HEADSET SUPPORT FOR DT700 PHONES Jabra Headset will need to enable the connector for the DCL 60 Line Key Module at each phoneset device with a line key module if you change the setting in the master configuration file 1 Open the default master configuration file DT700 phones dt 000000000000 cfg DT730G phones dt 000000000000g cfg 2 Edit the configuration file so the value for the mntn dcl option is 2 to support the Jabra Headset Kit Table D 1 Side 2 connector Operation Modes mntn dcl option 0 Debug Not supported Console 1 DCL 60 Default Selects the DCL 60 Line Key Module mode for the Side 2 connector Note The DCL 60 Line Key Module is currently only available on the 3C system 2 Jabra Selects the Jabra Headset Kit Headset Kit mode for the Side 2 connector 3 Restart all phones on the network to fully activate the Side 2 connector for the Jabra Headset Kit The Side 2 connector on all phones in your network will be enabled for the Jabra Headset Kit Headset Base Station Setup e Follow the manufacturer s instructions for assembling your headset and base station Do not connect the power adapter to the headset base station yet If you have already connected the power adapter unplug it from the wall outlet and the headset base station Enable the Headset port on your phone 1 Press the Menu key on the phone 2 Select User Settings 3 Select Headset DT7
156. ad 8 for example if required then enter the telephone number of the outside party You can use the Delete softkey to delete the last digit backspace Enter number external call End all Press the Dial softkey to initiate the call or wait a few seconds for the call to be automatically dialed Dial softkey End all DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC PHONE OPERATION Basic Call Operation The call proceeds to the dialed party Note You can also dial the number then lift the telephone handset or press the Headset softkey to initiate a call INTERNAL CALLS To place an internal call 1 Figure 7 11 Figure 7 12 Figure 7 13 DT700 Phone User Guide Lift the handset press the Speaker key or press the NewCall softkey to receive dial tone NewCall softkey 2 Tue Jan 25 10 31 AMI Yictoria Wroblewski z 7 oe a ee Voicemail HewCall Enter the internal extension number You can use the Delete softkey to delete the last digit backspace Enter number internal call tl Thu Apr 22 1124 AM Delete EndCall Press the Dial softkey to initiate the call or wait a few seconds for the call to be automatically dialed Dial softkey IH Thu Apr 22 1124 AM Delete EndCall The call proceeds to the dialed party Note You can also dial the number then lift the telephone handset or press the Headset softkey to initiate a call 7 105 BASIC PHONE OPERATION I 25 21 operon
157. aeeeeseeeeeeaes E 341 OpenSSL Redistribution Conditions nsoenenneennennennorrrrreerrerrsrrerrrn E 341 libSRTP Redistribution Conditions c cece cece sees sees eeseeeseeeseeeeeeees E 342 NetBSD Foundation s TNF LICENS ccccceeeceeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeees E 343 EO WC OMS Oe rrine EE amide anew peeteeaceuce E 343 A dio Coding LICENSES escini essien an na EE E EEEn E 344 Notice to the USET ccc cies ccessannde ceendeieeetnccuassesaid wedean batensadwesdancsaniesancedesesa E 344 Important safety INfOrMatION ccceeececseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeaes E 344 Use of an external AC adapter ccccccccccceccseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeesaeees E 344 Use of an IEEE802 3af power supply cee cceccc cece eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeees E 345 Power COMSUIMIDUON secseusscaicecueacseneetentedeccatessnnnocstcdnatstseddacaeeteulissaeetsudeeseneees E 345 Declaration of GOMONMILY i crsissnintsv rnaanosansiactwacosdanscudsasdanctwataularawadeaadasiudedadanss E 346 WEEE Product Disposal Information ccccecccseceseeeceeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeeaees E 349 Contents DT700 Phone User Guide OVERVIEW This document outlines features and usage of DT 700 phones running ona UNIVERGE 3C Unified Communications and Collaboration System or SIP Net Platform UNIVERGE 3C UNIFIED COMMUNICATIONS AND COLLABORATION TERMINOLOGY USAGE This manual describes the installation and usage of
158. aimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION INC AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED INNO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE XML PARSER XML c implementation file for basic XML parser written in ANSI C for portability It works by using recursion and a node tree for breaking down the elements of an XML document version V2 18 author Frank Vanden Berghen Copyright 2002 Frank Vanden Berghen All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce th
159. al Handset forwarding No Answer using star codes 1 2 Lift the handset from the phone Dial 62 lt forwarding number gt When your phone is not answered it will forward to the configured number s Multiple handset forwarding conditions may be enabled for your phone To enter additional numbers hang up the phone and then lift the handset to enter an additional number example 62 forwarding number hang up 62 another forwarding number hang up To set Conditional Handset forwarding Busy using star codes 1 2 Lift the handset from the phone Dial 63 lt forwarding number gt When your phone is Busy all other calls will forward to the configured number s Multiple handset forwarding conditions may be enabled for your phone To enter additional numbers hang up the phone and then lift the handset to enter an additional number example 63 forwarding number hang up 63 another forwarding number hang up To clear Handset Forwarding Conditions DT700 Phone User Guide Note This clears all handset forwarding conditions that are applied to the phoneset You cannot clear only a subset of the forwarding conditions You would need to clear all forwarding conditions and then re enter any specific conditions you wish to apply 9 185 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 vicrceronse 1 2 3 4 Press the Feature Key Press the Home soft key or wait 2 seconds to connect to the microbrowser
160. all History SS se Ringing SIP Net SIP Net Ringing 3C system Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use If you have Visual monitor settings for a Speed Dial entry the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown by the LED Color Table 11 2 Monitor Presence LED Colors for Speed Dial Keys Type Programmable Line Key Registered LED is not lit Unregistered LED is not lit fa Speed Dial Key Not Available LED is not lit No Monitoring DT700 Phone User Guide 11 265 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Tbe Programmable yP Key LED BLF LED is not lit la Ringing SIP Net Blinking Red Ringing 3C system Blinking Green Subscription Failed Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use Held 3C system Note DT700 phones do not publish presence information Depending on other phones on your system and any phone application software that you use you may see different LED behavior for different presence states 8 Press the Save softkey to save the entry The phone will confirm that the entry was added to the Personal Directory Note If the Call History entry is already in your Personal Directory you can edit the entry information For information on editing a Personal Directory entry see Adding or Editing a Personal Directory Entry on page 11 277 Figure 11 29 Confirm Personal Directory A
161. all History To add a Call History 1 2 3 11 262 Delete The phone dials the telephone number Note To change the options about being prompted to confirm the number before your phone dials external numbers see To edit the Dial Preference on page 4 77 ADD CALL HISTORY INFORMATION TO THE PERSONAL DIRECTORY Note For more information on the Personal Directory see The Personal Directory on page 11 270 entry to the Personal Directory Press the Menu key Select Call History Select either Missed Calls Received Calls or Placed Calls to view a call history list Use the cursor pad or the T Up and Down softkeys to scroll to the number you want to delete Press the Options softkey DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Call History Figure 11 26 Options softkey Missed Calls Thu Apr 22 11 16am Vroblew ski Victoria 646 6 Select Directory Add Figure 11 27 Call History Options Call History Option Dial 646 Select 7 Review the information To change any of the fields in the entry use the cursor pad or the Up and v Down softkeys to scroll to the field then press the More softkey and then the Edit softkey to edit that field Figure 11 28 More and Edit softkeys save f gt Name Up to 24 characters may be entered for the name e Press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cance
162. ally terminated press the EndCall softkey to terminate the call DT700 Phone User Guide PHONE TROUBLESHOOTING Phone Keypad Figure 12 16 Call on Hold and EndCall softkey Mion Way 24 1010 AM T Wroblewski Victoria t646 Please Wait End all P Resume Conference MewCall If you are in the process of transferring a call or in a conference press the Split softkey to split the calls then use the Shuttle softkey to switch to the dropped call and press the EndCall softkey to terminate that call PHONE KEYPAD The dial pad and or buttons are not working 1 2 Verify that the phone is receiving power Place a call to the telephone line from another working phone and monitor your phone for any changes to the display If your phone is not responding at all there may be a problem with the phone hardware Contact your system administrator Restart the phone a Press the Menu key b Select 5 Reboot c Press the OK softkey or Enter key on the cursor pad to restart the phone Note If you cannot restart the phone using the Menus unplug the phone from power and the network for ten seconds then reconnect the telephone to your network and power to perform a restart want to enter specific characters or letters in Speed Dials and Personal Directory Entries Table 12 1 DT700 Phone User Guide By default when you enter the Name section when entering information for a Speed Dial or Personal Directory ent
163. ammable Key LED fo 3 Press the Edit softkey Figure 11 84 Edit softkey Speed Dial Key Entry Lah Nurniber S26 Speed Dial F Monitor visual Delete 4 Select the 5 Directory Entry 5 Select Do Not Show in Directory and press the OK softkey Figure 11 85 Remove Directory Entry Directory Entry ala Do Mot Show in Directory C 2 Show in Directory Cancel 6 Press the More softkey then press the Save softkey to save your changes Figure 11 86 Save softkey Mame Lab Number 346 speed Dial 5 Monitor visual Directory Entry Mo Sarre e O Emt Figure 11 87 Edit Confirmation Confirmation Entry Updated successtully DT700 Phone User Guide 11 291 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES THE CORPORATE DIRECTORY If it is enabled on your system you can search a Corporate Directory The Corporate Directory can be a list of users for your location or for your entire company depending on the configuration by your system administrator VIEWING THE CORPORATE DIRECTORY AND ENTRY DETAILS To access the Corporate Directory 1 Doone of the following Using the Menu Key a Press the Menu key b Select Directory c Select Corporate Directory Figure 11 88 Main Menu Display Using the cursor pad a Press the Directory key right cursor pad key Figure 11 89 Directory Key from the Cursor Pad b Select Directory c Select Corporate Directory 11 292 DT7
164. ansfer the call that is currently in focus 10 245 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 5 Frocrammave Koy Note The default type of transfer blind or consult for this key is controlled by your system administrator To pickup a held call from a member of your workgroup When another user has a call on hold you will see a red flashing LED for that user e While your phone is idle and the other workgroup member s phone has a held call do one of the following e To place a hands free or headset call Press the key for the workgroup member then use your headset or the phone s speaker to continue the call on your phone e To use your phone handset for the call Pick up your phone handset then press the key for the workgroup member to pick up the call from that address MULTI PRESS BEHAVIOR To place a call to a member of your workgroup You can use a programmed key to place calls to other workgroup members e While your phone and the other workgroup member s phone is idle do one of the following To place a hands free or headset call 1 Press the key for the workgroup member you want to call An outbound call is made to the workgroup member 2 Use your headset or the phone s speaker to continue the call on your phone To use your phone handset for the call 1 Pick up your phone handset 2 Press the key for the workgroup member An outbound call is made to the workgroup member 3 Continue the ca
165. ar Code Enter Murnber 72018475559876 Camel A Ok Up to 24 characters may be entered for the number Only digits and may be entered e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys e You can also press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen e Use the X and keys on the telephone keypad to enter those characters Use the telephone keypad to enter a Speed Dial number for the entry and press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Speed Dial entries can be internal or external numbers DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 8 79 Figure 8 80 Figure 8 81 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Select Speed Dial Number Enter Speed Dial Kev The number of available Sped Dial Keys and their associated numbers depend on your model of DT700 phone For more information on the valid Speed Dial Keys for the specific phone models see Speed Dial Key Numbering on page 8 128 e You can also press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen Since you can only set presence monitoring for a Speed Dial that is an internal line select None then press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Monitor Settings Select Monitor 2 visual Ca Visual an
166. ar code appears on the display for 2 seconds before it is changed to an x to allow time to verify the dialed digit Note PIN code masking is not used when entered Speed Dial Keys or Personal Directory entries USER PORTABILITY AND THE CALL HISTORY lf User Portability is enabled on your system and you log on to a phone that supports User Portability the phone downloads a copy of your User Profile from the network and populates the Call History on that phone with the Call History details from your User Profile While you are using that phone it will display Call History details from your older calls and any calls that are received or placed while you are logged on to this phoneset and log call details in the User Profile Call History file on the phone When you log off the phoneset your User Profile Call History information is uploaded to the network and the phone s Phone Profile Call History information is downloaded back to the phoneset which will not contain any of the details that were saved to your User Profile Call History DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Call History ACCESSING THE CALL HISTORY You can use the Menu Key or the Cursor Pad to access the Call History information on your phone Access Call History using the Menu Key 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select Call History Figure 11 10 Call History from the Menu key Access Call History using the Cursor Pa
167. as any other forwarding conditions the handset forwarding conditions are pre pended to all profiles All forwarding conditions are evaluated by the MGC when processing a call regardless of where they are invoked SERVICE CONDITIONS e Multiple Handset Forwarding Conditions must be enabled for the user in the System Initialization settings for users to set multiple Handset Forwarding conditions DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser e Microbrowser screens for Handset Forward are available in all languages supported by both the 3C system and the phoneset The 3C system currently supports some languages e g Japanese that the phoneset does not support The phone currently supports some languages e g Croatian that the 3C system does not support The Microbrowser pages are be available in all languages supported by both the 3C system and the phone This currently includes Dutch NLD English UK English USA French France German Italian Portuguese Brazil Spanish Mexico Spanish Spain and Swedish Note BEHAVIOR To set a Handset Forwarding Condition 1 Press the Feature Key 2 Press the Home soft key or wait 2 seconds to connect to the microbrowser home page 3 Select Handset Forwarding Figure 9 11 Handset Forwarding amp Hot Desking Login Hed Handset Forwarding A Start Recording Call C1 Supervise a Call View System Call History a List Confer
168. at electrical and electronic products should not be disposed of as municipal waste EE Electrical and electronic products including the cables plugs and accessories should be disposed of separately in order to allow proper treatment recovery and recycling These products should be taken to a designated facility where the best available treatment recovery and recycling techniques are available Separate disposal has significant advantages valuable materials can be re used and it prevents the dispersion of unwanted substances into the municipal waste stream This contributes to the protection of human health and the environment Please be informed that a fine may be imposed for illegal disposal of electrical and electronic products via the general municipal waste stream In order to facilitate separate disposal and environmentally sound recycling arrangements have been made for local collection and recycling In case your electrical and electronic products need to be disposed of please refer to your supplier or the contractual agreements that your company has made upon acquisition of these products At www nec unified com weee you can find information about separate disposal and environmentally sound recycling FOR COUNTRIES OUTSIDE THE EUROPEAN UNION Disposal of electrical and electronic products in countries outside the European Union should be done in line with the local regulations If no arrangement has been made with your supplier pl
169. ation on the valid Speed Dial Keys for the specific phone models see Speed Dial Key Numbering on page 8 128 e You can also press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen Select the monitor settings for this entry and press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Note Monitoring can only be done on other lines that are internal to your system You cannot monitor external or outside lines Monitor Settings Select Monitor Cl visual Ca Visual and Soft Ring Cancel Valid options for monitoring are e None Do not monitor presence state changes for this Speed Dial Key e Visual Presence state is shown visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory e Visual and Soft Ring Presence state is shown visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory When a call is ringing on the monitored terminal play a soft ring tone 8 151 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS oag Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Note Option 3 Visual and Soft Ring is only valid for SIP Net platforms Contact your system administrator to determine if Soft Ring is available on your system If you have Visual Monitor Settings for an entry in the Directory that also has an assigned Speed Dial the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown in the Directory
170. ator MWI and Call Forwarding features HANDSET FORWARDING KEY Note See Handset Forwarding on page 9 180 for information on configuring the Handset Forwarding options on your phone The Forwarding key can be used to enable and disable the Handset Forwarding settings from your phone for users who do not use a supported client application to manage their forwarding settings It can also be used to monitor the Handset Forwarding state for your phone This key is a shortcut to access the Handset Forwarding page of the phone s microbrowser 9 210 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using Enhanced Programmable Keys HANDSET FORWARDING LEDS AND ICONS Table 9 6 Handset Forwarding LEDs and Icons Call Control Home Screen and DESI Comments Less Icon LED is not No Handset Forwarding settings are enabled on the phone lit Immediate Handset Forwarding is enabled While your phone is set to Immediate Handset Forwarding your phone will also play a stutter dial tone Note Handset Forwarding may have been enabled through the Forwarding key through the star codes or using a supported client application Busy Handset Forwarding is enabled Note Handset Forwarding may have been enabled through the Forwarding key through the star codes or using a supported client application No Answer Handset Forwarding is enabled Note Handset Forwarding may have been enabled through the Forwardin
171. atus enabled the phone displays the current Authentication state as Authenticated Held or Connecting as displayed in the screen below Figure 6 6 Authenticated Network Information DT700 Phone User Guide 6 99 Fo DT700 SECURITY FEATURES 6 100 DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC PHONE OPERATION These procedures encompass both the economy and value phones in the DT 700 series lineup The DT710 ITL 2E phone however does not have softkeys Note The DT710 ITL 6DE phone has a smaller screen display than is shown in the examples in this section You may have to scroll using the cursor pad and softkeys to see all available options The following symbols represent the DT700 s directional cursor pad and key pad User actions Keys Digit key Select corresponding menu Item 4 way scroll BACK key lt Return to User Settings menu Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key gt Select highlighted menu item Directory key 4 way scroll UP key 4 Move to previous menu item Volume UP key 4 way scroll DOWN key v Move to next menu item Volume DOWN key ENTER key Select highlighted menu item center button on cursor pad Note The softkeys are buttons that change function depending on the situation Each softkey s current function is displayed on the LCD screen above the button on the phone Figure 7 1 DT730G Color screen softkeys ITL 12CG Thu Aug 30 2 56 AM Richard homas Softkeys
172. ayed if you create an entry with the same name and same number as an existing entry Directory Duplicate Not Allowed Menu Display To change the name or number select LH Name or L Number to edit the field before trying to save the entry again If the Speed Dial number for a new Personal Directory entry is already used for another entry you will see an error when you try to save the Personal Directory entry Select 3 Speed Dial to edit the Speed Dial number before trying to save the entry again Speed Dial In Use Menu Display Speed Dial Key Already in Use To add a Speed Dial Key to an existing Personal Directory entry 1 2 3 8 150 Press the Menu key Select Personal Directory Press the More softkey and then the Edit softkey DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 8 66 Figure 8 67 Figure 8 68 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys More Soft and Edit softkeys Directory Entries Horne 81647555 1254 Lab 346 Lah 2371 PE Search DEP Delete iia O Deal Eit Select Speed Dial Use the telephone keypad to enter a Speed Dial number for the entry and press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Speed Dial entries can be internal or external numbers Select Speed Dial Number Enter Speed Dial Kev Delete Cancel The number of available Sped Dial Keys and their associated numbers depend on your model of DT700 phone For more inform
173. ber Only digits and may be entered e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys e You can also press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen To use the Programmable Key you originally pressed for the Speed Dial press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Or If you want to use a different Programmable Key for the Speed Dial use the telephone 8 137 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS P oag Speed Dial and Programmable Keys 8 138 Figure 8 37 Figure 8 38 keypad to enter the other Programmable Key number and press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Select Speed Dial Number Enter Speed Dial Kev The number of available Sped Dial Keys and their associated numbers depend on your model of DT700 phone For more information on the valid Speed Dial Keys for the specific phone models see Speed Dial Key Numbering on page 8 128 Select the monitor settings for this speed dial then press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Note Monitoring can only be done on other lines that are internal to your system You cannot monitor external or outside lines Monitor Settings Select Monitor Visual 3 Visual and Soft Ring Valid options for monitoring are e None Do not monitor presence state changes for this Speed Dial Key e Visual Presence state is sho
174. ber for the entry and press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Figure 11 62 Enter Telephone Number Enter Murnber 91847555 1234 Delete Cancel f ok Up to 24 characters may be entered for the number Only digits and may be entered e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys e You can also press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen Use the telephone keypad to enter a Speed Dial number if desired for the entry and press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Note For more information on Speed Dial Keys see Speed Dial and Programmable Keys on page 8 124 Speed Dial entries can be internal or external numbers Figure 11 63 Select Speed Dial Number DT700 Phone User Guide Enter Speed Dial Kev Delete E EE The number of available Sped Dial Keys and their associated numbers depend on your model of DT700 phone For more information on the valid Speed Dial Keys for the specific phone models see Speed Dial Key Numbering on page 8 128 e You can also press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen If you have assigned a Speed Dial to the entry you can select the monitor settings for this entry and press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey
175. bering on page 8 128 8 161 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Speed Dial and Programmable Keys 8 162 Figure 8 95 Table 8 9 e You can also press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen b Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Monitor Note Monitoring can only be done on other lines that are internal to your system You cannot monitor external or outside lines a Select the monitor settings for this entry Edit Monitor Settings Edit Monitor Ca Visual and Soft Ring Note Monitoring can only be done on other lines that are internal to your system You cannot monitor external or outside lines Valid options for monitoring are e None Do not monitor presence state changes for this Speed Dial Key e Visual Presence state is shown visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory for entries that also have an associated Personal Directory entry e Visual and Soft Ring Presence state is shown visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory for entries that also have an associated Personal Directory entry When a call is ringing on the monitored terminal play a soft ring tone Note Option L Visual and Soft Ring is only valid for SIP Net platforms Contact your system administrator to determine if Soft Ring is available on
176. bilities such as speed dial key programming and microbrowser applications 3C systems Press this key to get a dial tone If you are currently on a call the current call will be placed on hold and a new call will be started SIP Net Platforms See the Hold key Press this key to answer an incoming call If you have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the headset If you do not have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the speaker on the phone You can also press this key to answer a waiting call Press key to mute the microphone The LED on this key flashes when the microphone is muted Press the key again to un mute the microphone Press this key to access the features and settings provided on the local telephone menu such as Call History Personal Directory or User Settings Press this key to place a call on hold Press this key to transfer a call INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES I 05706 770c series Phones 14 Speaker key Controls the built in soeaker which can be used for Hands Free dialing and conversations The LED on this key lights when the speaker is active 15 Cursor pad Use this key to navigate to various features The up and down keys on the cursor pad can be used to adjust the volume of the phone ITL 12D DT730 SERIES PHONE LAYOUT AND PARTS Figure 2 7 ITL 12D DT730 Series 3 2 Tr 7 an Ai n 6 T t 7 7 E a ZAA o A TY A
177. ble on your phone depending on the configuration of your phone Contact your system administrator for more information Note You cannot change these settings on your phone To change any of these settings contact your system administrator To view the phone settings 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select 6 Status 4 82 DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Figure 4 54 Status options Status 3 Select Terminal Information to view the hardware and firmware information for your phone or select Network Information to view the network information for your phone or select 2 SIP Information to view the settings for your phone and SIP account on the network 4 Use the cursor pad or the T Up and Down softkeys to scroll through the phone settings To view the firmware information for your phone 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select 6 Status 3 Select Terminal Information 4 Use the cursor pad or Up Down softkeys to scroll to the Firmware Version screen Figure 4 55 Firmware version Terminal Information Firmware Version MEC Std SIP 1 04 21 5 Press the Exit softkey to return to the Status menu Note You cannot change these settings on your phone To change any of these settings contact your system administrator If you need to upgrade to the latest firmware version available for your phone on your network restart your phone To view the IP address
178. ccccccceccceecceeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeesaeeees 4 64 To select an External RINQtone ccccecccceeececeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeaeees 4 66 To enable an external headset ccccececcseecceeeceeeceeeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeseeees 4 67 To set external headset ringing Optional ccccceccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 68 To set the Call Waiting volume ccceccceccceeeceeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeees 4 69 To set the Hold Reminder volume cccccccceecceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 70 To change the Display Language c ccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeaeees 4 71 To set the Date Format ccccccccssccceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeceeeseeesesaeeeseeesaeess 4 72 To set the Time Format ccccccccssccceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseees 4 73 To adjust the LCD Contrast ccccccccecccseeceeeceeeecseeceeeeeeeeeesaeesseesaeees 4 74 To change the LCD Backlight Timeout ccccccceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeees 4 75 To enable or disable the Backlight Fade DT730G ITL 12CG only 4 76 To edit the Dial Preference cccccccsceceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeeceeseeeeeeeseeesaeees 4 77 To Clear User SettingS ccccccccscccsccceeeesseeceeecaeecseeseueesaeeseeeseeesageeseeess 4 78 To Clear Personal DireCtory ccccccccccesecceecceeeceseceeeeseeeseeeseeseeeeseeees 4 79 To Clear Call TAISUONY ce sites tes scce teen carcveneseccai
179. cccccseceecseecaeceeesaeeseeseeeseeseusseesaees 7 114 Hang Up while Conferencing ccccccccsececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeceeeeseeeseeeseeees 7 115 Transferring Calls sesiedoicaticrtearecretisctrnmncionlacnenia nen tinontinnaiesicaieindlainnslanumednncioandniensimecaanses 7 115 Attended transfer cccccccsscccececseeecseeceeeceeeecueceueeseeesseesageeseeeseeesagees 7 115 BINA Tan Ge ee ee ened ee en 7 116 Unattended transfer ccccccccscccseeceeeceeeeeeeeseeesaeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeeeesseesagees 7 117 To shuttle between calls during an Attended Transfer 006 7 117 To split calls into two calls when transferring Transfer split 7 118 Advanced Messaging Features cccccccseccnecceeeceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeneeseeeeaes 7 119 Message Waiting INGICATION ceccecccecceeeceeeneeceeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeenees 7 119 Accessing Voice Mall ccccccecceccceeeeeeceecceesascceeeceesueseuseueecueseeeseeseeees 7 119 DT710 Tc Ze MOMS oie attest eset cee ndcacatdectene a a dei 7 119 DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D ITL 32D and DT730G ITL 12DG ITL 12CG phones 2 0 0 ee ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeas 7 119 DT700 Phone User Guide Contents 8 Programmable Keys cccscceseceeeeeeeeeneceeeeneseneeneseneseneseaes 8 121 TAC TMS KOY nouero re ve TE Sens cae lov EEEa E EEEE RESE 8 122 Using the Help KOy vast aisscadasatcasceienca
180. ccept the setting You can also press the Cancel softkey to exit without making any changes Note For more information on the Personal Directory see The Personal Directory on page 11 270 For more information on Speed Dials see Speed Dial and Programmable Keys on page 8 124 CLEAR USER SETTINGS The following menus are used to delete information from the Flash memory Selecting Clear User Settings restores all user settings to their default value Selecting Clear Personal Directory erases all Personal Directory entries and Speed Dial Key information on the phone Selecting Clear Call History erases all of the Call History information on the phone It does not delete your system call history information or the call history information for any phone applications To Clear User Settings 1 Press the Menu key User Settings 2 Select 5 Clear Settings or LU Clear Settings Note The number of the menu item may differ based on the Edit Before Dialing settings on your phone 3 Select Clear User Settings 4 78 DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Figure 4 49 Clear User Settings Clear User Settings Clear User Settings Cancel The confirmation screen manage the following events Table 4 2 Clear Confirmation softkeys Discard changes and return to Clear Settings Restore all User settings to their default values Table 4 3
181. cceseeeseeeeeeeeeeees 11 277 Duplicate Entries in the Personal Directory ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 11 278 To add an entry to the Personal Directory cccceccceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees 11 278 To edit a Personal Directory entry cccccecceecceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseesaeees 11 283 Deleting a Personal Directory Entry c cccccccceecceeeeseeeee esse eeeaeeeaeeeees 11 289 To delete a Personal Directory entry c cccceccceeceseeece esse eeseeeeneeeees 11 289 To remove Personal Directory entry information but keep Speed Dial Key information cccccccceecceeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeesenees 11 290 The Corporate DireCtory cccccscccececeeecseeceeeeceeesaeesaueeaueesaeesaeecsueeaeeenas 11 292 Viewing the Corporate Directory and Entry Details cc eeeeeee ees 11 292 To access the Corporate Directory cccccceccceecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeaeeeeas 11 292 To dial a number from the Corporate Directory cccccseeeeeeeeeeees 11 293 Presence Monitor Settings and the Corporate Directory 11 294 Phone TroubleShooting cscccseccsseceeseeeseeseeseneseneeeeeees 12 295 Usmo Me Help KEY tcc essen tan nce gel casing isla 12 295 Basic TROUDISSMOOUING insicasicsrdneatonudcoennd dsudnawnaiiusdtanaedasciadusad ie duaneuieueneniediaeeuds 12 296 TO check COMMON PrObleOMsS cccccecceecseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeseeeaeeees 12 296
182. ceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 10 229 Call FRE GOFOING soevcsctceusccesedeneedseotesteecewandiysnssseteavenestetersienseedeausesccseteatee 10 229 Supervise a Call pecicveas ceces tacenconhavineracde ancy sets vere opsnniasmcsated amenseniaeaetees 10 230 View System Call HIStory ccccccccscccseeceeeceeeeceeeseeeseeesaeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeees 10 235 To view Call logs via the Microbrowser cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 10 235 List COMICGICN CSS oie d scjp cdsccststwenvesacadscivageaseteaseenestensdaeeseteassasdeeresentexenonseodiae 10 236 To view the Conference NiSting ccccccccseecceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeees 10 236 Search Directory Corporate Directory cccccccsecceeceeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeenees 10 239 To Search the 3C System Directory cece ceecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeees 10 239 Enhanced Programmable KeyS ccccceecesececeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeseeeeseesaeeeseeesanes 10 243 Enhanced Programmable Key Support by phone model 86 10 243 EU AN d BEF S as wt cee Deseo seth cei tedann EEE EE 10 244 To place a call to a member of your WOrkQrOUD ccceeeseeeeeeeeeeees 10 245 To pick up a ringing call to a member of your workgroup 5 10 245 To transfer a call to a member of your workgroup c 0sceeeeeeeeees 10 245 To pickup a held call from a member of your workgroup 66 10 246 To place a call to a member of your WOrkQrOuUD
183. connector and then manually enable the Side 2 connector for the Jabra Headset Kit at the physical phoneset device Applying Jabra firmware updates e Before applying any firmware updates to the Jabra headset dock the headset to the base station D 340 DT700 Phone User Guide NOTICES THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATIONS OPEN SOURCE LICENSE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT The DT700 model phones firmware includes the open source code from OpenSSL libSRTP and NetBSD Customers shall use the software embedded in DT730G pursuant to the terms and conditions of software license agreement of the UNIVERGE 3C and SIP Net communication server SLA The software contains certain third party open source software components which are provided under the terms and conditions designated at http www bcom nec co jp soft license DT730G_OSS html The terms and conditions of SLA are not applied to such third party open source software components OPENSSL This document acknowledges the following open source license text from the OpenSSL license agreement Copyright 1998 2008 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved OpenSSL Redistribution Conditions DT700 Phone User Guide Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
184. current screen If speaker is ON activate handset and keep focus on current screen Headset active behavior Turn Speaker ON and keep focus on current screen The Select Call page automatically updates every 30 seconds VIEW SYSTEM CALL HISTORY Selecting the View System Call History item allows the user to view the call logs maintained by the 3C system Note that the 3C system s call logs may not be identical to the call logs maintained by the DT700 s Call History For example the 3C system may choose to present call logs for all extensions assigned to the DT 700 terminal Note The Microbrowser only displays the last 32 calls or the last 7 days of calls whichever comes first To view call logs via the Microbrowser 1 Press the Feature key 2 Press the Home soft key or wait 2 seconds to connect to the microbrowser home page 3 Select View System Call History Figure 9 22 View System Call History amp Hot Desking Login C Handset Forwarding A Start Recording Call C1 Supervise a Call gf List Conferences Search Directory Selecting the View System Call History item invokes the following XML page DT700 Phone User Guide 9 191 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 siccoronse Figure 9 23 Call Log page all Histor pay Fri 14 12 357 fp Fri 10 08 Conference Bridge 5 pi Thu 1516 Wroblewski Victoria Pag Thu 16 09 ISOM PRI The Call History page handles the following events Soft Key
185. d 1 Press the Directory key right cursor pad key Figure 11 11 Directory Key on the Cursor Pad Redial 2 Select Call History Figure 11 12 Call History from the Cursor Pad Personal Directory CALL HISTORY AND PERSONAL DIRECTORY ENTRIES When the DT700 receives a call it will search the Personal Directory for the calling party number If a matching entry is found the DT 700 will display the name specified in the entry in the Call History DT700 Phone User Guide 11 257 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Figure 11 13 Call History Name from the Personal Directory Display Missed Calls Fri May 14 01 39pm Fri May 14 01 07pm Wroblewski Victoria 646 Note Call information must match the Personal Directory entry s Number information exactly as it is entered in the Personal Directory for it to show up as a match For example if you have any outside access codes or star hash code information in a Personal Directory number the incoming call display won t recognize the incoming phone number as an exact match to the Personal Directory MISSED CALLS When you have missed any calls the Missed Calls icon and a message display on the LCD Figure 11 14 Missed Calls icon and message Mes Fruita 1023aM Yictoria J Wroblewski a Thu Apr 22 1117 AM Yictoria J vvroblewski 3 New Missed Calls emal NewCall 3 New Missed Calls emal NewCall To clear the Miss
186. d Soft Ring Cancel You can also press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen For a star or hash code sequence you probably do not want the entry to show up in your Personal Directory Select Do Not Show in Directory and press the OK softkey Do Not Show in Directory Directory Entry ala Do Mot Show in Directory C 2 Show in Directory Cancel You can also press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen Press the Save softkey to save your changes 8 157 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Figure 8 82 Figure 8 83 Figure 8 84 10 Figure 8 85 8 158 Save softkey Eat Ext If the Speed Dial number for a new Personal Directory entry is already used for another entry you will see an error when you try to save the Personal Directory entry Select L2 Speed Dial to edit the Speed Dial number before trying to save the entry again Speed Dial In Use Menu Display A confirmation displays telling you the speed dial has been updated Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Speed Dial Edit Confirmation Confirmation Entry Updated successtully To return to the main phone screen press the Exit softkey or the Feature Key Exit softkey Fress soft key or wait to load page Once the Speed Dial Key is configured with the star code press the Speed Dial Key to dial the star code sequence DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE K
187. d on hold and a new call will be started SIP Net Platforms See the Hold key This key does not have a function on the ITL 2E phone Press this key to redial the last number that was dialed Press key to establish a 3 way conference call The LED on this key lights when are establishing a 3 way conference call and turns off when you end the conference call Press this key to answer an incoming call The audio will go through the speaker on the phone When LED on this key is lit press key to answer a waiting call Press key to mute the microphone The LED on this key flashes when the microphone is muted Press the key again to un mute the microphone Press key to access the voice mail system This key is not currently supported Press this key to place a call on hold Press this key to transfer a call Controls the built in soeaker which can be used for Hands Free dialing and conversations The LED on this key lights when the speaker is active Used to adjust various volume levels e Handset Speaker and Headset volume Press UP or DOWN key during conversation e Ring Volume Press UP or DOWN key while on hook e Soft Ring Volume Press UP or DOWN key while Soft Ring is playing 2 25 INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES F o DT700 and DT730G Series Phones CURSOR PAD Figure 2 11 Cursor pad 1 2 1 Up Down Keys 2 Redial Key 3 Directory Key 4 Enter Key They keys on t
188. ddition Confirmation Entry Updated successtully 9 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to return to the Personal Directory or press the Exit key to return to the main phone screen 11 266 DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Call History DELETE CALL HISTORY INFORMATION Note Call History information is not saved permanently on the phone it is only stored on your phone until the phone restarts All previous Call History information is deleted when you restart your phone If your system is configured for User Portability Call History information is not stored on the phone it is downloaded from and saved to the network You can still use the phone to delete specific Call History entries or all Call History information To delete a specific entry from the Call History 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select Call History 3 Select either Missed Calls Received Calls or Placed Calls to view a call history list 4 Use the cursor pad or the T Up and Down softkeys to scroll to the number you want to delete 5 Press the Options softkey Figure 11 30 Options softkey Missed Calls Thu Apr 22 11 16am droblewski victoria 646 6 Select Delete Figure 11 31 Delete Call History Entry Call History Option Dial 646 Directory Add Delete Select The call information is deleted from the call history 7 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softk
189. de INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones ITL 24D DT730 Series Keys and Parts 1 10 11 12 13 Call Indicator Lamp LCD Exit key Softkeys Help key Programmable Keys Feature key Recall key Answer key Mic key Menu key Hold key Transfer key The Call Indicator Lamp at top corner of the display flashes when a Call is offered to the phone Also if you have Voice Mail service the Lamp lights steadily when a message has been left The LCD Liquid Crystal Display provides call status activity information plus date time and softkey operation This key allows you to exit from the Menu or Help mode and go back to the telephone main screen The softkeys show the available features for your current activity Any feature shown at the bottom of the LCD is available The appropriate key is displayed on the screen according to the call handling process Press the Help key and then press a softkey to display information about that softkey The first programmable key is reserved as the Line Key Line Keys allow the user to select which line to operate on Any programmable keys not used as Line Keys can be programmed as Speed Dial Keys by the user or system administrator Numbers up to 24 digits can be assigned to Speed Dial Keys The numbers may be a telephone number or star nash codes This key displays a set of menu options that provide additional capa
190. des This key displays a set of menu options that provide additional capabilities such as speed dial key programming and microbrowser applications 3C systems Press this key to get a dial tone If you are currently on a call the current call will be placed on hold and a new call will be started SIP Net Platforms See the Hold key Press this key to answer an incoming call If you have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the headset If you do not have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the speaker on the phone You can also press this key to answer a waiting call Press key to mute the microphone The LED on this key flashes when the microphone is muted Press the key again to un mute the microphone Press this key to access the features and settings provided on the local telephone menu such as Call History Personal Directory or User Settings Press this key to place a call on hold Press this key to transfer a call INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES P DT700 and DT730G Series Phones 2 20 Figure 2 8 oo co N 14 Speaker key Controls the built in soeaker which can be used for Hands Free dialing and conversations The LED on this key lights when the speaker is active 15 Cursor pad Use this key to navigate to various features The up and down keys on the cursor pad can be used to adjust the volume of the phone ITL 8LD DT730 SERIES PHONE LAYOUT AN
191. dial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Opens the Address Group detail screen Directory key If you do not have Supervise privileges no operation Volume UP Key Move to previous menu item 4 way scroll UP key If you do not have Supervise privileges no operation 4 way scroll DOWN key Move to next menu item Volume DOWN Key If you do not have Supervise privileges no operation ENTER key Opens the Address Group Detail screen If you do not have Supervise privileges return to the appropriate call control screen After you select a group a screen appears listing the active calls from that group Figure 10 21 Group detail screen Monitor Boss address group Monitor This screen handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Move to previous menu item does not show if first menu item is selected 10 232 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Soft Key Features Explanation Move to next menu item does not show if last menu item is selected Exit Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Monitor If no calls are being monitored Set up a monitor call to the selected extension If a call is being monitored Shows the details for the monitored call Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the Select Address Group screen Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key S
192. e DT700 vastavust direktiivi 1999 5 EU podhinduetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele s tetele http www nec unified com doc ENGLISH Hereby NEC Unified Solutions declares that this DT700 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC http www nec unified com doc ESPANOL Por medio de la presente NEC Unified Solutions declara que el DT700 cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE http www nec unified com doc EAAHNIKH ME THN MAPOY2A H NEC ENOMOIHMENES AYSEIS AHAQONE OTI DT700 2YMMOPOONETAI MPO TI OYZIOAEI2 AMAITHZEI2 KAI TI AOINE2 2XETIKE2 AIATA El2 TH OAHTIA2 1999 5 EK DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 Phone User Guide NOTICES Declaration of Conformity http www nec unified com doc FRANCAIS Par la presente NEC Unified Solutions d clare que l appareil DT700 est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE http www nec unified com doc ISLENSKA Her me l sir NEC Unified Solutions yfir v a DT700 er i samr mi vi grunnkrofur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC http www nec unified com doc ITALIANO Con la presente NEC Unified Solutions dichiara che questo DT700 conforme ai re
193. e Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key No operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key Remain on existing screen move cursor up Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Remain on existing screen move cursor down Volume DOWN Key DT700 Phone User Guide 10 219 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Hard Key Features Explanation ENTER key Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen To Logout of Hot Desking session 1 Press the Feature Key 2 Press the Home soft key or wait 2 seconds to connect to the microbrowser home page 3 Select Hot Desking Off Figure 10 10 Hot Desking Logout Forwarding Recording start A B Supervise Call History Conterences Next Select Exit 4 The phone will log out of your Hot Desking session Figure 10 11 Hot Desking logged out Hot Desking Logout You have been logged out successfully 10 220 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser This page handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Return to the microbrowser Home page OK Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the microbrowser Home page Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key No operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key No operation Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key N
194. e Call soft key or by dialing the address using the keypad 9 200 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using Enhanced Programmable Keys USING ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WORKGROUP FEATURES ENHANCED BLF KEYS Note Transfer operations cannot be completed if the person you are trying to transfer the call to places you on hold or if the call from you is placed in a held state before the transfer operation completes The operation fails and you remain connected to the caller the same as before you started the transfer operation SINGLE PRESS BEHAVIOR To place a call to a member of your workgroup You can use a programmed key to directly place calls to another member of your workgroup e While your phone and the other workgroup member s phone is idle do one of the following e To make a hands free or headset call Press the key for the workgroup member you want to call then use your headset or the phone s speaker to continue the call on your phone e To use your phone handset for the call Pick up your phone handset then press the key for the workgroup member to continue the call on your phone To pick up a ringing call to a member of your workgroup If you are set up for a workgroup you will see a flashing green LED when there is a ringing call on any other workgroup member s phone e While your phone is idle and the other workgroup member s phone is ringing do one of the follow
195. e DT700 Phone User Guide e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys b Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Number a To delete the entire number entry press the Delete softkey Or To edit the entry use the left cursor key on the cursor pad to backspace and then press the Delete softkey to delete the number that is before the cursor Use the telephone keypad to edit the number Edit Telephone Number Edit Humber Delete Cancel Up to 24 characters may be entered for the number Only digits and may be entered e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys e You can also press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen b Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Speed Dial a To delete the speed dial press the Delete softkey Or To edit the speed dial use the left cursor key on the cursor pad to backspace and then press the Delete softkey to delete the number that is before the cursor Use the telephone keypad to edit the number Edit Speed Dial Number Edit Speed Dial Key Cancel FO oK The number of available Sped Dial Keys and their associated numbers depend on your model of DT700 phone For more information on the valid Speed Dial Keys for the specific phone models see Speed Dial Key Num
196. e above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution e Neither the name of the Frank Vanden Berghen nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission E 343 NOTICES THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE AUDIO CODING LICENSES For audio coding this product uses ITU T G 722 1 and ITU T G722 1 Annex C licensed from Polycom NOTICE TO THE USER The terminal described in this manual is intended to be connected to a wired 10 100 Base T local area network LAN by means of the cable that comes with the product To take advantage of all features of this term
197. e cursor pad e Place a call to the phone to test for a ring tone Verify that DND Do Not Disturb is not enabled on the phone Contact your system administrator to determine if this feature is available on your system Do Not Disturb Set from DND softkey Fri Apr 23 17 50 AM Yictoria J Wroblewski Eal Wied May 19 10 25 AM Wictoria J Wroblewski B46 Vorcermaill Vorcermaill NewCall To disable DND press the DND softkey You should also any desktop application for your phone if available to verify that DND is not enabled through the application To disable DND using star codes dial 79 from the phone Restart the phone a Press the Menu key b Select Reboot c Press the OK softkey or Enter key on the cursor pad to restart the phone Note If you cannot restart the phone using the Menus unplug the phone from power and the network for ten seconds then reconnect the telephone to your network and power to perform a restart If you are still having problems with your phone contact your system administrator a call on Hold The call does not terminate If you put a call on hold and then have a problem trying to un hold or reconnect to a call during a conference or transfer the caller may have dropped This can happen if the other caller has had an interruption with their network connection In most cases the call will time out and the call will terminate automatically In cases where the call is not automatic
198. e is displayed with a 12 hour or 24 hour clock format Press the Menu key Select User Settings Select 4 Date Time select Date and Time options Date Time LOD Settings E Edit Before Dialing Clear Settings Select Date Format Select the desired date format Then press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to accept the setting DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Figure 4 35 Select Date options Date Format Mon Jan 1 2 Mon 1 Jan 3 Jan 1 Mon 4 1 Jan Mon Cancel You can also press the Cancel softkey to exit without making any changes Table 4 1 Date Formats C E Note The setting that highlighted is the setting that is currently enabled To set the Time Format Determines whether time is displayed with a 12 hour or 24 hour clock format 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select User Settings 3 Select 4 Date Time Figure 4 36 Select Date and Time options Date Time LOD Settings E Edit Betore Dialing Clear Settings PE E E l Select 4 Select Time Format DT700 Phone User Guide 4 73 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION og Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Figure 4 37 Select Time format Figure 4 38 Date Time Date Format Select 12 Hour or 24 Hour Then press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to accept the setting You can also press the Cancel softkey to exit without ma
199. e of the phone 16 Scroll key Press this key to scroll to the next page of Programmable Keys ITL 6DE DT710 SERIES PHONE LAYOUT AND PARTS ITL 6DE DT710 Series Phone Layout i im DO E DEF OQO Sep 10 uo A CON mM SA A igs COOR 12 13 14 11 15 DT700 Phone User Guide Table 2 12 DT700 Phone User Guide INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones ITL 6DE DT710 Series Keys and Parts 1 10 11 12 13 Call Indicator Lamp LCD Exit key Softkeys Help key Programmable Keys Feature key Recall key Answer key Mic key Menu key Hold key Transfer key The Call Indicator Lamp at top corner of the display flashes when a call is offered to the phone Also if you have Voice Mail service the Lamp lights steadily when a message has been left The LCD Liquid Crystal Display provides call status activity information plus date time and softkey operation This key allows you to exit from the Menu or Help mode and go back to the telephone main screen The softkeys show the available features for your current activity Any feature shown at the bottom of the LCD is available The appropriate key is displayed on the screen according to the call handling process Press the Help key and then press a softkey to display information about that softkey The first programmable key is reserved as
200. e the softkeys a Use the Up and Down softkeys to scroll to the field you want to edit b Press the More softkey and then the Edit softkey to edit the field More and Edit softkeys Mame Lab Number 346 speed Dial 5 Monitor visual Directory Entry Yes edit Exit Use the Cursor Pad a Use the 4 Up and vy Down keys on the Cursor pad to scroll to the field you want to edit b Press Enter on the cursor pad to edit the field Edit the desired field s Name a To edit the name use the telephone keypad and cursor pad Use the left cursor key on the cursor pad to backspace and then press the Delete softkey to delete the character that is before the cursor Or To delete the entire name entry press the Delete softkey Edit Name Edit Marne Abe 4 Up to 24 characters may be entered for the name e Press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen e To switch between first letter uppercase all uppercase all lowercase and numbers for keypad entry press the key on the keypad e To add a space to an entry press DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 8 93 Figure 8 94 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys e To enter special characters press the LH key For a list of special characters see Speed Dial and Personal Directory Character Sets in th
201. e through the menus Exit Leaves current menu without saving any changes Select Selects the highlighted option Cancel Exit the current screen options without changing any settings OK Press this after you have finished making changes or your selection Save Press this to save the changes you have made to the Personal Directory or Speed Dial Delete In the Call History Personal Directory and Speed Dial screens press this softkey to delete the currently highlighted information Options In the Call History menus press this softkey to view the options for the entry including dialing and Personal Directory options Note Not all softkeys may be available on your system For details on the softkeys on your system contact your system administrator Exit and Help Keys Press the Exit key to exit the Menu screens and return to main phone screen Figure 2 23 Exit Key Tue Jan 25 10 31 AM Victoria Wroblewski Help You can use the Help key to view information about the softkeys that are displayed on your phone 1 Press the Help key DT700 Phone User Guide 2 35 INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES 2 36 Figure 2 24 2 Figure 2 25 Figure 2 26 Help key Tue Jan 25 10 31 AM Victoria Wroblewski Help Press the softkey for which you want to see Help information Press a softkey for Additional Help 2 Fri Mow 19 0149 PMI Press a Line or Soft Key for help po f Voicemail Newal
202. e up and down keys on the cursor pad can be used to adjust the volume of the phone This port located behind the Color LCD screen can be used to charge USB devices 2 7 2 8 Figure 2 2 Table 2 5 INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones ITL 12CG DT730G SERIES PHONE LAYOUT AND PARTS ITL 12CG DT730G Series CoO N m ee a weg 2 16 4 5 OA 12 13 14 11 15 ITL 12CG DT730G Series Keys and Parts 1 Call Indicator Lamp Color LCD Exit key Softkeys The Call Indicator Lamp at top corner of the display flashes when a Call is offered to the phone Also if you have Voice Mail service the Lamp lights steadily when a message has been left The color LCD Liquid Crystal Display provides call status activity information plus date time and softkey operation This key allows you to exit from the Menu or Help mode and go back to the telephone main screen The softkeys show the available features for your current activity Any feature shown at the bottom of the LCD is available The appropriate key is displayed on the screen according to the call handling process DT700 Phone User Guide 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DT700 Phone User Guide Help key Programmable Keys Feature key Recall key Answer key Mic key Menu key Hold key Transfer key Speaker key Cursor pad USB Cha
203. ease contact the local authorities for further information INFORMATIONEN ZUR PRODUKTBESEITIGUNG DE F R L NDER IN DER EUROP ISCHEN UNION Das abgebildete Diagram soll deutlich machen dass elektrische und X elektronisch Produkte nicht im normalen Hausabfall entsorgt werden d rfen EE Elektrische und elektronische Produkte inklusive Kabel Stecker und Zubeh r m ssen separat beseitigt werden damit die richtige Entsorgung Wiederherstellung oder Recycling gew hrleistet werden kann Bringen Sie deshalb solche Produkte zu einer speziellen Entsorgungsstelle die eine fachgerechte Entsorgung Wiederherstellung oder Recycling sicherstellen kann Separate Beseitigung hat entscheidende Vorteile Bestimmte Materialien werden wiederverwendet und die Verbreitung von ungewunschten Stoffen in der E 349 NOTICES og WEEE Proauct Disposal Information E 350 gewohnlichen Abfallbeseitigung kann verhindert werden Damit wird ein Beitrag zum Schutz der allgemeinen Gesundheit und Umwelt geleistet Bitte beachten Sie dass das illegale Beseitigen von elektrischen und elektronischen Geraten im normalen Hausmull eine Strafe nach sich ziehen kann Um bei der separaten Beseitigung von elektrischen und elektronischen Produkten behilflich zu sein und um ein umweltfreundliches Recycling zu ermoglichen hat NEC Unified Solutions in allen Mitgliedsstaaten der Europaischen Union Vereinbarungen getroffen die ein lokales Einsammeln und Recycling erm gliche
204. eccseccececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseees 9 204 To pickup a Call on a Park ExteNnsIONn ccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 9 205 CAIN EAC RC cassis seetic gacito A E E O E E T 9 205 Using the Call Back Key ccccceccssceceeeceeeeeeeceeeeceeseeseseseeeeneeesnees 9 205 To reset the number for a Call Back Key cccccceeceeeeaeeeseeeseeeaees 9 205 THO CICA Call BACK sioan a N An EA EEA EREE aes 9 205 Monitor Supervise Key in cncdncicneccctanveeneeidiaatadiwondsnwcenwecanvaensyacsdsedancdevabeasedeies 9 206 To Monitor a Call Workgroup scenario nannannanneneennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenne 9 206 ROCO KOy aca A E O 9 206 To stop the recording a call 0nnaannannannannnnnnnennnnannnnnnnnnnennnnnrrsnnnnrnnene 9 207 Send tO VM Key esere E NEEE AE E A 9 207 Hot Desk KEY sissors nede ne aeaa RTA SAAE ONN EDANA 9 208 To log out of your Hot Desk session cccccceeccececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 208 TONK DIAK OY eienenn anana AEEA T REE EEA EE EA E AA 9 208 To seize a trunk to place a call ccc cccccceccceeeceeeeaeeeseeeeaeeeaeeeseeeseeeeaees 9 209 ND CY ste seesaw EI A PEE ET been see E T 9 209 To set Do Not Disturb for your Phone cc cece ecccseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaees 9 210 To disable Do Not Disturb for your PANONE cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaees 9 210 Handset Forwarding Key ccccsccsseeceeecesecceeccacecseecegecsueeseeeceeecsueeeueeees 9 210 T
205. ed Calls icon and Message To clear the Missed Call icon and Message review your Missed Calls in the Call History To view Missed Calls 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select Call History Figure 11 15 Call History 3 Select Missed Calls 11 258 DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Call History Figure 11 16 Missed Calls Call History Missed Calls Received Calls Placed Calls 4 Use the cursor pad or the T Up and Down softkeys to scroll through the missed call information The phone stores call information the most recent 50 calls displaying the newest entries first If you have a Personal Directory entry matches a number in your Call History the name from the Personal Directory is shown Figure 11 17 Missed Call Information Example Missed Calls Thu Apr 22 11 16am Wroblewski Victoria 646 Options 5 Press the Exit softkey to return to the Call History menu After viewing your Call History the View Missed Calls message is removed from the main LCD screen RECEIVED CALLS To view Received Calls 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select Call History Figure 11 18 Call History Select 3 Select Received Calls DT700 Phone User Guide 11 259 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Figure 11 19 Received Calls Call History Missed Calls Received Calls Placed Calls 4 Use the cursor pad or the T Up and Down softkeys to scroll
206. ed Programmable Keys e Call Back Key e Shortcut keys to access microbrowser web pages from the 3C System Web Server e Hot Desk Login Logoff e Record Call e Monitor Supervise Call e Handset Call Forwarding ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEY SUPPORT BY PHONE MODEL The following table lists the combinations of Line Key Modules supported by the DT700 and whether the Microbrowser feature is supported Table 9 2 DT700 Enhanced Programmable Keys Support Product Name Model Number Supported Key Enhanced Programmable Modules Keys Support DT710 ITL 2E 1 e None Partial Supported Programmable Keys e Enhanced BLFs e Record Call e Send to Voice Mail e ParkExt e Do Not Disturb The following additional Enhanced Programmable Key functions require a display e Monitor ITL 24D e 8LK L E ITL 32D e 8LK L C Factory installed DT700 Phone User Guide 9 199 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 05 erocrammave Koy Product Name Model Number Supported Key Enhanced Programmable Modules Keys Support Speed Dial Key User defined Context Sensitive Enhanced ITL 24DG 8LK L Transfer Pickup Monitor Send To Voice Mail Key Park Extension Key DND Key Call Forward Key Hot Desk Login Logoff Record Call Monitor Supervise Call Handset Call Forwarding a On the ITL 8LD the microbrowser utilizes the topmost display only The microbrowser does not utilize the lower DESI Less display ENHANCED BLFS
207. ed and the entry is not deleted 8 Doone of the following e To delete more Speed Dial entries press the Speed Dial Key for that entry and repeat steps 3 through 7 e To return to the main phone screen press the Exit softkey or the Feature Key 8 168 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Figure 8 110 Exit softkey Press soft key or wait to load page fC A Ei If you go to the Personal Directory you will still see the name and number as an entry but if you view the details for the entry you will see that the Speed Dial has been deleted and the Monitor setting is now None Figure 8 111 Personal Directory Entry detail Entry Cellular Nurribver 018qr55569870 Speed Dial Monitor Mone Delete To delete an entire Speed Dial and Personal Directory entry 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select Personal Directory 3 Use the cursor pad or the T Up and Down softkeys to scroll to the entry you want to delete 4 Press the More softkey and then the Delete softkey Figure 8 112 More and Delete softkeys Directory Entries Hore 516475551234 Lab 346 Lab 2371 i gt gt add gt EE Detail Ent 5 Press the Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to confirm Figure 8 113 Delete Entry Confirm DT700 Phone User Guide 8 169 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Speed Dial and Programmable Keys The entry will be deleted from your Personal Directory 6 Pre
208. eeseseesseeseneeseaes 3 44 TO ACI TIN NS ee E E E TE 3 45 Connecting the PRONG ccccccssceccssececeeseeceeseecseececeuseeeseusesseueeessueesseaeees 3 46 To attach the handset i ccinsisicornsacccieencqsaveriocnuntaciivacnaeresnsedusiesuxcecumeratecauntatul 3 46 To connect LAN cable to the Phone ccccccceccceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeaeees 3 47 To connect a headset Optional cccceccceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesneeees 3 48 To connect a computer Optional cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeenaaess 3 49 Installing a Directory Card Optional ccccccceseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeees 3 50 Installing Removing Line Key Card Optional cccccccsseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaees 3 51 To remove Line Key Panel Button Panel cccccseeceeeseeeeeeeeeeneeees 3 51 To install Line Key Card joni scvesincusnierneodsutensuesacadandnansbedaduwenedidamewadactindrentcncues 3 52 Wall Mounting Optional sciscariisencessvncsnouaierieunenciatevctndcaeuiubanssatencenewsiatsnduendeans 3 52 Wall Mounting Clearance Requirements cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeens 3 53 To mount the phone on the Wall cccccceecceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 53 Contents BLK L Module Installation cccccccccccseceseeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeesseesaees 3 55 To install the 8LK L Module ccc ceccceecceeeeeeeeceeeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeees
209. efreshed that is the time does NOT update every second If you select a conference address with no calls in progress the participant details are replaced by the string No conference in progress All other functionality of the conference detail page is the same the page updates every 30 seconds and the user may join the conference SEARCH DIRECTORY CORPORATE DIRECTORY SEARCH DIRECTORY Selecting the Search Directory item invokes the following XML page allowing the user to enter a string to search the 3C System Directory Note that the 3C System Directory is different than the Personal Directory maintained by the phone To Search the 3C System Directory 1 Press the Feature key 2 Press the Home softkey or wait 2 seconds to connect to the microbrowser home page 3 Select Search DT700 Phone User Guide 10 239 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 siccorouse Figure 10 28 Search System Directory Back Select Exit 4 Enter your search string and press the OK soft key Figure 10 29 Search Directory page Search Directory The Search Directory search string can be a name or a number The search string field has focus upon entering this page The keypad is in lower case character entry mode by default when entering the Search Directory page To toggle to numeric entry mode press the key Uppercase character mode is not supported Searches are not case sensitive Table 10 1 Supported
210. en Select highlighted menu item Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the previous screen Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key No operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key Remain on existing screen move cursor up Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Remain on existing screen move cursor down Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen The phone clears all of the handset forwarding settings that are applied to the phone Note This only clears the handset forwarding settings applied to the phone Administrator configured or system level forwarding settings are not deleted To clear Handset forwarding using star codes DT700 Phone User Guide 1 2 Lift the handset from the phone Dial 73 All handset forwarding settings that are applied to the phone are cleared Note This only clears the handset forwarding settings applied to the phone Administrator configured or system level forwarding settings are not deleted CALL RECORDING Note If you select Start Recording Call and call recording is not enabled for you at the system level any Start Recording requests will fail and an error message is displayed Contact your system administrator if you need call recording enabled START RECORDING CALL selecting the Start Recording Call item invokes the Start Recording page This screen handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanat
211. ences Search Directory This menu handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Move to previous menu item does not show if first menu item is selected Move to next menu item does not show if last menu item is selected Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Select highlighted menu item Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Exit the micro browser to the appropriate call Redial key status screen DT700 Phone User Guide 9 181 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 sicrcoronse Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll FORWARD key Select highlighted menu item Directory key 4 way scroll UP key Move to previous menu item Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Move to next menu item Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Select highlighted menu item 4 Select the handset forwarding option that you want to set rr a ee Forward immediately The incoming call will be forwarded to destination s immediately Forward when busy The incoming call will be forwarded to destination s if there is an existing call in progress Forward after 30 seconds The incoming call will be forwarded to destination s if it is not answered in 30 seconds Clear forwarding Clear all handset forwarding conditions To set immediate forwarding Immediate forwarding will forward all incoming calls to the destination number s immediately Figure 9 12 Immediate forward
212. endhosedackiscse estaranubad 7 107 Using a Headset to Make and Receive Calls ccccccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeneees 7 108 To make calls with your NeadSet cccccccsececeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaes 7 108 To answer calls with your NeadSet ccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaes 7 108 To transfer the current call to your headset ccceccseceseeeseeeeeeeeaees 7 109 Call Waiting Concurrent Calls cccccccccccceccceeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeseeeseeeeseeeaeeeseeesaees 7 109 To answer the other incoming call Call Waiting cccceseeeeeseeee ees 7 109 To place a second call Concurrent Call ccccseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 110 TO switch between calls cece ceecccsecceeecseeceeeceeeceaeesaeeceueeceeesaeeseeesaees 7 111 Call Transferring and Conferencing cece seccceeceaeeeeeeeeeeese esse eeseeeeaeeeaeeeaes 7 111 Conferencing Calls cccccccececeeeceeecceeceecceeecceeeaseecaeesseeseeseeeeseeeseeesgees 7 111 TO conference two calls cccceccceeecceecceeecseeceeeceeeecseeseeseeesaueeseeenaees 7 112 To hold resume a conference Call cece ceeccceeeceeececeeceeeeeeseeeeseeeesaeeetees 7 113 To call another party while on a conference Call ccccsceeeeeeeeeeees 7 113 TO Split a conference call cece cece cc eeeceeeeee seas eeaeeeseeesaeeseeeseeeseeeaees 7 113 To switch between two calls cc
213. enntssncsescoteadsiseaeseececee 6 95 Errors and Debugging ssirsissasnnsedirnirniinida ai aaeain 6 98 T Basic Phone Operation assnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 7 101 Basic Call Operation cccccscccsscccscecececececeueceeeecaeecsuecsueceueesseesuesegessaeenes 7 103 Answering CAINS ie ter otcies jeetuncadnns tees Joetideneadedepadaddacetinaces aoreatebnanadxdedaddenrebds 7 103 TO answer AN INCOMING call c cece ceccceecee sees eeseeeceeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeeaeeeaes 7 103 TO reject AN INCOMING call ccc cccceecceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeaees 7 103 FFA NOUNS nee csictec instead een E E E cee dutansexeoians 7 104 To place an external Call ccccecccceccseeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeseeeeseeeaeeseeeseeeeaees 7 104 To place an internal Call ccccccsecseecseeceeeceeeeceeeceeceueseeeesaeesaeesaess 7 105 6 2 i 6 e eee ee ene ne tre ee ee ee 7 106 DT 19 ITL DE PHONE semasini a 7 106 DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D ITL 32D and DT730G ITL 12DG ITL 12CG phones ccc cccccccccccececseeeeeeeseaseeeaeesseneesaneens 7 106 Saele i gE EEEE N nee V eee ee ee ee 7 106 Redialing a IN UMD OF sitios encioun seeeronencadseneewancdandeecsaasay sack paceewsleonssacaeineursade 7 107 Hold RESUME a Calll ccccceccceccceeeceeeceeeceeceeecaeecaeecuecsueesseeseeessaessgeeeas 7 107 TO hold resume a CAN ica sseszcess naceestitos bernndiveivon duaesusnaineuss
214. entered for the number Only digits and may be entered e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys e You can also press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen Use the telephone keypad to enter a Speed Dial number for the entry and press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Speed Dial entries can be internal or external numbers DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Figure 8 60 Select Speed Dial Number Enter Speed Dial Kev Delete Cancel The number of available Sped Dial Keys and their associated numbers depend on your model of DT700 phone For more information on the valid Speed Dial Keys for the specific phone models see Speed Dial Key Numbering on page 8 128 e You can also press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen 7 Select the monitor settings for this entry and press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Note Monitoring can only be done on other lines that are internal to your system You cannot monitor external or outside lines Figure 8 61 Monitor Settings Select Monitor Ca Visual and Soft Ring Valid options for monitoring are e None Do not monitor presence state changes for this Speed Dial Key Visual
215. enu options that provide additional capabilities such as speed dial key programming and microbrowser applications 8 Recall key 3C systems Press this key to get a dial tone If you are currently on a call the current call will be placed on hold and a new call will be started SIP Net Platforms See the Hold key 9 Answer key Press this key to answer an incoming call If you have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the headset If you do not have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the speaker on the phone You can also press this key to answer a waiting call 10 Mic key Press key to mute the microphone The LED on this key flashes when the microphone is muted Press the key again to un mute the microphone 11 Menu key Press this key to access the features and settings provided on the local telephone menu such as Call History Personal Directory or User Settings 12 Hold key Press this key to place a call on hold 13 Transfer key Press this key to transfer a call DT700 Phone User Guide 2 21 INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES F o DT700 and DT730G Series Phones 2 22 Figure 2 9 14 Speaker key Controls the built in speaker which can be used for Hands Free dialing and conversations The LED on this key lights when the speaker is active 15 Cursor pad Use this key to navigate to various features The up and down keys on the cursor pad can be used to adjust the volum
216. er CMM Meeting Manager CMM Other aspects of 3C Collaboration e 3C Web Conferencing e 3C Conference Bridge UNIVERGE 3C Unified Unified Communications Manager UCM s Communications Manager e Primary UCM more specific than UCM e Secondary UCM s more specific than UCM UNIVERGE 3C Unified UNIVERGE 3C system Communications and 3C System in headings and titles Collaboration System 3C system general usage UNIVERGE 3C user or User 3C user Account or User Account Account on the 3C System Note All features require a full UNIVERGE 3C system installation for functionality A 309 Product Name Hereinafter referred to as UNIVERGE 3C Voice Mail 3C Voice Mail 3C Voice Mail Voice Mail UNIVERGE E 3C Web UNIVERGE a eee Web Administration application Administration application UNIVERGE Media Gateways or e DT700 SIP Phones requires a UNIVERGE 3C or SIP Net system Devices e BranchHub Require a UNIVERGE 3C system e COHub e MeetingHub Conferencing Bridge e PhoneHub Note All features require a full UNIVERGE 3C system installation for functionality CALL PICKUP If your system administrator has made you part of a pickup group you can answer calls to other users in your pickup group from your phone To pick up a call on a DT710 ITL 2E phone e Depending on the type of call you want to pick up do one of the following when a call arrives e To pick up a call from your Pickup group dial 92 e To pick up
217. er use the telephone handset or your headset when you make and receive calls Note You cannot attach a headset to DT 10 phones To make calls with your headset 4 Figure 7 21 If you are using a headset it is assumed that the telephone handset in the on hook position when you are making calls Press the NewCall softkey to receive dial tone Enter the telephone number Press the Dial softkey to initiate the call or wait a few seconds for the call to be automatically dialed Note You can also dial the number then press the Headset softkey to initiate a call A Headset icon displays on the LCD along with the call information Headset icon and Headset softkey w3 Thu Apr 22 1155 AM TE Wroblewski victoria 646 Conference EndiCall If you want to transfer the call to your telephone handset pick up the telephone handset to continue the call If you want to transfer back to the headset press the Headset softkey then place the telephone handset back on hook Note While you are on a call if you press the Headset softkey while the telephone handset is on hook your call will be dropped Make sure you pick up the telephone handset to continue your call before you press the Headset softkey To answer calls with your headset 1 Figure 7 22 7 108 If you are using a headset it is assumed that the telephone handset in the on hook position when you are answering calls While the telephone is ringing press the
218. erence IiSting ccccecccseecseeeceeeceeeeseeeseeesaeeseeeeaeeeaes 9 192 Search Directory Corporate Directory cccccccsecceeceeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 195 To Search the 3C System Directory ccccceccsecceeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaees 9 195 Enhanced Programmable KeyS c cccccsccceeceeeeeeeeeseeeceeeeseeeseeseeeseeeeaeeess 9 198 Enhanced Programmable Key Support by phone model 0006 9 199 Ennanced DUF S prepr onn Raaen aA ee eee ee ere ee 9 200 Using Enhanced Programmable KeysS c cccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeeeaes 9 201 Workgroup Features Enhanced BLF KeyS ccccseceseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 9 201 To place a call to a member of your WOrKQLOUD ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 9 201 To pick up a ringing call to a member of your workgroup 0086 9 201 To transfer a call to a member of your workgroup 0ccceeceeeeeeeeeeees 9 201 To pickup a held call from a member of your workgroup 6000 9 201 To place a call to a member of your WOrKQrOUD 0ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 9 202 To pick up a ringing call to a member of your workgroup 0 086 9 203 To transfer a call to a member of your workgroup ccceceeeeeeeeeeees 9 203 Park Extension Key cccccssccseccsseccseecueeceeeceueceueceucecaeecaeeeeueseueeseeesaensaees 9 204 To park a call to a Park Extension cccccc
219. es the Forwarding Star Code to forward all calls to a number To activate the star code sequence you would then only need to press the Speed Dial Key Note For details on the star nash code available for your system contact your system administrator DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys To configure a Programmable Key as a Speed Dial Key for a star hash code 1 Figure 8 73 Figure 8 74 Figure 8 75 Figure 8 76 Figure 8 77 DT700 Phone User Guide Enter the programmable mode for your phone The Feature key LED lights a steady red Feature Key Note For information on how to enter the programmable mode for your phone see Using the Feature Key on page 8 132 Do one of the following ITL 24CD ITL 12CG ITL 24DG ITL 12DG ITL 32D ITL 24D ITL 12D and ITL 6DE Phones Press the programmable key that you want to set as a Speed Dial Key The programmable key LED flashes Programmable Key LED fa ITL 8LD Phones Press the Scroll Key to scroll to the desired page then press the Speed Dial Key that you want to edit The programmable key LED flashes and the Speed Dial information for the key is shown scroll Key Programmable Key LED Note If the Speed Dial has already been programmed the name and number information displays You will need to edit the speed dial information or add the new information to a different Speed Dial Key To edit the Speed
220. et up a monitor call to the selected extension Directory key Volume UP Key Move to previous menu item 4 way scroll UP key 4 way scroll DOWN key Move to next menu item Volume DOWN Key ENTER key If no calls are being monitored Set up a monitor call to the selected extension If a call is being monitored Shows the details for the monitored call Off Hook handset If speaker is ON turn speaker OFF move audio to handset and keep focus on current screen If headset is active move audio to handset and keep focus on current screen Speaker key On Hook handset behavior If speaker is ON turn speaker OFF and keep focus on current screen Off Hook handset behavior If speaker is OFF turn Speaker ON and keep focus on current screen If speaker is ON activate handset and keep focus on current screen Headset active behavior Turn Speaker ON and keep focus on current screen If you press the Monitor soft key on a call that you are already monitoring a Monitor screen appears 10 233 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 siccoronse Figure 10 22 Monitor detail Monitor 3000 Agent No 1 DT730DG Extension 3000 Connected To No 5 DT730 old Phone 3004 Record This screen handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Record Toggles call recording If not currently recording starts recording If currently recording stops recording e Barge record Audio
221. ey and cursor pad to enter a different number than is shown on the LCD If you are dialing an external number and the outside access code is not programmed into the Personal Directory entry you may need to add the outside access code to the number before it is dialed depending on the configuration of your system Dial the number from the Personal Directory Delete The phone dials the telephone number Note To change the dialing preferences for dialing numbers from the Personal Directory see To edit the Dial Preference on page 4 77 ADDING OR EDITING A PERSONAL DIRECTORY ENTRY Once a Personal Directory Entry is selected the Personal Directory Entry menu may be used to delete edit or dial the entry You can also add information from the Call History to the personal directory For more information on adding Call History entries to the Personal Directory Add Call History Information to the Personal Directory on page 11 262 11 277 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Duplicate Entries in the Personal Directory Entries are uniquely defined by the combination of number and name For the purpose of uniquely defining an entry the name is case insensitive Multiple entries with the same number and different names are allowed and multiple entries with the same name and different numbers are allowed Multiple entries with the same name and same number are not allowed An error is displayed if yo
222. ey to return to the Call History menu or press the Exit key to return to the main phone screen DT700 Phone User Guide 11 267 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Figure 11 32 Call Deleted Delete Missed Call The call has been deleted To delete Call History for all Missed Received or Placed Calls 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select Call History 3 Select Delete Figure 11 33 Delete Call History Information Call History Missed Calls Received Calls Placed Calls 4 Select either Delete Missed Calls Delete Received Calls or Delete Placed Calls Figure 11 34 Delete Call Options Delete Missed Calls Delete Received Calls Delete Placed Calls Delete All Calls The call information is deleted from the call history 5 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to return to the Call History menu or press the Exit key to return to the main phone screen Figure 11 35 Call History Deleted Delete Missed Calls Deleted All Missed Calls To delete all Call History information 1 Press the Menu key 11 268 DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES 2 Select Call History Figure 11 36 Call History Select 3 Select Delete Figure 11 37 Delete Calls Call History Missed Calls Received Calls Placed Calls Select 4 Select Delete All Calls Figure 11 38 Delete All Call Information Delete Call History Woe Delete Missed Calls
223. file name the file is specified in your phone configuration file but the file itself could not be downloaded from the boot server If you select this entry it will not be saved and your ringtone settings will not change DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Figure 4 17 Unavailable External Ringtone selection External Ringtone ame Ringtone 1 2 Ringtone 2 3 Ringtone 3 4 Ringtone 4 aie aa Cancel To enable an external headset Figure 4 18 Figure 4 19 5 DT700 Phone User Guide Note There is no connector for a headset on the DT 710 phones Connect the headset to the phone a Insert the headset cord plug into the HEADSET connector on the back of the phone until you hear a click b Thread the cord through the groove as shown in the figure below Headset Connection Phone YG KY J LRO F EN UN A Headset Cable Groove Press the Menu key on the phone Select User Settings Select Headset Select Headset E Edit Betore Dialing Clear Settings Select Enable Disable 4 67 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION og Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Figure 4 20 Headset Options 6 Figure 4 21 7 Select Enable Enable Headset Cancel Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to accept the setting You can also press the Cancel softkey to exit without making any changes
224. g Enhanced Programmable Keys TRUNK PRESENCE LEDS AND ICONS Table 9 4 Trunk Presence LEDs and Icons DESI Less Comments Icon State LED is not Trunk not Trunk not registered with the system n with the system lit is not in service Trunk channels available to make outside calls Busy All trunk channels are occupied To seize a trunk to place a call e When the Trunk Dial key LED is green sai the Trunk Dial key to indicate that the trunk is available press If the trunk is online and in service and there is an available line on the trunk the phone will allow you to dial a number to place a call If the trunk is not available the phone will not enter the dialing state You must wait for the trunk to become available or use another Trunk Dial key to access different trunk You can enter the number using the keypad Note Using a Speed Dial key or a Personal or Corporate directory to dial the number is not supported If you use a Speed Dial key or navigate to a Personal or Corporate directory entry it overrides Trunk dialing and the call is placed as a normal outbound call to the configured number DND KEY The DND key can be used to enable and disable Do Not Disturb on your phone If configured for your system it can also serve as an indicator of DND status on the system The key will reflect the DND status as set by the phone star codes or set using a supported client application
225. g key through the star codes or using a supported client application To set Forwarding for your phone 1 While the LED for the Forwarding key is not lit oy press the Forwarding key The Handset Forwarding page from the phone microbrowser is opened 2 Use the phone keypad and the microbrowser soft keys to configure the handset forwarding conditions for your phone To disable Forwarding for your phone 1 While the LED for the Forwarding key is red fe press the Forwarding key The Handset Call Forwarding page from the phone microbrowser is opened 2 Select Clear forwarding The phone clears your handset forwarding settings Note When Forwarding is disabled the DI 700 may continue to play the stutter dial tone if configured on your system depending on the state of Message Waiting Indicator MWI and Call Forwarding features DT700 Phone User Guide 9 211 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Using Enhanced Programmable Keys 9 212 DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Figure 10 1 The DT730G ITL 12CG and ITL 24CG phones support a color Microbrowser on the LCD screen that uses icons USING THE MICROBROWSER Note For more information on using the Barge Monitor or Hot Desking see the Supplemental Features Guide FEATURE KEY WITH THE MICROBROWSER The Feature key on the telephone is used to program Speed Dial Keys and access the Microbrowser on your pho
226. ge Directory key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Show the details for the highlighted menu item Directory key 4 way scroll UP key Move to previous menu item Volume UP Key DT700 Phone User Guide 10 237 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll DOWN key Move to next menu item Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Opens the Conference Bridge details page In the example above Conference Bridge 3 currently has a conference call in progress Conference Bridge 0 1 and 2 currently have no calls in progress Figure 10 27 Conference Bridge detail Conference Bridge 0 6000 4 Conference Bridge 3 6003 10 31 3002 SRV3C Support 00 09 3002 SRV3C Support This view is updated every 30 seconds No conference in progress This view is updated every 30 seconds Refresh Back meal Refresh Back The Conference Bridge detail automatically updates every 30 seconds The time each conference participant has been connected only updates when the page is refreshed that is the time does NOT update every second The Conference Bridge page handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Refresh the conference status information Exit Exit the microbrowser and return to the appropriate call status screen Join Dial the conference bridge address in the title bar and display the call status screen Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to t
227. gs for an entry in the Directory that also has an assigned Speed Dial the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown in the Directory Table 11 8 Monitor Presence Icons a eee Speed Dial Key Not Available No Monitoring Ringing SIP Net SIP Net Ringing 3C system Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use ey o Figure 11 93 Presence Icons in the Corporate Directory Directory Entries Celular 8184755669676 Home 618475551234 Lah 246 Available A Busy t D Search gt a a oe Lab 2 371 11 294 DT700 Phone User Guide PHONE TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Figure 12 1 2 Figure 12 2 Figure 12 3 DT700 Phone User Guide USING THE HELP KEY You can use the Help key to view information about the softkeys that are displayed on your phone Press the Help key Help key Help Press the softkey for which you want to see Help information Press a softkey for Additional Help Fri Movy 19 01 49 PM Press a Line or Soft Key for help HewCall You can use the T Up and vy Down softkeys or the 4 Up LY Down keys on the cursor pad to scroll through the help information if needed Delete softkey Help screen Fress the Delete Soft Key to delete the last 12 295 PHONE TROUBLESHOOTING 4 Press the Exit softkey to return to the previous screen Note Help screens may not be available for all the softkeys on your phone
228. he Menu key or cursor pad to access the Personal Directory 2 Use the cursor pad or the T Up and Down softkeys to scroll to scroll to the entry you want to dial 3 Doone of the following To dial the number directly e _ Lift the telephone handset or press the Speaker key or press Enter on the cursor pad The number will be dialed exactly as it is entered in the Personal Directory If you are dialing an outside number you may need to enter an outside access code before the call can be dialed successfully If you hear a fast busy signal after trying to dial the number directly you may need to edit the number before dialing so you can add the outside access code to the number To edit the number before dialing a Press the More softkey twice and then the Detail softkey 11 276 DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 11 56 Figure 11 57 Figure 11 58 DT700 Phone User Guide CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES The Personal Directory More and Detail softkeys Directory Entries Cellular 61645559876 Horne 8184755651232 Lab 346 Lab 2 371 4 Search Delete Petal f eii O O r b Press the Dial softkey or Enter on the cursor pad Edit Personal Directory Entry Marne Home Muriber o 15175551234 Speed Dial Mone Delete Edit c Edit the number as needed and press the OK softkey or press Enter on the cursor pad You can also use the Delete softk
229. he Personal Directory 2 Press the Search softkey Figure 11 52 Search softkey Directory Entries Horne 81647555 12354 Lah 346 Lah 2371 3 Use the telephone keypad to enter the appropriate characters to search the personal directory then press the Search softkey Figure 11 53 Search Menu Display Search For Abe 4 Delete Cancel Up to 24 characters may be entered for the name e Press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen e To switch between first letter uppercase all uppercase all lowercase and numbers for keypad entry press the key on the keypad e To add a space to an entry press e To enter special characters press the key For a list of special characters see Speed Dial and Personal Directory Character Sets in the DT700 Phone User Guide e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys 4 The search results are displayed DT700 Phone User Guide 11 275 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES Figure 11 54 Directory Entry Results Menu Display Directory Entries Lab 346 Lab 2 371 i Delete gt i If no matches are found in the Personal Directory then Name not found is displayed Figure 11 55 Directory Entry Not Found DIALING FROM THE PERSONAL DIRECTORY To dial a number from the Personal Directory 1 Press t
230. he Speed Dial Key Press the Exit softkey 8 133 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Figure 8 27 Figure 8 28 Exit softkey Speed Dial Key Entry Lab Nurniber S26 Speed Dial z Monitor Yisyal Do one of the following e To return to the main phone screen without making any changes to the entry press the Exit softkey or the Feature Key e To view the information for another Speed Dial key press that Speed Dial key If the key is not programmed as a Speed Dial Key you will be prompted to program the Speed Dial Key Exit softkey Press soft key or wait to load page SPEED DIAL KEY OPERATION When you press a Speed Dial Key the number configured for that Speed Dial Key is dialed If you need to edit the number before dialing you can use the Dial softkey to allow edit the number before dialing if you have Edit Before Dialing Enabled on the phone This allows you to add a prefix to the number such as an outside service or access code before dialing To originate a call from Speed Dial Keys 8 134 Using the handset Lift the handset and press the desired Speed Dial Key Or Press the Feature Key then press the Speed Dial Key to view the Speed Dial details then lift the handset Using the speaker Press the Speaker Key then press desired Speed Dial Key Or Press the Feature Key then press the Speed Dial Key to view the Speed Dial details then press the Speaker Key DT70
231. he cursor pad are also used as cursor movement keys on the Menu screen O Down 5 Left 2 26 4 3 1 Used to adjust various volume levels e Handset Speaker and Headset volume Press UP or DOWN key during conversa tion e Ring Volume Press UP or DOWN while on hook e Soft Ring Volume Press UP or DOWN key while Soft Ring is playing Pressing this key redials the last number dialed Pressing this key opens the Personal Directory menu When in the menu screens go to the screen corresponding to the highlighted menu item Move the highlighted area one line up the screen Move the highlighted area one line down the screen Go back to the previous screen DT700 Phone User Guide INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700O AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones D Right Go to the screen which corresponds to the highlighted menu item Enter Go to the screen which corresponds to the Cy highlighted menu item ICON DISPLAY The LCD on the phone displays icons that provide notification for events such as missed calls and voice mail The icons appear in the topmost display line known as the title bar The title bar is configurable as either white icons and text on a black background or black icons and text on a white background The default is black icons and text on a white background Figure 2 12 DT730 and DT730G Black and White Icon Display 2 Tue Jan 25 10 31 AM NEC Z Mon
232. he following events Soft Key Features Explanation Return to the microbrowser Home page OK Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the microbrowser Home page Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key No operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key No operation Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key No operation Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen DT700 Phone User Guide 9 179 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 sicrcoronse 9 180 HOT DESKING STATUS UPDATES Note Depending on the speed of your system and the processes that are running and updating on your system it may take up to 5 minutes before your name and number are displayed on the phone after you log in to the phone The phone s main display will automatically refresh when it receives the name and number information You will be able to make and receive calls immediately after a successful login even if the phone does not display your name and number yet You can log out using a star code you can log in at another phone on the system or the system may automatically log you out after a configured period of time HANDSET FORWARDING Note Conditional handset forwarding requirements set from the phoneset apply to address based users only 72 73 Handset Forwarding and Handset Forwarding options from the p
233. he previous screen Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Dial the conference bridge address in the title bar and Directory key display the call status screen 4 way scroll UP key Remain on existing screen and move cursor up Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Remain on existing screen and move cursor down Volume DOWN Key 10 238 DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Hard Key Features Explanation ENTER key Dial the conference bridge address in the title bar and display the call status screen Off Hook handset If speaker is ON turn speaker OFF move audio to handset and keep focus on current screen If headset is active move audio to handset and keep focus on current screen Speaker key On Hook If speaker is ON turn speaker OFF and keep focus on handset current screen behavior Off Hook If speaker is OFF turn Speaker ON and keep focus on handset current screen If speaker is ON activate handset and behavior keep focus on current screen Headset active Turn Speaker ON and keep focus on current screen behavior Each conference entry shows the time the conference participant has been connected e g 00 04 the participant s address e g 1006 DT730DG_2 and the participant s name Last First This page automatically updates every 30 seconds The time each conference participant has been connected only updates when the page is r
234. he programmable mode on your phone or go to the Microbrowser on your phone After you press the Feature key press the Program soft key to enter your phone s programmable mode or press the Home soft key to go to the Microbrowser home page Figure 9 2 Feature key splash screen Press the Home softkey to open the Microbrowser s home page DT700 Phone User Guide 9 173 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 sicrcoronse lf you don t press a softkey within 2 seconds the Microbrowser will automatically open Hot Desking Login Handset Forwarding A Start Recording Call Cl Supervise a Call View System Call History e List Conferences Search Directory You can still answer incoming calls while you are using the Microbrowser using the telephone handset or by pressing the Speaker or Answer key on your telephone Your phone will exit the Microbrowser when you answer the call or press the Line Key to view the caller information To exit the Microbrowser press the Exit key on your phoneset To return to the Microbrowser s home page press the Home softkey HOME PAGE The home URL displays the Microbrowser Home page To view the Microbrowser Home page 1 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 9 174 Press the Feature key Press the Home softkey Home softkey Press soft key or wait to load page The Microbrowser home page opens Microbrowser home page 4 Hot Desking Login Handset Forwa
235. headset The range is 0 no tone to 19 maximum tone volume The default is 19 Upon entering this screen the keypad is locked in numeric entry mode You cannot change the keypad entry mode in this screen Press the Menu key Select User Settings Select Headset Select Headset options E Edit Before Dialing Clear Settings eot a E oF e Pens Select Tone Volumes 4 69 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION og Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Figure 4 26 Tone Volumes options Enable Disable Ringing 5 Select Call Waiting Volume Figure 4 27 Call Waiting volume 6 To change the volume level press the Delete softkey and use the telephone keypad to enter new volume level Figure 4 28 Adjust Call Waiting Volume 7 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to accept the setting You can also press the Cancel softkey to exit without making any changes Note The setting defaults to 19 maximum tone volume To set the Hold Reminder volume The Hold Reminder Volume settings allow you to specify the hold reminder volume for the headset The range is O no tone to 19 maximum tone volume The default is 19 Upon entering this screen the keypad is locked in numeric entry mode You cannot change the keypad entry mode in this screen 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select User Settings 3 Select Headset 4 70 DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 4 29 4 Figure 4 30 5 Figure 4 31 Figure
236. hone is idle and the Park Extension LED is flashing do one of the following e To place a hands free or headset call Press the Park Extension key then use your headset or the phone s speaker to continue the call on your phone e To use your phone handset for the call Pick up your phone handset then press the Park Extension key to pick up the call from that address CALL BACK KEY A Call Back key is used to set call back for the last dialed number For other users where you can monitor presence the key is also set with presence monitoring information Using the Call Back Key e Press the Call Back key to set call back to the last dialed number If the number can be monitored for presence the key will show presence information for the number The key stays configured for call back to that number until the number is dialed or call back is manually cleared If you attempt to place a new call to another number and then want to set call back for that number you must reset the Call Back key Figure 9 38 ITL 8LD Secondary Screen Call Back set eRecepcao Park Extension amp CallBack 6010 amp Record 6001 amp Hot Desk To reset the number for a Call Back key If you already have a Call Back key configured with a number and want to change the number that the key is programmed for you must reset the key 1 Press the configured Call Back key 2 Press the CB Reset soft key Figure 9 39 CB Reset soft key CallBack Options
237. hone works while using the handset but not your headset replace the headset you have attached to the phone Press the Menu key then go to 6 Status Network Information and verify that the phone has an IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and DNS Server listed If any of this information is missing there may be a problem with your connection to the network Contact your system administrator Restart the phone a Press the Menu key b Select 5 Reboot c Press the OK softkey or Enter key on the cursor pad to restart the phone Note If you cannot restart the phone using the Menus unplug the phone from power and the network for ten seconds then reconnect the telephone to your network and power to perform a restart If you are still having problems with your phone contact your system administrator The phone cannot make any external calls 12 300 1 In your network requires and outside access code to reach an outside telephone line make sure you enter that as the first number when you are dialing an outside line Verify that your network is not having problems accessing outside telephone service Contact your system administrator to verify that your account is authorized to call external numbers Press the Menu key then go to 6 Status Network Information and verify that the phone has an IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and DNS Server listed If any of this information is missing there may be a proble
238. honeset are not supported for User Centric enabled users User Centric enabled users must use supported 3C system client applications to set forwarding conditions The Handset Call Forwarding pages allow you to set change and delete handset call forwarding conditions for your phoneset rather than using only 3C System Star Codes or requiring 3C system client applications to access advanced call forwarding settings HANDSET CALL FORWARDING SETTINGS ON THE 3C SYSTEM Note Handset Forwarding settings for the 3C system are not mutually exclusive and can be added cumulatively You can select a forwarding setting and enter any phone number internal or external for the condition and then activate the new setting Handset forwarding can be set either using the phone s microbrowser application or using 3C System Star Codes Handset Forwarding conditions are persistent until cleared by the user using the phoneset star codes or changed by supported 3C system client applications or a system administrator using the 3C administrator Forwarding conditions that are set using the handset are denoted in the phone and 3C Administrator application by a destination description of entered at handset The handset forwarding conditions are shown in every forwarding profile for the user Changing or deleting a handset forwarding condition in one forwarding profile will also update the view in all other profiles If the primary address of the phone h
239. ickup A 310 ITL 2E A 310 softkey 2 34 A 310 Pickup Group A 312 Pickup Zone A 311 Placed Calls 11 260 add to Personal Directory 11 262 delete 11 268 dialing 11 261 Placing Calls 7 104 power supply AC adapter 3 47 12 298 E 344 IEEE802 3af 3 47 E 345 presence monitoring Personal Directory 8 138 8 143 8 147 8 152 8 162 11 264 11 273 11 280 11 287 11 294 Speed Dial Keys 8 130 8 148 8 152 8 163 11 265 11 281 11 287 Product Disposal Information E 349 to E 355 Programmable Key DESI Less Display ITL 8LD 5 92 Programmable Key Module 8 126 Programmable Keys 8 124 to 8 172 configure Speed Dial with Personal Directory entry 8 141 8 145 Speed Dial without Personal Direc Index tory entry 8 136 star hash code 8 155 ITL 2E 2 25 8 124 ITL 6DE 2 23 8 124 ITL 12CG 2 9 8 125 ITL 12D 2 19 8 124 ITL 12DG 2 13 8 125 ITL 24CG 2 7 ITL 24D 2 17 8 124 ITL 24DG 2 11 ITL 32D 2 15 2 16 8 124 optional programmable key module 8 126 R reboot 4 82 12 296 Recall key ITL 2E 2 25 ITL 6DE 2 23 ITL 12CG 2 9 ITL 12D 2 19 ITL 12DG 2 13 ITL 24CG 2 7 ITL 24D 2 17 ITL 24DG 2 11 ITL 32D 2 15 ITL 8LD 2 21 Received Calls 11 259 add to Personal Directory 11 262 delete 11 268 dialing 11 261 viewing 11 259 Redial 7 107 Redial Key 2 26 Cursor Pad 7 107 ITL 2E 2 25 7 107 Registered icon 2 28 Reject softkey 2 35 7 103 restart 4 82 12 296 resume Call 7 107 Resume softkey 2 34 7 107 resume conference call 7 113 ring
240. ific station giving the user the ability to return to that station to retrieve the call Note The user must select a new line or park zone on which to park the call DT700 Phone User Guide 3C SYSTEM FEATURES Analog SIP Star Code Explanation Star Code Do Not Disturb Activates Do Not Disturb for all calls bound to this Activation extension When Do Not Disturb is activated the station is not alerted to any calls Forwarding and or Coverage behaves as usual Note A triple tone confirms activation of DND on analog phones A single ring tone confirms activation of DND on SIP phones Note Supported SIP phones may play an audible indication that this star code is active Depending on the system configuration this indication remains active until the star code is deactivated Do Not Disturb De activates Do Not Disturb for all calls to this extension Note A triple tone confirms deactivation of DND on analog phones A single ring tone confirms deactivation of DND on SIP phones Drop Last Call FLASH 71 Drops the last active call before the FLASH 77 Note Can t be used to operation drop a conference party If used during a conference call the last caller who because three party was added to the conference is dropped from that conferences are not conference call std ale aa Note A confirmation tone will sound after applying oe call ap this star code command Note Only available with specific phones Ask your za
241. iginal call Hold key To place a second call Concurrent call Figure 7 27 Figure 7 28 7 110 If it is enabled by your system administrator you can place a new call while you are on another call They will be treated as two separate phone calls and you cannot conference the calls or transfer one call to the other call For information on conferencing two calls see Conferencing Calls on page 7 111 Press the Hold key to place the current call on hold then press the NewCall softkey to get dial tone Hold key Call on Hold and NewCall softkey Thu Apr 22 11 49 AM Wroblewski Victoria 646 EndCall Resume Conference Newall Enter the phone number you want to call DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 7 29 5 Figure 7 30 BASIC PHONE OPERATION Call Transferring and Conferencing Enter number for second call I Thu Apr 22 1216 PM Enter Number Volcerail Endicall Press the Dial softkey to initiate the call or wait a few seconds for the call to be automatically dialed The call proceeds to the dialed party When you have completed the call press the EndCall softkey or press the switch hook to end the call and return to your original call Press the Hold key or the Resume softkey to resume the original call Hold key CONCURRENT CALL SHUTTLE To switch between calls Figure 7 31 DT700 Phone User Guide Using the Shuttle softkey you can switch between two concurrent calls Pre
242. igned to a Speed Dial Key You can delete just the Speed Dial entry or the entire Speed Dial and Personal Directory entry Speed Dials associated with Personal Directory Entries e Delete just the Speed Dial information from a Personal Directory entry e Delete the entire Speed Dial and Personal Directory entry Speed Dials that are not associated with Personal Directory entries e Delete the Speed Dial entry If you are unsure if a Speed Dial is associated with a Personal Directory entry check the Personal Directory for the entry information If you do not find the Speed Dial entry information in the Personal Directory that Speed Dial is not associated with a Personal Directory entry To delete the Speed Dial information ONLY from a Personal Directory Entry For Personal Directory entries that have an assigned Speed Dial you can delete the Speed Dial parameter for the entry using the Feature Key and keep the rest of the entry in the Personal Directory 8 166 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Note Pressing the Delete softkey in the Speed Dial Key Entry screen will delete the entire Speed Dial and Personal Directory entry Do not use the Delete softkey in the Speed Dial Key Entry screen if you want to keep the Personal Directory entry information for a Speed Dial 1 Enter the programmable mode for your phone The Feature key LED lights a steady red Figure 8 102 Feature Key cD Note Fo
243. inal connection to a system supporting the 3C system or SIP Net from NEC is recommended For an overview of the supported features refer to the detailed documentation that comes with the system and this terminal contact your local NEC representative or the support desk of NEC Unified Solutions IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION This terminal can be powered by means of an external AC DC adapter or by means of an IEEE802 3af compatible power source that allows powering of the terminal via the same cable that connects the terminal to the wired local area network USE OF AN EXTERNAL AC ADAPTER Only use the AC adapter that comes with this terminal Plug the AC DC adapter in a wall outlet socket It is recommended that the AC DC adapter is located near the equipment for easy access removal of the adapter E 344 DT700 Phone User Guide Table E 1 Table E 2 Table E 3 DT700 Phone User Guide NOTICES Use of an IEEE802 3af power supply After power has been applied the terminal will start operating USE OF AN IEEE802 3AF POWER SUPPLY This terminal is compliant with IEEE 802 3af Class 1 If the Local Area Network supports powering of the terminal by means of the IEEE802 3af standard an external AC DC adapter is not needed In this case it is sufficient to connect the terminal to the 10 100 Base T wall socket by means of the cable that comes with the product After network power has been applied the terminal will start operating
244. ing e To place a hands free or headset call Press the key for the workgroup member then use your headset or the phone s speaker to continue the call on your phone e To use your phone handset for the call Pick up your phone handset then press the key for the workgroup member to pick up the call To transfer a call to a member of your workgroup e While you are connected to a call press the key for the workgroup member to transfer your call to that workgroup member Your current call is placed on hold and the phone attempts the transfer If you have multiple calls on hold the phone will transfer the call that is currently in focus Note The default type of transfer blind or consult for this key is controlled by your system administrator To pickup a held call from a member of your workgroup When another user has a call on hold you will see a red flashing LED for that user DT700 Phone User Guide 9 201 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Using Enhanced Programmable Keys While your phone is idle and the other workgroup member s phone has a held call do one of the following e To place a hands free or headset call Press the key for the workgroup member then use your headset or the phone s speaker to continue the call on your phone e To use your phone handset for the call Pick up your phone handset then press the key for the workgroup member to pick up the call from that address MULTI PRES
245. ing Handset Forwarding Forward immediately Forward when pusy Forward after 30 seconds Clear forwarding To set busy forwarding Busy forwarding will forward calls to the destination number when your phone is busy there is a call in progress Figure 9 13 Busy forwarding Handset Forwarding Forward immediately Forward when BUSY Forward after 30 seconds Clear forwarding 9 182 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser To set forwarding after 30 seconds Forwarding after 30 seconds will forward the call only after it has rung on your phoneset for 30 seconds Figure 9 14 Forwarding after 30 seconds Handset Forwarding Forward immediately Forward when pusy Forward after 30 seconds Clear forwarding Exit Select Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the microbrowser Home page Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Select the highlighted item and proceed to the settings Directory key screen to enter phone number s if applicable 4 way scroll UP key Remain on existing screen move cursor up Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Remain on existing screen move cursor down Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Select the highlighted item and proceed to the settings screen to enter phone number s if applicable 5 Use the phoneset keypad and the microbrowser pages to set the desired forwarding number s and press the OK soft key
246. ing icon based on the call state SEND TO VM KEY While your phone is ringing press the Send to VM key The call will be sent directly to your voice mail box and the phone will stop ringing 9 207 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Using Enhanced Programmable Keys HOT DESK KEY To log in to a Hot Desk session 1 Press the Hot Desk key to open the Hot Desk login screen 2 Enter your user name and password and press the OK soft key to log on to the phone The following screen is shown Figure 9 43 Hot Desking login successful Hot Desking Login Login successful 3 Press the OK to exit the screen The LED on the Hot Desk key turns off when you exit this screen Note Due to system polling it may take up to 5 minutes before your name and extension are shown on the phone after you log in To log out of your Hot Desk session 1 While you are in a Hot Desk session press the Hot Desk Key You are logged out off the phone and the following screen is shown Figure 9 44 Hot Desking logout successful Hot Desking Logout ou have been logged out successfully 2 Press OK to exit the screen The LED on the Hot Desk key turns off when you exit this screen TRUNK DIAL KEY The Trunk Dial key is used to monitor the availability of trunks on your system and to place calls using specified trunks on the system 9 208 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Usin
247. ing tones 7 103 Ringing Incoming icon 2 28 Ringing Outgoing icon 2 28 S Save softkey 2 35 Scroll Key 5 93 search the Personal Directory 11 275 Select softkey 2 35 Setup with Menu key and Cursor Pad 4 64 DT700 Phone User Guide shuttle concurrent calls 7 111 conference call 7 114 transfer 7 117 Shuttle softkey 7 115 SIP Information 4 83 SIP Net B 319 Do Not Disturb DND B 319 Prefixes B 320 Programmable Keys Speed Dial keys B 319 soft ring 8 138 8 143 8 147 8 152 8 162 11 264 11 280 11 287 Conf softkey ITL 6DE 7 112 Softkeys ITL 6DE 2 23 ITL 12CG 2 8 ITL 12D 2 19 ITL 12DG 2 12 ITL 24CG 2 6 ITL 24D 2 17 ITL 24DG 2 10 ITL 32D 2 15 ITL 8LD 2 21 softkeys 2 33 to 2 36 space character 8 137 8 142 8 146 8 156 8 160 11 263 11 275 11 278 11 285 speaker volume call 4 64 Speaker key ITL 2E 2 25 ITL 6DE 2 24 ITL 12CG 2 9 ITL 12D 2 20 ITL 12DG 2 13 ITL 24CG 2 7 ITL 24D 2 18 ITL 24DG 2 11 ITL 32D 2 16 ITL 8LD 2 22 special characters 8 137 8 142 8 146 8 156 8 161 11 263 11 275 11 279 11 285 Speed Dial Key configure 8 127 to 8 172 ITL 2E 8 128 Speed Dial with Personal Directory entry 8 141 8 145 8 150 Speed Dial without Personal Direc tory entry 8 136 star nash code 8 155 delete 8 166 Speed Dial and Personal Directory Entry 8 169 Speed Dial information from a Per DT700 Phone User Guide sonal Directory entry 8 166 Speed Dial Only entry 8 170 duplicate entries 8 131 ed
248. ion Return to the microbrowser home page OK Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen 10 229 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 siccorouse 10 230 Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the Home page Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key No operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key No operation Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key No operation Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen STOP RECORDING CALL selecting the Stop Recording Call item invokes the Stop Recording page This screen handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Return to the microbrowser home page OK Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the Home page Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key No operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key No operation Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key No operation Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen SUPERVISE A CALL SUPERVISE A CALL BARGE MONITOR The 3C system allows users to be granted rights to supervise an address group If a user has supervisor rights they can monitor or barge into a call in progress on any address in the group DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMM
249. ipment Technologies NET and are an wholly owned subsidiary of NET Other products mentioned in this document are the property of their respective owners and are also subject to copyright trademark and intellectual property protection as applicable by law NEC Enterprise Communication Technologies Inc is a wholly owned subsidiary of NEC Corporation Japan All Rights Reserved Sphere Sphericall Sphericall Voice Mail Sphericall Desktop PhoneHub COHub BranchHub and MeetingHub are trademarks of NEC Corporation UNIVERGE 3C documentation and UNIVERGE 3C System Requirements applies to the standard installation configuration administration and maintenance of the 3C system except where superseded by instructions in DoD Certified Session Controller DoD SC environments Certification by the Joint Interoperability Test Command JITC for the US Department of Defense DoD and LSC Local Session Controller certification requires the installation and configuration of additional 3C system security and operational features using the Required Installation Checklist included in the UNIVERGE 3C JITC Deployment Manual If a system is rebuilt or upgraded for any reason the system must again be modified to meet the configuration settings as documented in the Required Installation Checklist U S Patent Numbers 5 892 764 and 6 735 208 and related Foreign Patents Australian Patent Number WO07 095418 Other U S and Foreign Patents Pending iv P N
250. ir supported Key Kit types and Internal Key Module configurations Table 2 17 Supported Key Kit types Supported Internal Key Modules Model Name Commercial Name Key Kit Type Factory Installed Upgrade Part Options DT700 Phone User Guide 2 37 INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES Supported Internal Key Modules Model Name Commercial Name Key Kit Type Factory Installed Upgrade Part Options OPTIONAL PROGRAMMABLE KEY MODULE Additional Programmable Keys may also be added by installing the optional Programmable Key Module ITL 32D phones come with the 8LK L already attached The following table lists the Programmable Key Modules that are supported by the DT700 series of phones el E DT710 8LK L Key Numbering Key numbering for the 8LK L module always uses key numbers 25 through 32 no matter how many keys are on the original phone If the 8LK L module is installed on a ITL 12D phone there is a gap in the numbering of the Speed Dial keys key numbers 2 to 12 on the phone key numbers 25 to 32 on the 8LK L module GIGABIT ETHERNET ADAPTER All DT710 and DT730 phones support an optional GBA L Gigabit Ethernet adapter that cradles the DT700 and features two Gigabit ports and one 10 Mbps 100 Mbps port The DT700 s Ethernet port connects to the GBA L s 10 Mbps 100 Mbps port DT 730G CG and DG modules do not support the GBA L Gigabit Ethernet adapter 2 38 DT700 Phone User Guide Table 2 18 DT700 Phone User
251. is key to place a call on hold Press this key to transfer a call Controls the built in soeaker which can be used for Hands Free dialing and conversations The LED on this key lights when the speaker is active Use this key to navigate to various features The up and down keys on the cursor pad can be used to adjust the volume of the phone This port located behind the Color LCD screen can be used to charge USB devices INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES Po o DT700 and DT730G Series Phones Figure 2 3 Table 2 6 ITL 24DG DT730G SERIES PHONE LAYOUT AND PARTS ITL 24DG DT730G Series 3 16 4 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ITL 24DG DT730G Series Keys and Parts 1 Call Indicator Lamp The Call Indicator Lamp at top corner of the display flashes when a Call is offered to the phone Also if you have Voice Mail service the Lamp lights steadily when a message has been left 2 LCD The LCD Liquid Crystal Display provides call status activity information plus date time and softkey operation 3 Exit key This key allows you to exit from the Menu or Help mode and go back to the telephone main screen 4 Softkeys The softkeys show the available features for your current activity Any feature shown at the bottom of the LCD is available The appropriate key is displayed on the screen according to the call handling process DT700 Phone User Guide 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DT700 Pho
252. is no audio to my headset 1 Verify that the headset is firmly plugged into the HEADSET jack on the back of the telephone Figure 12 25 Headset Connection Phone Groove 2 Make sure the handset for your telephone is on hook 3 Make sure the headset is enabled You should see the Headset icon on the LCD when you dial or answer a Call if the headset is enabled Figure 12 26 Headset icon and Headset softkey w3 Thu Apr 22 1155 AM TE Wroblewski victoria t646 Conference Endall 4 If you do not see a Headset softkey verify that the Headset is enabled for your phone a Press the Menu key b Select User Settings c Select Headset d Select Enable Disable e Select Enable and press the OK softkey or Enter key on the cursor pad 5 Try the telephone handset to verify if the problem is with the headset If you can hear audio through the telephone handset try another known working headset with the phone 6 If you are still having problems with your phone contact your system administrator Audio quality If you are having issues with the audio quality on your phone there may be a problem with your connection to the network Contact your system administrator 12 308 DT700 Phone User Guide 3C SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 DT700 Phone User Guide UNIVERGE 3C PRODUCT NAME USAGE IN THIS MANUAL This manual is part of the core documentation used to install configure or maintain the UNIVERGE 3C system All ac
253. is not No Handset Forwarding settings are enabled on the phone lit Immediate Handset Forwarding is enabled While your phone is set to Immediate Handset Forwarding your phone will also play a stutter dial tone Note Handset Forwarding may have been enabled through the Forwarding key through the star codes or using a supported client application Busy Handset Forwarding is enabled Note Handset Forwarding may have been enabled through the Forwarding key through the star codes or using a supported client application No Answer Handset Forwarding is enabled Note Handset Forwarding may have been enabled through the Forwarding key through the star codes or using a supported client application To set Forwarding for your phone 1 While the LED for the Forwarding key is not lit ef press the Forwarding key The Handset Forwarding page from the phone microbrowser is opened 2 Use the phone keypad and the microbrowser soft keys to configure the handset forwarding conditions for your phone To disable Forwarding for your phone 1 While the LED for the Forwarding key is red fe press the Forwarding key The Handset Call Forwarding page from the phone microbrowser is opened 2 Select Clear forwarding The phone clears your handset forwarding settings Note When Forwarding is disabled the DT700 may continue to play the stutter dial tone if configured on your system depending on the state of Message Waiting Indicator MWI
254. it 8 159 ITL 2E 8 124 ITL 6DE 8 124 ITL 12CG 8 125 ITL 12D 8 124 ITL 12DG 8 125 ITL 24D 8 124 ITL 32D 8 124 Numbering ITL 6DE 8 129 ITL 12D 8 129 ITL 24D 8 129 ITL 8LD 5 94 8 129 8 130 Operation 8 134 viewing 8 133 split conference call 7 113 transferred call 7 118 Split softkey 7 114 Star Code Commands 3C System A 313 Supported Key Kit types 2 37 T Telephone set star codes A 313 Terminal Information 4 83 Tilt Leg 3 43 lower 3 44 raise 3 43 remove 3 44 Time Format 4 72 4 73 timeout backlight 4 75 Transfer icon 2 29 transfer attended 7 115 blind 7 116 shuttle 7 117 split 7 118 unattended 7 117 Transfer key ITL 2E 2 25 ITL 6DE 2 23 ITL 12CG 2 9 ITL 12D 2 19 ITL 12DG 2 13 ITL 24CG 2 7 ITL 24D 2 17 ITL 24DG 2 11 ITL 32D 2 15 ITL 8LD 2 21 Transfer ringing icon 2 29 Transfer shuttle Primary icon 2 29 Index INDEX Transfer shuttle Secondary icon 2 29 Transferring Calls 7 115 to 7 118 Troubleshooting 12 295 to 12 308 AC DC adapter 12 298 basic 12 296 calling 12 299 calls 12 300 characters 12 303 Dial Preference 12 301 dial tone 12 299 display name 12 307 external calls 12 300 Hold 12 302 Jabra Headset Support D 339 language 12 306 LCD Screen 12 305 local configuration 12 298 network cable 12 297 network connection 12 297 Personal Directory 12 301 phone keypad 12 303 power 12 299 ringing 12 302 settings change 12 298 softkey 12 304 Speed Dial 12 301 Using the Help key 12 295 U
255. ithin 2 seconds the Microbrowser will automatically open DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 8 23 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys After you press the Program softkey you will see a help screen Programmable Key Help screen You can still answer incoming calls while your phone is in the programmable mode using the telephone handset or by pressing the Speaker or Answer key on your telephone You phone will exit the programmable mode when you answer the call or press the Line Key to view the caller information To exit the programmable mode press the Exit softkey To view Speed Dial Key information for Programmed Speed Dial Keys 1 Figure 8 24 2 Figure 8 25 Figure 8 26 DT700 Phone User Guide Enter the programmable mode for your phone The Feature key LED lights a steady red Feature Key Note For information on how to enter the programmable mode for your phone see Using the Feature Key on page 9 382 Press the programmable key that you want to view The programmable key LED flashes Programmable Key LED fa Ga If the Speed Dial Key has been programmed the information displays including the name for the Speed Dial the number and any monitor settings for the Speed Dial Programmed Speed Dial display Speed Dial Key Entry Lah Nurniber S26 Speed Chal iF Monitor visual Delete If the key is not programmed as a Speed Dial Key you will be prompted to program t
256. ivileges Select Address Group ser does not have supervise rights on an address group 9 187 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 sicrcoronse e If you have Supervise privileges the Supervise page from the web server is shown listing the address groups available to the user Figure 9 19 Supervise a call Select Address Group FeO Sales The Select Address Group page handles the following events a Return to the Call Control screen Select the highlighted menu item Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the Home page Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Opens the Address Group detail screen Directory key If you do not have Supervise privileges no operation Volume UP Key Move to previous menu item 4 way scroll UP key If you do not have Supervise privileges no operation 4 way scroll DOWN key Move to next menu item Volume DOWN Key If you do not have Supervise privileges no operation ENTER key Opens the Address Group Detail screen If you do not have Supervise privileges return to the appropriate call control screen After you select a group a screen appears listing the active calls from that group 9 188 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Figure 9 20 Group detail screen This screen handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Move to previous menu item does no
257. just the volume Figure 4 5 Adjust Handset ringing volume 2 Tue May 4 09 26 AM Yictoria J vvroblewski To adjust the Soft Ring volume SIP Net Platforms e Press the l Up Y Down key on the Cursor pad while Soft Ring is active You must press the 4 Up LY Down key multiple times and cannot press and hold to adjust the volume 4 62 DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION Basic Setup with the Cursor Pad or Up Down Keys Figure 4 6 Adjust Soft Ring volume 2 Tue May 4 09 26 AM Yictoria J Wroblewski To adjust the headset ringing volume e Press the l Up Y Down key on the Cursor pad while on hook You must press the 4 Up LY Down key multiple times and cannot press and hold to adjust the volume Figure 4 7 Adjust Headset ringing volume 258 Tue Aug 24 03 18 PM 14 Wroblewski victoria 6463 To adjust the call volume handset e Press the 4 Up LY Down key on the Cursor pad during call operation You must press the 4 Up LY Down key multiple times and cannot press and hold to adjust the volume Figure 4 8 Adjust Handset call volume IE Tue May 4 09 32 AM Wroblewski victoria 646 To adjust the call volume headset e Press the l Up Y Down key on the Cursor pad during call operation You must press the 4 Up LY Down key multiple times and cannot press and hold to adjust the volume DT700 Phone User Guide 4 63 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION og Basic
258. king any changes select Time options Time Format 1 12 Hour Cancel Note The setting that highlighted is the setting that is currently enabled To adjust the LCD contrast 1 2 3 Figure 4 39 4 Figure 4 40 4 74 Press the Menu key Select User Settings Select LCD Settings LCD settings LOD Settings E Edit Before Dialing Clear Settings Select Select LCD Contrast LCD Contrast settings LOD Settings LCD Contrast LCD Backlight Tirneout DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad 5 Use the and softkeys to adjust the LCD contrast Figure 4 41 Adjust LCD Contrast settings 6 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to accept the setting You can also press the Cancel softkey to exit without making any changes To change the LCD Backlight Timeout You can adjust the timeout of the LCD backlight on your phone You can specify a value between 0 None to 255 seconds 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select User Settings 3 Select 5 LCD Settings Figure 4 42 LCD settings LOD Settings E Edit Before Dialing Clear Settings PPE Y C Ext Select 4 Select 2 LCD Backlight Timeout Figure 4 43 LCD Backlight Timeout settings LOD Settings 5 The default backlight timeout in seconds for your system is shown To change the timeout press the Delete softkey and use the telephone keypad to enter new backlight
259. kta den lokala myndigheten for vidare instruktioner DT700 Phone User Guide E 355 NOTICES oog WEEE Product Disposal Information E 356 DT700 Phone User Guide INDEX Symbols gt gt gt More softkey 2 35 12 304 Numerics 3C System Star Code Commands A 313 3C System Call Pickup A 310 3C Voice mail A 312 8LK L 2 38 8 126 A AC DC adapter 3 47 12 298 E 344 Active Call 2 28 add Personal Directory entry 11 278 Speed Dial Key Speed Dial with Personal Directory entry 8 141 8 145 Speed Dial without Personal Direc tory entry 8 136 star nash code 8 155 Advanced phone operation 8 121 to 8 172 11 253 to 11 294 Alphabetic characters 4 85 Answer key ITL 2E 2 25 ITL 6DE 2 23 ITL 12CG 2 9 ITL 12D 2 19 ITL 12DG 2 13 ITL 24CG 2 7 ITL 24D 2 17 ITL 24DG 2 11 ITL 32D 2 15 ITL 8LD 2 21 Attended transfer 7 115 audio coding licenses E 344 B Backlight Timeout 4 75 Basic call operation 7 101 to 7 109 Blind transfer 7 116 Bluetooth Headset Support Connector Activation D 330 Button Panel remove 3 51 DT700 Phone User Guide C Call Conferencing icon 2 29 Call Conferencing Hold icon 2 29 Call Count icon 2 28 Call History 11 256 to 11 269 accessing 11 257 add to Personal Directory 11 262 Delete 11 267 Dialing 11 261 from Cursor pad 11 257 from Menu Key 11 257 Incoming Received Calls 11 259 Outgoing Placed Calls 11 260 troubleshooting 12 306 Call Indicator Lamp ITL 2E 2 25 ITL 6DE 2 23 ITL 12CG 2 8 ITL 1
260. l You can use the T Up and Down softkeys or the 4 Up Y Down keys on the cursor pad to scroll through the help information if needed Delete softkey Help screen Press the Exit softkey to return to the previous screen Note Help screens may not be available for all the softkeys on your phone OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT KEY MODULES AND KEY KITS The DT700 may be equipped with several different modules containing keys the Key Kit the Internal Key Module and the optional Programmable Key Module The figure below illustrates these modules DT700 Phone User Guide INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES Optional Equipment Figure 2 27 TL 24D Phone with Key Kit et LIJT Internal Key LL Module Programmable i 1 eys 8LK L yi Programmable f OOC Key Module fe 1 Reg f Fe cra A aK mm A s fi A M H 1 i Key Kit Keypad The Key Kit refers to the numeric keypad and other hard keys The Internal Key Module refers to the internally connected module that contains the line key and programmable keys The Internal Key Type displays the number of Programmable Keys the Internal Key Module is equipped to use Additional programmable keys may be added by upgrading the Internal Key Module The Internal Key screens are also used to configure the number of programmable keys when the Internal Key Module is upgraded The following table describes different phone models the
261. l number Unattended transfer An Unattended Transfer can be done when you want to verify that the dialed extension rings or if you want to do a blind transfer where you do not wait to see if the other caller answers the call but you did not use the Blind softkey If the other caller does not answer or rejects the call the call is routed to voice mail or according to forwarding conditions If there is no voice mail or forwarding conditions set for the line you transfer to the call will continue to ring 1 While on a call press the Transfer key Figure 7 47 Transfer Key C This puts the current call on hold so you can start to transfer the call 2 Use the key pad to dial the telephone number to which the call is to be transferred Figure 7 48 Transfer Call D Thu Apr 22 1255 PM aj End all 3 Press the Transfer key or hang up the telephone handset You will be disconnected from both calls TRANSFER SHUTTLE If you are doing an attended transfer and you are connected to both parties you can shuttle between the two calls before you transfer the calling party to the other party To shuttle between calls during an Attended Transfer 1 While connected to both parties press the Shuttle softkey DT700 Phone User Guide 7 117 BASIC PHONE OPERATION al Call Transferring and Conferencing Figure 7 49 Transfer Shuttle ie Thu Apr 22 1250 PM Wroblewski Victoria 646 i Shuttle j Conference Enca O You
262. l reset the values on the phone to use the default values as specified by DHCP or in the configuration files on the network e Perform a Data Clear of the Terminal Data on the phone to restore the administrative settings on your phone For information on doing a Data Clear of the Terminal Data see the DT700 Administrator Guide Note A Data Clear of the Terminal data resets ALL administrative settings but does not delete any Personal Directory or Speed Dial information that the user has entered on their phone cannot connect to the network through the PC port on the back of the phone 1 Verify that your phone is connected to the network and working properly If there are problems with the connection between your phone and the network any device that tries to connect through the phone will also have problems Contact your system administrator to resolve any network connection problems If your phone is connected to the network and working but you cannot connect a network device through the PC port on the back of the phone contact your system administrator The PC port connection on your phone may not be enabled or there may be problems with the device s network connection settings Your system administrator will need to check the settings for the phone My device connected to the PC Port lost its network connection 12 298 Any devices connected to the PC Port of the phone will momentarily disconnect from the network if the ph
263. l softkey to return to the previous screen e To switch between first letter uppercase all uppercase all lowercase and numbers for keypad entry press the key on the keypad e To add a space to an entry press e e To enter special characters press the L key For a list of special characters see Speed Dial and Personal Directory Character Sets in the DT700 Phone User Guide e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys Number Up to 24 characters may be entered for the number Only digits and may be entered DT700 Phone User Guide 11 263 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES 11 264 Table 11 1 e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys e You can also press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen Speed Dial Speed Dial entries can be internal or external numbers Note For more information on Speed Dial Keys see Speed Dial and Programmable Keys on page 8 124 The number of available Sped Dial Keys and their associated numbers depend on your model of DT700 phone For more information on the valid Speed Dial Keys for the specific phone models see Speed Dial Key Numbering on page 8 128 e You can also press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to
264. lettrici ed elettronici Con l intento di facilitare la raccolta differenziata ed il sano riciclo ambientale sono state predisposte apposite regole locali Nel caso in cui i vostri apparati elettrici ed elettronici debbano essere smaltiti fate riferimento al vostro fornitore o agli accordi contrattuali che la vostra azienda ha stipulato durante l acquisto di tali prodotti Sul sito www nec unified com weee potete trovare tutte le informazioni necessarie sulla raccolta differenziata ed il sano riciclo ambientale PER LE NAZIONI FUORI DALL UNIONE EUROPEA Disposizioni riguardanti materiale elettrico ed elettronico nelle nazioni al di fuori dell Unione Europea devono essere in accordo con le regole locali Nel caso in cui non siano stati presi accordi con il vostro fornitore potete contattare le autorit locali per maggiori informazioni INFORMATIE OVER AFVAL VAN PRODUCTEN NL VOOR LIDSTATEN VAN DE EUROPESE UNIE Het afgebeelde symbool is op uw product aangebracht om u te X informeren dat afval van elektrische en elektronische producten niet bij het huisvuil mag terechtkomen Elektrische en elektronische producten inclusief de aansluitkabels stekkers en accessoires moeten apart worden ingezameld zodat dit afval op een verantwoorde manier kan worden verwerkt Deze producten moeten worden ingeleverd bij speciale inzamelpunten waar milieu verantwoorde recycle technieken worden toegepast Aparte inzameling heeft grote voordelen waa
265. lid Speed Dial Keys for the specific phone models see Speed Dial Key Numbering in the DIT 700 Phone User Guide Select the monitor settings for this speed dial then press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Note Monitoring can only be done on other lines that are internal to your system You cannot monitor external or outside lines Monitor Settings Select Monitor Visual Ca Visual and Soft Ring Valid options for monitoring are e None Do not monitor presence state changes for this Speed Dial Key e Visual Presence state is shown visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory e Visual and Soft Ring Presence state is shown visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory When a call is ringing on the monitored terminal play a soft ring tone Note Option L Visual and Soft Ring is only valid for SIP Net platforms Contact your system administrator to determine if Soft Ring is available on your system If you have Visual Monitor Settings for an entry in the Directory that also has an assigned Speed Dial the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown in the Directory Monitor Presence Icons D eee Unregistered oe owes UR 8 143 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS oag Speed Dial and Programmable Keys ee Speed Dial Key Not Available No Monitoring Ringing SIP Net SI
266. ll on your phone Non idle call states e If you are on a call you will see a screen that gives you the option to Blind transfer your currently held call to that workgroup member Note If you actually want to place an attended consult transfer call rather than a Blind transfer call press the Transfer key on your phoneset Once an attended consult transfer is started use the Transfer key on the phoneset to complete the transfer Figure 10 32 Transfer Key G2 10 246 DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Enhanced Programmable Keys e Ifthe user has a call on hold you will see a screen that gives you the option to Pickup the call on that user s line To pick up a ringing call to a member of your workgroup If you are set up for a workgroup you will see a flashing red LED when there is a ringing call on any other workgroup member s phone e While your phone is idle and the other workgroup member s phone is ringing do one of the following e To place a hands free or headset call Press the key for the workgroup member then use your headset or the phone s speaker to continue the call on your phone e To use your phone handset for the call Pick up your phone handset then press the key for the workgroup member to pick up the call Non idle call states e If you are on a call and want to pick up the ringing call for the workgroup member press the key for the workgroup member
267. m with your connection to the network Contact your system administrator Restart the phone a Press the Menu key b Select Reboot c Press the OK softkey or Enter key on the cursor pad to restart the phone Note If you cannot restart the phone using the Menus unplug the phone from power and the network for ten seconds then reconnect the telephone to your network and power to perform a restart DT700 Phone User Guide PHONE TROUBLESHOOTING Calling 6 If you are still having problems with your phone contact your system administrator A Speed Dial Personal Directory entry is not working correctly e For any speed dial or Personal Directory numbers that are configured to call an outside external telephone number verify that you have to outside calling code programmed at the start of the number entry and that your account is authorized to call external numbers Telephone numbers from the Personal Directory or Call History are not dialing correctly The Dial Preference settings on your phone determine whether or not the phone dials numbers directly from the Personal Directory or Call History or if you are allowed to edit the numbers before they are dialed If you are trying to dial from the Call History and numbers require an outside access code you may want to set your Dial Preferences so you can edit numbers before they are dialed If you only use Personal Directory entries that are programmed with the outside access code
268. me screen HOME PAGE The home URL displays the Microbrowser Home page To view the Microbrowser Home page 1 Press the Feature key 2 Press the Home softkey Figure 10 4 Home Softkey Feature Press soft key or wait to load page Program The Microbrowser home page opens 10 214 DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Figure 10 5 Microbrowser Home page Forwarding Recording Start A re Supervise Call History Conferences Next Select Exit Note You may see different menu items on your home page depending on the network configuration and the status of your phone The Microbrowser Home Page handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Next This softkey is used to navigate to the next Home Page for additional options Exit Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Hard Key Features Explanation These are the general navigation options from the cursor keys on the phone Depending on the option that is currently selected not all available navigation options are available Available navigation options are shown by the cursor icon on the phone s display screen 4 way scroll BACK key Move one item to the left Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Move one item to the right Directory key 4 way scroll UP key Move one item up Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Move one item down Volume DOW
269. n Im Falle der Entsorgung Ihrer elektrischen und elektronischen Produkte beachten Sie bitte die vertraglichen Vereinbarungen mit Ihrem Unternehmen beim Kauf dieser Produkte Sollte diese Information nicht verf gbar sein wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihre lokale NEC Unified Solutions Organisation oder kontaktieren uns unter www nec unified com weee FUR LANDER AUBRERHALB DER EUROP ISCHEN UNION Bei der Entsorgung von elektrischen und elektronischen Geraten in Landern au erhalb der Europ ischen Union beachten Sie bitte lokal geltende Vorschriften Im Falle fehlender Vereinbarungen zwischen Ihrem Lieferanten und NEC Unified Solutions wenden Sie sich bitte an lokale Beh rden f r weitere Informationen PRODUKT BORTSKAFFELSESINFORMATION DA FOR LANDE I DEN EUROP ISKE UNION Det her viste symbol er anbragt p produktet for at informere om at X affald af elektrisk og elektronisk udstyr ikke m bortskaffes sammen med usorteret kommunalt affald EE Elektrisk og elektronisk udstyr inklusive kabler stik og tilbeh r skal bortskaffes separat for at f den rette behandling genindvinding og genanvendelse Disse produkter skal bringes til en dertil egnet facilitet hvor den bedst muligt behandlings genindvindings og genanvendelses teknik er til r dighed Separat bortskaffelse har betydelige fordele Den forhindrer spredning af u nskede substanser i den kommunale affaldsstr m og er s ledes medvirkende til at beskytte milj et og mennesker mod
270. n specific user actions key events pertaining to this screen Digit key No Operation 4 way scroll BACK key Redial key Discard changes and return to Clear Settings 4 way scroll FORWARD key No Operation Directory key 4 way scroll UP key No Operation Volume UP key 4 way scroll DOWN key Volume No Operation DOWN key ENTER key Erase all Personal Directory entries and Speed Dial Key information on the phone Note There are no menu items associated with Confirm Menu settings To Clear Call History Note This option only deletes the Call History information on your phone It does not clear your system call history or the call history from any other phone applications 1 Press the Menu key User Settings 4 80 DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad 2 Select 6 Clear Settings or LU Clear Settings Note The number of the menu item may differ based on the Edit Before Dialing settings on your phone 3 Select 2 Clear Call History Figure 4 51 Clear Call History Clear Call History Clear Call History Entries The confirmation screen manage the following events Table 4 6 Clear Confirmation softkeys Discard changes and return to Clear Settings Clear all Call History information on the phone Table 4 7 Data Clear Confirmation acceptable user actions keys The following section describes behavior on certain specific user actions key events
271. nce states b Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey 5 Directory Entry Settings a Select the Directory Entry Settings for this entry Figure 8 96 Directory Entry settings Directory Entry C1 Do Not Show in Directory Show in Directory Cancel Valid options are e Do Not Show in Directory This information is saved as a Speed Dial Key only and the entry is not saved to the Personal Directory If you receive an incoming call from this number it will not show the name or number from the saved Speed Dial e Show in Directory This information is saved to the Personal Directory in addition to the saved Speed Dial key When you browse the Personal Directory 8 164 DT700 Phone User Guide 6 Figure 8 97 Figure 8 98 Figure 8 99 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys there will be an entry for this information If you receive an incoming call from this number it will show the name and number from the saved Speed Dial b Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Press the Save softkey to save the entry information Save softkey Mame Lab Murber 346 speed Dial 5 Monitor visual Directory Entry Yes Save H i i O Emt f Note For entries that are set as read only by your system administrator an error is displayed and the entry is not changed Entries are uniquely defined by the combination of number and name For the purpose of
272. ncoming calls e Reject incoming calls e Go off hook to make an outgoing call from the headset e End a call D 329 JABRA BLUETOOTH HEADSET SUPPORT FOR DT700 PHONES E lt e Mute and unmute the headset s microphone e Redial CONNECTOR ACTIVATION Before you install the headset base station the Side 2 connector on the phone must be configured for the Jabra Headset Kit Note You must have administrative privileges to change the operation mode of the Side 2 connector Contact your network administrator to determine if you need the Side 2 connector configured for the Jabra Headset Kit for your phone Enable a single phone for a Jabra Bluetooth headset at the phoneset device 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select 4 Admin Settings 3 Use the keypad and cursor key to enter the User Name and Password to access the Admin menu 4 Select Maintenance 5 Select Side 2 Connector Mode Figure D 1 Side 2 Connector Mode Maintenance 6 Select Jabra Headset Kit Figure D 2 Enable Jabra Headset 7 Press the OK softkey 8 Press the Exit softkey 9 Press the Yes softkey to restart the phone Note You must restart the phone to fully enable the Side 2 connector mode Enable all phones for a Jabra Bluetooth headset using the XML configuration file Note If there are phones with DCL 60 Line Key Modules on your network changing the configuration file will disable the line key modules for those phones You D 330 DT700 Phone
273. nd Programmable Keys Using the Feature Key 8 132 Figure 8 20 Figure 8 21 Figure 8 22 Note Network configuration determines how the Feature key behaves on your network Contact your system administrator The Feature key on the telephone is used to program Speed Dial Keys and access the Microbrowser if Supported Feature Key GD Depending on the network configuration for your system the Feature key is operated in one of the following ways Feature Key on a system without Microbrowser Support Pressing the Feature key opens a screen that lets you enter the programmable mode on your phone Feature key splash screen You can still answer incoming calls while your phone is in the programmable mode using the telephone handset or by pressing the Speaker or Answer key on your telephone You phone will exit the programmable mode when you answer the call or press the Line Key to view the caller information To exit the programmable mode press the Exit softkey Feature Key on a system with Microbrowser Support Pressing the Feature key opens a screen that lets you enter the programmable mode on your phone or go to the Microbrowser on your phone After you press the Feature key press the Program soft key to enter your phone s programmable mode or press the Home soft key to go to the Microbrowser home page Feature key splash screen Press soft key or wait to load page If you don t press the Program softkey w
274. nding on your system configuration you may also see an indication of how many messages you have Figure 7 52 Message Waiting icon mM Friuit6 2AM Yictoria J vvroblewski 3 New Messages emal Neta ACCESSING VOICE MAIL Note This feature may not be available on all systems To access the voice mail box for your system from the phone do one of the following DT710 ITL 2E phone e Press the Message key on your phone Figure 7 53 Message key c DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D ITL 32D and DT730G ITL 12DG ITL 12CG phones e Press the Voicemail softkey Figure 7 54 Voicemail softkey SRA Fri Jul 16 10 28 AM Yictoria J vvroblewski 3 Mew Messages DT700 Phone User Guide 7 119 BASIC PHONE OPERATION og Advanced Messaging Features Figure 7 55 Voicemail softkey from Call screen Fri Jul 16 10 58 AM Enter Number PO oicermail f EndCall_ 7 120 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS These procedures outline some of the advanced features available on the economy and value phones in the DT700 series lineup Depending on the model of your phone and the configuration of your system not all features may be available on your phone Note The DT710 ITL 6DE phone has a smaller screen display than is shown in the examples in this section You may have to scroll using the cursor pad and softkeys to see all available options The following symbols represent the DT700 s directional
275. ne Feature Key Pressing the Feature key opens a screen that lets you enter the programmable mode on your phone or go to the Microbrowser on your phone After you press the Feature key press the Program soft key to enter your phone s programmable mode or press the Home soft key to go to the Microbrowser home page Figure 10 2 Feature key splash screen DT700 Phone User Guide Feature Press soft key or wait to load page Program Press the Home softkey to open the Microbrowser s home page If you dont press a softkey within 2 seconds the Microbrowser will automatically open 10 213 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 siccoronse Figure 10 3 Microbrowser Home page Forwarding Recording Start A re Supervise Call History Conferences NSA Select Exit You can still answer incoming calls while you are using the Microbrowser using the telephone handset or by pressing the Speaker or Answer key on your telephone Your phone will exit the Microbrowser when you answer the call or press the Line Key to view the caller information To exit the Microbrowser press the Exit key on your phoneset To return to the Microbrowser s home page press the Home softkey COLOR MICROBROWSER NAVIGATION Navigation of the microbrowser is done with the cursor keys Available cursor options are indicated by the cursor icon Be Use the forward back soft keys to navigate between the pages in the ho
276. ne Your phone will not ring for incoming calls until you disable DND through the DND key through the star codes or using a supported client application Note When DND is enabled the DT700 may also play a stutter dial tone if configured for your system To disable Do Not Disturb for your phone e While the LED for the DND key is red press the DND key The DND key LED turns off and the DND icon is removed from the call control home screen You will now receive incoming calls on your phone Note When DND is disabled the DT700 may continue to play the stutter dial tone if configured on your system depending on the state of Message Waiting Indicator MWI and Call Forwarding features HANDSET FORWARDING KEY Note See Handset Forwarding on page 10 221 for information on configuring the Handset Forwarding options on your phone The Forwarding key can be used to enable and disable the Handset Forwarding settings from your phone for users who do not use a supported client application to manage their forwarding settings It can also be used to monitor the Handset Forwarding state for your phone This key is a shortcut to access the Handset Forwarding page of the phone s microbrowser DT700 Phone User Guide 10 251 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 5 Frocrammave Koy HANDSET FORWARDING LEDS AND ICONS Table 10 6 Handset Forwarding LEDs and Icons Call Control Comments Home Screen LED
277. ne User Guide Help key Programmable Keys Feature key Recall key Answer key Mic key Menu key Hold key Transfer key Speaker key Cursor pad USB Charging Port INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones Press the Help key and then press a softkey to display information about that softkey The first programmable key is reserved as the Line Key Line Keys allow the user to select which line to operate on Any programmable keys not used as Line Keys can be programmed as Speed Dial Keys by the user or system administrator Numbers up to 24 digits can be assigned to Speed Dial Keys The numbers may be a telephone number or star hash codes This key displays a set of menu options that provide additional capabilities such as speed dial key programming and microbrowser applications 3C systems Press this key to get a dial tone If you are currently on a call the current call will be placed on hold and a new call will be started SIP Net Platforms See the Hold key Press this key to answer an incoming call If you have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the headset If you do not have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the speaker on the phone You can also press this key to answer a waiting call Press key to mute the microphone The LED on this key flashes when the microphone is muted Press the key again to un mute
278. nference Bridge 7 577 Ct te The List Conferences page handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Opens the Conference Bridge details page Exit Exit the microbrowser and return to the appropriate call status screen Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the microbrowser home page Directory key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Show the details for the highlighted menu item Directory key 4 way scroll UP key Move to previous menu item Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Move to next menu item Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Opens the Conference Bridge details page 9 193 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 sicrcoronse In the example above Conference Bridge 5 currently has a conference call in progress Conference Bridge 4 6 and 7 currently have no calls in progress Figure 9 26 Conference Bridge detail 0103 646 Wroblewski Victoria Mo conference in progress This view is Updated every 30 seconds This view is Updated every 30 seconds Refresh Back Exit 7 The Conference Bridge detail automatically updates every 30 seconds The time each conference participant has been connected only updates when the page is refreshed that is the time does NOT update every second The Conference Bridge page handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Refresh the conference status information Exit Exit the microbrowser and ret
279. ng data Example ABC D EFG To switch between keypad entry modes press the key on the telephone keypad This icon indicates that the keypad generates all lowercase characters when entering data Example abc d efg To switch between keypad entry modes press the key on the telephone keypad This icon indicates that the keypad generates numeric characters when entering data To switch between keypad entry modes press the key on the telephone keypad Note This feature is only available on DT730G phones This icon indicates that the device connected to the USB port of the DT730G phone is drawing current beyond the normal Max 500mA range If a device is overdrawing current from USB port power supply to the USB port is stopped until the device is removed Table 2 15 Secured Unsecure Signaling and Media Scenarios Icons Registration Icon Media Security Icon Black and White Black background background gt 7 2B own 2 30 DT700 Phone User Guide INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700O AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones Registration Icon Media Security Icon White Black background background VOLUME DISPLAY ICONS When you adjust the volume levels on your phone of the handset using the a Up and Down keys on the cursor pad there is an icon that indicates the volume level you are adjusting Figure 2 15 Volume Adjustment Display I Tue May 4 09 32 AM Wroblewski Victoria 64
280. nnect the 10 pin connector to the SIDE 2 port on the back of the phone Figure 3 35 Serial Cable Installed Port Port Cover 5 Adjust the height of the tilt leg on the phone to the desired height 6 Adjust the height of the tilt leg on the DCL 60 to match the tilt leg on the multiline terminal 7 Attach the side panel to the side of the DCL 60 8 Connect the AC Adapter cable to the DCL 60 9 Reattach the side panel to the phone 10 Connect power to the phone To install DCL 60 Line Key Card Optional 1 From the bottom use an object to gently pry off the button panel for the DCL 60 module 2 Align the holes in the Line Key Card with the buttons on the phone 3 Align the holes in the Button Panel with the telephone keypad buttons on the phone and then push the four corners of the panel until the panel clicks into place DT700 Phone User Guide 3 59 3 60 DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 DT700 Phone User Guide This chapter describes how to customize your phone Note The DT710 ITL 6DE phone has a smaller screen display than is shown in the examples in this section You may have to scroll using the cursor pad and softkeys to see all available options The following symbols represent the DT700 s directional cursor pad and key pad User actions Keys Digit key Select corresponding menu Item 4 way scroll BACK key lt Return to User Settings menu Redial key 4 wa
281. o operation Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen HOT DESKING STATUS UPDATES Note Depending on the speed of your system and the processes that are running and updating on your system it may take up to 5 minutes before your name and number are displayed on the phone after you log in to the phone The phone s main display will automatically refresh when it receives the name and number information You will be able to make and receive calls immediately after a successful login even if the phone does not display your name and number yet You can log out using a star code you can log in at another phone on the system or the system may automatically log you out after a configured period of time HANDSET FORWARDING Note Conditional handset forwarding requirements set from the phoneset apply to address based users only 72 73 Handset Forwarding and Handset Forwarding options from the phoneset are not supported for User Centric enabled users User Centric enabled users must use supported 3C system client applications to set forwarding conditions The Handset Call Forwarding pages allow you to set change and delete handset call forwarding conditions for your phoneset rather than using only 3C System Star Codes or requiring 3C system client applications to access advanced call forwarding settings 10 221 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 siccoronse HA
282. o set Forwarding for your DNONG cccceeececeeeeeceeeeaeeeaeeaeeseeeeaees 9 211 To disable Forwarding for your phone ccccecceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaes 9 211 DT700 Phone User Guide Contents 10 DT730G Color Microbrowser and Enhanced Programmable KeyS cccsscssseeseseneeeeeeeeeees 10 213 Using the Microbrowser ccccccceccceecceeecceecceeecseecaeeceueeceeeceeecueseeessueenaes 10 213 Feature Key with the MICrobDroOWSe l ccceccececeeceeeeeeeceeeeeceeeseeeaeees 10 213 To view the Microbrowser HOME page c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeees 10 214 FIO WSS ING eenen Statice eciact cx peip erates A E 10 217 To Login using Hot DeSKING cccccceecccececeeeceeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeesaeeeaeeeees 10 217 To Logout of Hot Desking SESSION cccccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeceeeseeeaeeees 10 220 Handset Forwarding ccccccceccsseccesecececeseceecceusecseeceeeceueeeeessueeseeesanees 10 221 To set a Handset Forwarding Condition ccccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 222 To set Handset forwarding using star COdES ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 227 To set Conditional Handset forwarding No Answer using star codes 10 227 To set Conditional Handset forwarding Busy using star codes 10 228 To clear Handset Forwarding Conditions cccccccseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeees 10 228 To clear Handset forwarding using star COdES cccc
283. on de ces produits Vous pourrez trouver des informations quant au tri s lectif et au recyclage sur www nec unified com weee POUR LES PAYS EN DEHORS DE LA COMMUNAUT EUROP ENNE L enl vement des d chets lectriques et lectroniques doit tre fait selon les r gles locales en vigueur S il ny a pas d arrangement avec NEC ou votre fournisseur vous tes pri de contacter les autorit s locales INFORMAZIONE PER LO SMALTIMENTO DEI PRODOTTI IT PER LE NAZIONI NELL UNIONE EUROPEA Il simbolo qui rappresentato stato apposto sul vostro prodotto per X potervi informare che i prodotti elettrici ed elettronici non dovrebbero essere depositati nel generico bidone immondizie n Prodotti elettrici ed elettronici inclusi cavi connettori ed accessori dovranno essere depositati separatamente in modo da trattarli secondo il loro corretto recupero e riciclaggio Questi prodotti dovranno essere portati in specifiche zone dove saranno disponibili appropriati servizi di trattamento recupero e riciclaggio La raccolta separata presenta importanti vantaggi previene l involontaria dispersione di sostanze nelle acque correnti con il risultato di contribuire alla protezione della salute delluomo e dell ambiente DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 Phone User Guide NOTICES WEEE Product Disposal Information Per vostra informazione potrebbe essere imposta una multa dal gestore delle acque interne in caso di raccolta illegale di prodotti e
284. on indicates that you have two other callers in a 3 way conference call Call Conferencing This icon is displayed when you have two Hold other callers in a 3 way conference and have the conference both callers on hold This icon indicates the phone is currently set for Do Not Disturb This feature may not be available on all systems This icon indicates that the headset is active CF Busy This icon indicates Call Forwarding on Busy is active 3C system only CF Immediate This icon indicates Immediate Call Forwarding is active 3C system only DT700 Phone User Guide 2 29 INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES omg DT700 and DT730G Series Phones Black and White Abe CF No Answer 3C system only Call Recording 3C system only Keypad in first letter uppercase entry mode Keypad in all a e AEC mode Keypad in all lowercase entry mode Eki abc Keypad in numeric entry mode USB Port Drain Description This icon indicates Call Forwarding on No Answer is active This icon indicates Call Recording is active This icon indicated that the keypad will generate the first letter in a word in uppercase characters and the rest of the letters in a word in lowercase characters when entering data Example Abc D Efg To switch between keypad entry modes press the key on the telephone keypad This icon indicates that the keypad generates all uppercase characters when enteri
285. one reboots or if the phone looses power If your phone is rebooting the device can reconnect after the phone has finished rebooting If your phone has lost power the device will not be able to reconnect to the network until power is restored to the phone DT700 Phone User Guide PHONE TROUBLESHOOTING Power POWER e What type of power does my phone use Take a look at the back of your phone If you only see a cable running from the back of your phone to a network jack your phone uses a PoE connection lf your phone also has a power cord attached to the back of the phone your phone uses a power supply The phone does not power up Power Over Ethernet PoE 1 Check that the network connector is firmly plugged in to both the phone and the network jack 2 If possible try plugging your phone into another PoE jack on your network The problem may be with the network cord Try a new network cord 4 Ifyou are still having problems with your phone contact your system administrator The phone does not power up Power supply 1 Verify that the power supply is firmly plugged into the AC outlet If possible try plugging the power supply into another AC outlet 2 The problem may be with the power cord Try a new power cord If possible try plugging the phone into a PoE jack on your network 4 Ifyou are still having problems with your phone contact your system administrator CALLING e If your phone has an LCD display check
286. or Menu Display for DT710 ITL 6DE Phones ry Visual a a THE HELP KEY Note This feature is not available on DT710 ITL 2E model phones Using the Help key You can use the Help key to view information about the softkeys that are displayed on your phone 1 Press the Help key 8 122 DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 8 5 2 Figure 8 6 Figure 8 7 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS The Menu Key Help key Tue Jan 25 10 31 AM Victoria Wroblewski Help Press the softkey for which you want to see Help information Press a softkey for Additional Help Fri Movy 19 01 49 PM Press a Line or Soft Key for help You can use the T Up and Down softkeys or the 4 Up Y Down keys on the cursor pad to scroll through the help information if needed Delete softkey Help screen Press the Exit softkey to return to the previous screen Note Help screens may not be available for all the softkeys on your phone THE MENU KEY The Menu Key and cursor pad on the DT710 ITL 6DE DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D and ITL 32D and DT730G ITL 12CG ITL 12DG phones lets you access additional settings and features for your phone 8 123 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Speed Dial and Programmable Keys 8 124 Figure 8 8 Figure 8 9 Menu Key Menu SPEED DIAL AND PROGRAMMABLE KEYS PROGRAMMABLE KEY MANAGEMENT DT710 ITL 2E PROGRAMMABLE KEY The DT710 ITL 2E economy telephone has only
287. or the OK softkey to accept the setting You can also press the Cancel softkey to exit without making any changes Note The setting defaults to LH Phone Connect Phone to Headset Base Station 1 Press the tab on the port cover on the left side of the back of the phone to release the protective cover that is over the SIDE 2 port Remove the cover DT700 Phone User Guide D 333 JABRA BLUETOOTH HEADSET SUPPORT FOR DT700 PHONES E lt Figure D 9 Remove SIDE 2 port cover 2 Attach the cover of the Jabra EHS Adapter to the back of the phone Figure D 10 Attach Jabra EHS Adapter cover 3 Connect the 10 pin connector of the Jabra EHS Adapter to the SIDE 2 port on the back of the phone D 334 DT700 Phone User Guide JABRA BLUETOOTH HEADSET SUPPORT FOR DT700 PHONES Jabra Headset Figure D 11 Connect Jabra EHS Adapter to Side 2 Connector 4 Close the cover the back of your phone Figure D 12 Close cover 5 Connect the network cable end of the Jabra EHS Adapter to the AUX port MA on the back of the headset base station DT700 Phone User Guide D 335 JABRA BLUETOOTH HEADSET SUPPORT FOR DT700 PHONES E lt Figure D 13 Jabra EHS Adapter connection to Side 2 Connector port and Jabra headset base station AUX port e g a 6 Insert the telephone cable plug into the HEADSET port on the back of the phone until you hear a click 7 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the Telephone port on
288. ore you press the Headset softkey CALL WAITING CONCURRENT CALLS Hidtidtidrtintirtibitiadttibiaitrrtrirtitirtrirtridadtirirbtirtritrtirtriridrtirtriti amp t tirtiirttbtidtsbit4 th d4ed amp d 5idddi Note The call waiting feature and maximum number of concurrent calls you can receive is determined by your system administrator If you have call waiting on your phone line you will hear a tone in your handset and the call indicator lamp flashes when another call on the line is waiting for consultation To answer the other incoming call Call Waiting DT700 Phone User Guide 1 You will hear a tone that indicates you have another call Also the Call Indicator Lamp on the phone will flash 7 109 BASIC PHONE OPERATION P o Call Waiting Concurrent Calls 2 Figure 7 25 4 Figure 7 26 Do one of the following e To review the caller information before answering the call Press the Line Key and then press the Answer key to take the call or press the Reject softkey to reject the call e To answer the call without reviewing the caller information Press the Answer key Answer key GD or co DT710 ITL 2E phones DT710 ITL 6DE and DST730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D and ITL 32D phones The current call is put on hold and the new call is answered When you have completed the call press the EndCall softkey to end the call and return to your original call Press the Hold key or the Resume softkey to resume the or
289. ors for Speed Dial Keys Tvpne Programmable yP Key LED Line Key Registered LED is not lit fa Unregistered LED is not lit a 8 130 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Tepe Programmable yP Key LED Speed Dial Key No Monitoring Not Available LED is not lit LED is not lit l Ringing SIP Net Blinking Red Ga Qa Ga Ga Ringing 3C system Blinking Green Subscription Failed LED is not lit G T Ce Red Online 3C system G Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use Held 3C system Blinking Red Note DT700 phones do not publish presence information Depending on other phones on your system and any phone application software that you use you may see different LED behavior for different presence states Duplicate Entries in Speed Dials Entries are uniquely defined by the combination of number and name For the purpose of uniquely defining an entry the name is case insensitive Multiple entries with the same number and different names are allowed and multiple entries with the same name and different numbers are allowed Multiple entries with the same name and same number are not allowed An error is displayed if you create an entry with the same name and same number as an existing entry Figure 8 19 Directory Duplicate Not Allowed Menu Display Duplicate Entry Mot Allowed DT700 Phone User Guide 8 131 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Speed Dial a
290. orwarding Key cccccscccssccseeceeeceececeeeceeeceueceueseueesaeessenseenes 10 251 To set Forwarding for your PhONe cccceecceeceeeeeeeeeee esse eesaeeeaeeeaes 10 252 To disable Forwarding for your phone 0ccceecceeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 10 252 vi Contents DT700 Phone User Guide 11 12 DT700 Phone User Guide CONTENTS Call History and the Corporate and Personal Directories vicaisenasincaiaspnaciestenatiacietiiciaeexeercassieinces 11 253 The Help KOY serran e a eee 11 254 Using the Help Key ccccccccsccceccceseceeeseseecaeecececuecsusesaeecueesseessueenaes 11 254 The Men KOY ctetiecsuzcterccdsesestoecoseceiacnvedeaseteavectar r EEE Eana 11 255 A GAIN TAR MOI TENE AE EE S A E A A E 11 256 Access Call History using the Menu Key ccceceeceseeeeeeeeeeseeeees 11 257 Access Call History using the Cursor Pad ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 257 To clear the Missed Calls icon and Message ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 258 TO view Missed Calls ccccccceeeccseceseeceeeceueceueceueeceeecseessuessueeseeenes 11 258 TO VIEW Received CallS ccccsccssccescecseeceeeceeeceueeeeeeseeesaeesaeeeseeesaeens 11 259 TO VIEW Outgoing Calls cece cecc cece eeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeesaeeeaeeeees 11 260 To dial an internal number from the Call History using the handset 11 261 To dial an external number from the Call History
291. ot Available LED is not lit No Monitoring DT700 Phone User Guide 5 91 DT730 ITL 8LD WITH DISPLAY ae DT730 ITL 8LD DESI Less Display 5 92 LED DESI Less Icon Ringing SIP Net Ringing 3C system Subscription Failed Online 3C system only On the Phone b Programmable Key Information Table 5 2 Programmable Key information on DT730 ITL 8LD phones Programmed Speed Dial Key Speed Dial name Empty Programmable Key No information is shown DT700 Phone User Guide Table 5 3 Using the Scroll Key Figure 5 4 DT700 Phone User Guide DT730 ITL 8LD WITH DISPLAY DT730 ITL 8LD DESI Less Display c Page Number Page Numbers on DT730 ITL 8LD phones Programmable Keys 2 9 A black background ona Key 1 is the Line Key ea page number indicates the currently displayed 2 Programmable Keys 9 16 page _ 2 Programmable Keys 17 24 Awhite background ona page number indicates Programmable Keys 25 32 the page is inactive 3C system A flashing alternating white and black background on a page number indicates an event happening on that page such as a presence change ona monitored line Flashing will stop when that line is connected to the call or when the line returns to an idle state USER PORTABILITY AND THE ITL 8LD PHONE For users that usually use an ITL 8LD phone User Portability features are still supported on all phone models but if the second LCD is not on the phone
292. ot ring ccccccseeccececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeees 12 302 cannot reconnect to a call on Hold The call does not terminate 12 302 Phone Keypad eceran AAA ERER nang at EEEE EAEE 12 303 The dial pad and or buttons are not WOPKING c ccceceeeeeeeeseeeee ness 12 303 want to enter specific characters or letters in Speed Dials and Personal Directory Entries cccccccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeees 12 303 PHONE OTC Seale ce lactis g a EEA EREE AEE ETAETA 12 304 The phone softkeys are not working ccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeaeeeees 12 304 cannot see a particular softkey on my phone ccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 12 304 LCD Sereen B 2 2 ccarpa ne ere rece ert een ee ee 12 305 The LCD is too light Or dark ccccsecccececescceseceececueeceeesseecsueeseeenas 12 305 want to adjust the time the LCD stays lit cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 12 305 need to reset the language ON My phone cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 306 The Call History information on my phone is gone ccceseeeeeeees 12 306 The name shown on the LCD of my phone Is wrong 00c00808 12 307 PGC aac pets eee neice eect sane eae Date a cg vv tig od sas E ese near eee cena 12 307 There is no audio to my NandSet cccccecesececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeees 12 307 There is no audio to my NeadSet cccceeccsececeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeee
293. our system configuration you may also see an indication of how many messages you have Message Waiting icon mM Friuit6 2AM Yictoria J Wroblewski 3 Mew Messages OOOO OOOO T Vocemal Newall The SIP Net system can send a count of messages waiting if the voice mail system it is connected to supports message counts DESK SHARING AND USER PORTABILITY When Desk Sharing is enabled for users on the system they can log on to any terminal that is enabled for Desk Sharing and their User Profile settings are applied to the phone To log on to a Desk Sharing Terminal B 320 Use the method for your system to log on to the terminal For SIP Net systems Dial the Activate DNR prefix e g 91 plus your phone number For example a user with the configured number of 1234 would dial 911234 After the Confirmation Tone is given end the call You should now be logged on to the terminal and the terminal should display your name and number DT700 Phone User Guide SIP NET SYSTEM FEATURES Also the phone is now configured with the following User Settings Personal Directory Call History Ringtone settings e Personal Directory entries e Missed Calls Headset settings e Speed Dial Keys e Received Calls Language e Placed Calls Date Time settings LCD settings Edit Before Dialing Settings To log out of a Desk Sharing Terminal e Use the method for your system to log off to the terminal For SIP Net sys
294. phone or the connection to the network Contact your system administrator to troubleshoot the problem your phone is having in connecting to the network My phone indicates that the network cable is unplugged DT700 Phone User Guide If you see the icon that indicates the network cable is unplugged there is a problem with the connection to the network 12 297 PHONE TROUBLESHOOTING I 5 conection Figure 12 10 Network Cable Unplugged E Note This icon will only display if you have an AC DC adapter connected to the phone A phone with a Power Over Ethernet PoE connection will power off when the network cable is unplugged Check both ends of the network cable that you use to connect your phone to the network for loose connections Also you can try using another network cable to connect your phone to the network and or try connecting to a different active LAN port on the network My phone cannot reconnect to the network after a local settings change If any administrative settings on your phone have been changed locally using the phone those changes will override any system wide configuration settings Your administrator may need to do one of the following e Manually log on to the phone to access the Admin Settings options and set the IP addresses such as the IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS Boot Server Address SNTP Server Address and Syslog Server Address in the Network Settings to 0 0 0 0 This wil
295. power cord into another AC outlet Restart the phone This not only restarts the phone it downloads the latest firmware for your phone which may solve your problems To restart the phone a Press the Menu key b Select 5 Reboot DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 12 7 PHONE TROUBLESHOOTING Network Connections c Press the OK softkey or Enter key on the cursor pad to restart the phone Reboot Phone Display Reboot Phone Cancel Tok Note If you cannot restart the phone using the Menus if your phone is locked up unplug the phone from power and the network for ten seconds then reconnect the telephone to your network and power to perform a restart If you are still having problems with your phone contact your system administrator NETWORK CONNECTIONS My phone cannot register on the network Figure 12 8 Figure 12 9 If you see a screen that reads Searching DHCP or the Unregistered phone icon on your phone and you cannot get a dial tone on your phone there may be a problem with the phone s connection to the network Searching for DHCP server Unregistered Phone icon AB The Unregistered phone icon indicates that the phone has not successfully connected to the network It is normal to see this icon momentarily after your phone resets while the phone reconfigures its connection to the network but if you still see this icon several minutes after a phone reset there may be a problem with your
296. programmable mode for your phone The Feature key LED lights a steady red Figure 8 44 Feature Key Figure 8 45 Figure 8 46 Figure 8 47 DT700 Phone User Guide cD Do one of the following ITL 24CD ITL 12CG ITL 24DG ITL 12DG ITL 32D ITL 24D ITL 12D and ITL 6DE Phones Press the programmable key that you want to set as a Speed Dial Key The programmable key LED flashes Programmable Key LED fa ITL 8LD Phones Press the Scroll Key to scroll to the desired page then press the Speed Dial Key that you want to edit The programmable key LED flashes and the Speed Dial information for the key is shown scroll Key Programmable Key LED Note If the Speed Dial has already been programmed the name and number information displays You will need to press the Exit softkey and select another programmable key Use the telephone keypad to enter the name and press Enter onthe cursor pad or the OK softkey 8 141 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS oag Speed Dial and Programmable Keys 8 142 Figure 8 49 Figure 8 48 Speed Dial Name Screen Enter Mame Abe 4 Up to 24 characters may be entered for the name e Press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen e To switch between first letter uppercase all uppercase all lowercase and numbers for keypad entry press the key on the keypad e To add a space to an entry press
297. pside down and flatten the tilt leg and stopper or remove the tilt leg see To remove tilt leg on page 3 44 Attach the wall mount to the wall directory or the wall plate When attaching the wall mount unit directly to the wall Secure the wall mount unit with the six screws included with the phone or hang the wall mount unit on the wall with two screws inserted into the wall Wall Mount Install WM L Unit lt 4 l WM L Unit k Screws s7 gt Screws supplied When attaching wall mount unit to the wall plate Attach wall mount unit to posts on the wall plate as shown in the figure below Wall Mount Install Switch box M L Unit Posts Insert the four tabs on the wall mount unit in the tab slots on the back of the phone DT700 Phone User Guide INSTALLATION 8 Tuck the excess cord into the wall mount unit Figure 3 25 Wall Mount Install ab Slots 8LK L MODULE INSTALLATION WARNING TO PREVENT POSSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE PHONE TERMINAL DURING INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL DISCONNECT THE LINE CORD LAN CABLE AND THE AC DC ADAPTER FROM THE PHONE TERMINAL TO POWER OFF THE TERMINAL DURING THE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE To install the 8LK L Module 1 Remove the left side panel from the phone 2 Attach the 8LK L module to the phone using the provided screws Figure 3 26 Securing the 8LK L with Screws 3 On the back of the phone press the tab on the port cover on the left side of the back of the phone
298. put the only special characters you can enter are and Table 4 10 Numeric Character Set Numeric Characters Table 4 11 Keypad in first letter uppercase a abe Keypad in all uppercase entry a rec Keypad in all lowercase entry abe Keypad in numeric entry mode cy DT700 Phone User Guide 4 87 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION og Speed Dial and Personal Directory Character Sets 4 88 DT700 Phone User Guide DT730 ITL 8LD WITH DISPLAY The following symbols represent the DT700 s directional cursor pad and key pad User actions Keys Digit key Select corresponding menu Item 4 way scroll BACK key lt Return to User Settings menu Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key gt Select highlighted menu item Directory key 4 way scroll UP key 4 Move to previous menu item Volume UP key 4 way scroll DOWN key v Move to next menu item Volume DOWN key ENTER key Select highlighted menu item center button on cursor pad Note The softkeys are buttons that change function depending on the situation Each softkey s current function is displayed on the LCD screen above the button on the phone Figure 5 1 DT730 ITL 8LD softkeys Tue Jan 25 10 31 AM Victoria Wroblewski Soft keys PT l icena NewCall Exit Help DT700 Phone User Guide 5 89 DT730 ITL 8LD WITH DISPLAY P o DT730 ITL 8LD DESI Less Display 5 90 Figure 5 2 DT730 ITL 8LD DESI LESS DISPLAY STARTUP DISPLAY All the
299. quisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE http www nec unified com doc LATVISKI Ar o NEC Unified Solutions deklar ka DT700 atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem http www nec unified com doc LIETUVI iuo NEC Unified Solutions deklaruoja kad is DT700 atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB Direktyvos nuostatas http www nec unified com doc MALTI Hawnhekk NEC Unified Solutions jiddikjara li dan DT700 jikkonforma mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti o rajn relevanti li hemm fid Dirrettiva 1999 5 EC http www nec unified com doc MAGYAR Alul rott NEC Unified Solutions nyilatkozom hogy a DT700 megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b eldirasainak http www nec unified com doc NEDERLANDS Hierbij verklaart NEC Unified Solutions dat het toestel DT700 in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG http www nec unified com doc E 347 NOTICES F o Declaration of Conformity NORSK NEC Unified Solutions erkl rer herved at utstyret DT700 er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF http www nec unified com doc POLSKI Niniejszym NEC Unified Solutions deklar
300. r information on how to enter the programmable mode for your phone see Using the Feature Key on page 8 132 2 Do one of the following ITL 24CG ITL 12CG ITL 24DG ITL 12DG ITL 32D ITL 24D ITL 12D and ITL 6DE Phones e Press the programmable key that you want to delete The programmable key LED flashes Figure 8 103 Programmable Key LED a ITL 8LD Phones e Press the Scroll Key to scroll to the desired page then press the Speed Dial Key that you want to delete The programmable key LED flashes and the Speed Dial information for the key is shown Figure 8 104 Scroll Key Figure 8 105 Programmable Key LED 3 Press the Edt softkey Figure 8 106 Edit softkey Speed Dial Kev Entry Warne Nurnber Speed Dial iF Monitor Delete 4 Select Speed Dial DT700 Phone User Guide 8 167 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS oag Speed Dial and Programmable Keys 5 Press the Delete softkey to delete the Speed Dial Key number and then press the OK softkey Figure 8 107 Delete Speed Dial Number Edit Speed Dial Key 6 Press the Save softkey to save the entry Figure 8 108 Save Entry The entry will be deleted as a Speed Dial but the Personal Directory information will not be deleted 7 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Figure 8 109 Speed Dial Edit Confirmation Entry Updated successtully Note For Speed Dial entries that are set as read only by your system administrator an error is display
301. rdevolle materialen kunnen worden hergebruikt en het voorkomt de verspreiding van ongewenste stoffen in het milieu Dit draagt direct bij aan de bescherming van mens en milieu Let op het ontdoen van afval van elektrische en elektronische producten via het huisvuil kan worden bestraft met een boete Voor de milieuvriendelijke inzameling en verwerking van elektrische en elektronische producten zijn afspraken gemaakt met afvalverwerkings bedrijven Raadpleeg hier voor uw leverancier of lees de contractuele afspraken na die met uw bedrijf zijn gemaakt bij aankoop van het product Op www nec unified com weee kunt u informatie vinden omtrent inzameling en verwerking VOOR LANDEN BUITEN DE EUROPESE UNIE Afval van elektrische en elektronische producten in landen buiten de Europese Unie moet worden behandeld in overeenstemming met de lokale wetgeving Indien geen regeling overeengekomen is met uw leverancier neem dan contact op met de locale autoriteiten voor meer informatie E 353 NOTICES omg WEEE Proauct Disposal Information E 354 INFORMA O DE ELIMINA O DE PRODUTOS PT PARA PA SES DA UNI O EUROPEIA O s mbolo aqui apresentado foi afixado no seu produto para o informar X que produtos el ctricos e electr nicos n o devem ser eliminados como lixo municipal EE Os produtos el ctricos e electr nicos incluindo cabos fichas e acess rios devem ser separados do lixo normal para permitir o seu tratamento adequado recupera
302. rding A Start Recording Call Cl Supervise a Call View System Call History a List Conferences Search Directory DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Note You may see different menu items on your home page depending on the network configuration and the status of your phone The Microbrowser Home Page handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Move to previous menu item does not show if first menu item is selected Move to next menu item does not show if last menu item is selected Exit Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status Redial key screen 4 way scroll FORWARD key Select highlighted menu item Directory key 4 way scroll UP key Move to previous menu item Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Move to next menu item Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Select highlighted menu item Hot Desking Login Hot Desking Login Opens the Hot Desking Login screen This option does not display if you are Hot Desked OR to the phone l Hot Desking Logout Opens the Hot Desking Logout Hot Desking Logout screen This option only displays if you are Hot Desked to the phone Handset Forwarding Opens the Handset Call Forwarding screen Start Recording Call Start Recording Call Opens the Start Reco
303. rding screen This option only displays if you have a call that is available OR for recording Stop Recording Call Opens the Stop Recording screen Stop Recording Call This option only displays when you have a call that is currently recording 9 175 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 sicrcoronse The Hot Desking menu items do not appear if your phone is not enabled for Hot Desking From the microbrowser pages the following softkeys are shown depending on the page oa eene status screen ox Cd sedintemcsomen Monitor Monitor listen to the selected call HOT DESKING Hot desking allows a single phone to assume different identities at different times Hot desking users do not have an assigned desk or physical phone but they do have a line on the system They use any available desk and phone for a short period of time usually measured in days and then move on The Hot Desking menu item does not appear if your phone is not enabled for Hot Desking To Login using Hot Desking 9 176 1 2 3 Press the Feature Key Press the Home soft key or wait 2 seconds to connect to the microbrowser home page Select Hot Desking Login DT700 Phone User Guide Figure 9 5 4 Figure 9 6 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Hot Desking Login 4 Hot Desking Login Handset Forwarding A Start Recording Call Cl Supervise a
304. rectory key 4 way scroll UP key No operation Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key No operation Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen 6 Multiple handset forwarding conditions may be enabled for your phone To add additional forwarding conditions use the microbrowser to enter the additional forwarding conditions To set Handset forwarding using star codes 1 Liftthe handset from the phone 2 Dial 72 lt forwarding number gt All calls to your phone will be forwarded to the configured number s Multiple handset forwarding conditions may be enabled for your phone To enter additional numbers hang up the phone and then lift the handset to enter an additional number example 72 forwarding number hang up 72 another forwarding number hang up To set Conditional Handset forwarding No Answer using star codes 1 Lift the handset from the phone DT700 Phone User Guide 10 227 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 viccorouse 2 Dial 62 lt forwarding number gt When your phone is not answered it will forward to the configured number s Multiple handset forwarding conditions may be enabled for your phone To enter additional numbers hang up the phone and then lift the handset to enter an additional number example 62 forwarding number hang up 62 another forwarding number hang up To set Conditional Handset forwarding Busy using s
305. reen b Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey DT700 Phone User Guide 11 285 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES 11 286 Speed Dial Note For more information on Speed Dial Keys see Speed Dial and Programmable Keys on page 8 124 a To delete the speed dial press the Delete softkey Or To edit the speed dial use the left cursor key on the cursor pad to backspace and then press the Delete softkey to delete the number that is before the cursor Use the telephone keypad to edit the number Figure 11 73 Edit Speed Dial Edit Speed Dial Key Delete Cancel The number of available Sped Dial Keys and their associated numbers depend on your model of DT700 phone For more information on the valid Speed Dial Keys for the specific phone models see Speed Dial Key Numbering on page 8 128 e You can also press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen b Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Monitor Note Monitoring can only be done on other lines that are internal to your system You cannot monitor external or outside lines a If you have a Speed Dial number assigned for this entry or are adding a Speed Dial number for the entry you can select the monitor status you want for the entry Figure 11 74 Edit Monitor Edit Monitor Ca Visual and Soft Ring Valid options for
306. rging Port INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones Press the Help key and then press a softkey to display information about that softkey The first programmable key is reserved as the Line Key Line Keys allow the user to select which line to operate on Any programmable keys not used as Line Keys can be programmed as Speed Dial Keys by the user or system administrator Numbers up to 24 digits can be assigned to Speed Dial Keys The numbers may be a telephone number or star hash codes This key displays a set of menu options that provide additional capabilities such as speed dial key programming and microbrowser applications 3C systems Press this key to get a dial tone If you are currently on a call the current call will be placed on hold and a new call will be started SIP Net Platforms See the Hold key Press this key to answer an incoming call If you have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the headset If you do not have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the speaker on the phone You can also press this key to answer a waiting call Press key to mute the microphone The LED on this key flashes when the microphone is muted Press the key again to un mute the microphone Press this key to access the features and settings provided on the local telephone menu such as Call History Personal Directory or User Settings Press th
307. rn Displayed softkeys can vary depending on the state of the phone and your network settings Note Softkey functionality is only available for phones with LCD displays DT700 Phone User Guide 2 33 INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES F o DT700 and DT730G Series Phones 2 34 Figure 2 20 DT730 and DT730DG softkeys Tue Jan 25 10 31 AM Victoria Wroblewski Soft keys pT cicernail NewCall Exit Help DT710 ITL 6DE softkeys ee Softkeys P emal NeuCall Exit Help cj Cy Figure 2 22 DT730G Color softkeys Thu Aug 30 2 56 AM Richard Thomas 1002 Softkeys Commonly used softkeys include NewCall Generates dial tone for a call Voicemail Automatically dials the voice mail extension on your system This feature may not be available on all systems Pickup Answers calls to other users in your Pickup group from your phone This feature may not be available on all systems EndCall Terminates the current call Conference Conf Initiates completes a conference Resume Takes the call off Hold status Dial Dials the number Delete Deletes the last digit entered backspace DT700 Phone User Guide INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700O AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones Reject Transfers call to your Voice Mail or forwarding conditions gt gt gt More Press this to see additional softkeys for the current screen T Up 4 Down Use the up and down arrow keys to navigat
308. rodukter aldrig f r kasseras bland hush llsavfall Elektriska och elektroniska produkter inklusive kablar stickkontakter och tillbeh r skall sopsorteras s att kassering tervinning och teranv ndning kan ske p vederb rligt s tt Dessa produkter skall terf ras till avsedd inr ttning d r b sta m jliga teknik f r teranv ndning och tervinning finns tillg nglig Sopsortering har v sentliga f rdelar det f rebygger spridning av o nskade mnen i den kommunala avfallshanteringen och som ett resultat av detta bidrar sopsortering till att skydda m nniskors h lsa och milj n Notera att olaglig avfallshantering via den allm nna kommunala avfallshanteringen kan inneb ra utd mande av b ter F r att underl tta sopsortering och milj v nlig tervinning har tg rder vidtagits f r lokal insamling och tervinning de fall era elektriska eller elektroniska produkter DT700 Phone User Guide NOTICES WEEE Product Disposal Information m ste kasseras h nvisas ni till de verenskommelser som ert f retag tecknat da dessa produkter forvarvats Pa www nec unified com wee kan du hitta information om sopsortering och miljovanliga atervinningsatgarder FOR LANDER UTANFOR DEN EUROPEISKA UNIONEN Avfallshantering av elektriska och elektroniska produkter i lander utanf r den Europeiska Unionen skall ske i enlighet med de lokala foreskrifterna Om inget avtal ar tecknat med den egna leverantoren vanligen konta
309. roll Key Figure 8 119 Programmable Key LED 3 Press the Delete softkey Figure 8 120 Delete softkey Speed Dial Key Entry Lah Nuriber S26 Speed Chal iF Monitor Visual 4 Press the Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to confirm Figure 8 121 Delete Entry Confirm Cancel The entry will be deleted as a Speed Dial 5 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Figure 8 122 Delete Entry Complete Menu Display Note For Speed Dial entries that are set as read only by your system administrator an error is displayed and the entry is not deleted 6 Doone of the following DT700 Phone User Guide 8 171 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS oag Speed Dial and Programmable Keys e To delete more Speed Dial entries press the Speed Dial Key for that entry and repeat steps 3 through 5 e To return to the main phone screen press the Exit softkey or the Feature Key Figure 8 123 Exit softkey Press soft key or wait to load page E Program TP Exit f Home 8 172 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS USING THE MICROBROWSER Note For more information on using the Barge Monitor or Hot Desking see the Supplemental Features Guide FEATURE KEY WITH THE MICROBROWSER The Feature key on the telephone is used to program Speed Dial Keys and access the Microbrowser on your phone Figure 9 1 Feature Key Pressing the Feature key opens a screen that lets you enter t
310. ronyms abbreviations or descriptive terms imply general adherence under the UNIVERGE 3C product brand and serve as easy to use terminology throughout the system Descriptive terms and system features within the UNIVERGE 3C TM product line while not trademarked describe and represent the full UNIVERGE 3C system and its various features users or accounts example UNIVERGE 3C Unified Communications Manager may be referred to as the UCM or Primary UCM etc Some areas of the product may refer to Sphere Sphericall Sphericall Voice Mail or Sphericall Desktop and are understood as part of the UNIVERGE 3C system UNIVERGE supports a variety of media gateways and other media devices including NEC s UNIVERGE DT700 SIP phones PhoneHub COHub BranchHub and MeetingHub Commonly used terms in the UNIVERGE 3C documentation Product Name Hereinafter referred to as UNIVERGE 3C Administrator 3C Administrator application software application application 3C Administrator feature permissions setting Other aspects of the 3C management e 3C Call Recording e 3C Console 3C Database 3C Media Server Sphericall Services Windows services 3C system administrator person managing the system UNIVERGE 3C client applications UC Client and Soft Media Phone 3C Mobile Client for iOS or Android Sphericall Desktop or Sphericall Desktop Softphone UNIVERGE 3C Collaboration 3C Collaboration UNIVERGE 3C Collaboration Collaboration Meeting Manag
311. rsonal Directory 1 2 Figure 8 57 DT700 Phone User Guide Press the Menu key or cursor pad to access the Personal Directory Press the More softkey and then the Add softkey More Soft and Add softkeys Directory Entries a7 6 Home 618475551234 Lab 346 Lab 2 371 4 Search _ Edit Delete P Detal Erit r il 8 145 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Speed Dial and Programmable Keys 3 Figure 8 58 Figure 8 59 8 146 Use the telephone keypad to enter the name and press Enter onthe cursor pad or the OK softkey Personal Directory Name Screen Enter Name Up to 24 characters may be entered for the name e Press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen e To switch between first letter uppercase all uppercase all lowercase and numbers for keypad entry press the key on the keypad e To add a space to an entry press e To enter special characters press the key For a list of special characters see Speed Dial and Personal Directory Character Sets in the DT700 Phone User Guide e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys Use the telephone keypad to enter a phone number for the entry and press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey Enter Telephone Number Enter Murnber 918475551234 Delete Cancel Up to 24 characters may be
312. ry the LED shows the current presence state of the entry using red green color and steady blinking flashing light DCL 60 WITH A ITL 8LD PHONE The DCL 60 console can be connected to an ITL 8LD phone but the lower LCD on the phone only shows information for the first 32 programmable keys that are on the phone The display does not show any information about programmable keys on the DCL 60 console DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 Phone User Guide INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES Optional Equipment DCL 60 INSTALLATION For more information on installing a DCL 60 console on the phone see DCL 60 Console Type A Installation on page 3 56 JABRA HEADSET SUPPORT The DT700 phones support some models of Jabra Bluetooth headsets The headsets connect to the DT 700 s 4 wire handset port for voice and an 8 pin auxiliary AUX port for call control allowing you to answer calls hang up calls and mute and un mute calls The following table lists the Jabra Headsets that are supported by the DT 700 Bluetooth Connection Headset Jabra Headsets Module Support DT730 ma 8LD e Jabra PRO 9400 series es 14201 XX e Jabra GO 6470 ITL 12D e Jabra PRO 9400 series LINK 14201 XX e Jabra GO 6470 ITL 24D Yes e Jabra PRO 9400 series LINK 14201 XX e Jabra GO 6470 ITL 32D Yes e Jabra PRO 9400 series LINK 14201 XX e Jabra GO 6470 DT730G ITL 12CG Yes e Jabra PRO 9400 series LINK 14201 XX e Jabra GO
313. ry the telephone keypad is in uppercase mode You can switch between upper and lower case character sets by pressing the key The phone displays the character entry mode it is currently using in the Icon Display area Character entry mode Icon Displays Keypad in first letter uppercase abo Keypad in all uppercase entry a vec 12 303 PHONE TROUBLESHOOTING N 212 Keypad in all lowercase entry abe Keypad in numeric entry mode For more information on the character sets see Speed Dial and Personal Directory Character Sets on page 4 85 PHONE SOFTKEYS The phone softkeys are not working 1 Verify that the phone is receiving power 2 Some softkeys may not be available on your model of phone or may be restricted by your system administrator Contact your system administrator to determine which features are available for your system 3 Restart the phone a Press the Menu key b Select 5 Reboot c Press the OK softkey or Enter key on the cursor pad to restart the phone Note If you cannot restart the phone using the Menus unplug the phone from power and the network for ten seconds then reconnect the telephone to your network and power to perform a restart 4 Ifyou are still having problems with your phone contact your system administrator cannot see a particular softkey on my phone 1 If the More softkey appears on the LCD press the softkey to see additional softkeys for your
314. s e g 646 and the participant s name Last First This page automatically updates every 30 seconds The time each conference participant has been connected only updates when the page is refreshed that is the time does NOT update every second If you select a conference address with no calls in progress the participant details are replaced by the string No conference in progress All other functionality of the conference detail page is the same the page updates every 30 seconds and the user may join the conference SEARCH DIRECTORY CORPORATE DIRECTORY SEARCH DIRECTORY Selecting the Search Directory item invokes the following XML page allowing the user to enter a string to search the 3C System Directory Note that the 3C System Directory is different than the Personal Directory maintained by the phone To Search the 3C System Directory 1 Press the Feature key 2 Press the Home softkey or wait 2 seconds to connect to the microbrowser home page 3 Select Search Directory Figure 9 27 Search System Directory amp Hot Desking Login C Handset Forwarding A Start Recording Call 1 Supervise a Call View System Call History ai List Conferences Search Directory 4 Enter your search string and press the OK soft key DT700 Phone User Guide 9 195 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 sicrcoronse 9 196 Figure 9 28 Search Directory page Table 9 1 The Search Directory search string can be
315. s you to restart your phone without logging in to the Admin Settings You may want to restart your phone to check for a new version of firmware 6 Status Allows you to view the Terminal and Net work information for your phone such as the Firmware Version IP Address Default Gateway etc OPERATION BY MENUS AND CURSOR PAD You can use the menus on the phone in combination with the cursor pad to access Call History Personal Directory and terminal settings quickly and easily For example the following operations show alternate ways to access the Personal Directory DT700 Phone User Guide INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700O AND DT730G PHONES DT700 and DT730G Series Phones Figure 2 18 Use Menus and Cursor Pad to access the Personal Directory 1 Press the Menu Key JA N Kecal Jj Lvawis Jj 7 f Gere Cre Personal Directory Call History User Settings Admin Settings fr Y 4 Y Exit Select a ra 2 Press the Right Cursor Pad Key Figure 2 19 Use Cursor Pad to access Personal Directory W ANSWer JJ l wc Exit Select Press the Right Cursor Pad Directory Key SOFTKEYS EXIT AND HELP KEYS Softkeys The softkeys on the phones provide a set of functions on the LCD that adapts to the changing state of the phone The softkeys at the bottom of the LCD display the names of available functions names of user assigned functions and names of functions assigned by a specific softkey patte
316. screen Figure 12 17 More softkey ie Thu Apr 22 1250 PM Wroblewski Victoria 646 Split Shuttle Conference EndCall 2 Some softkeys may not be available on your model of phone or may be restricted by your system administrator Contact your system administrator to determine which features are available for your system 3 Restart the phone a Press the Menu key 12 304 DT700 Phone User Guide PHONE TROUBLESHOOTING LCD Screen Display b Select Reboot c Press the OK softkey or Enter key on the cursor pad to restart the phone Note If you cannot restart the phone using the Menus unplug the phone from power and the network for ten seconds then reconnect the telephone to your network and power to perform a restart 4 Ifyou are still having problems with your phone contact your system administrator LCD SCREEN DISPLAY The LCD is too light or dark e Press the Menu key and select User Settings LCD Settings LCD Contrast then use the softkeys to adjust the LCD contrast want to adjust the time the LCD stays lit You can adjust the timeout of the LCD backlight on your phone You can specify a value between 0 None to 255 seconds 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select User Settings 3 Select 5 LCD Settings Figure 12 18 LCD settings LOD Settings 6 Edit Before Dialing Clear Settings Ol 7 ee Select 4 Select 2 LCD Backlight Timeout Figure 12 19 LCD Backlight Timeout settings
317. seeees 12 308 PUNTO UY ecto etss scissors sessions E ENEE O E 12 308 A 3C System FeatuLes cccccceccsecceeeeeeceeeeesseneseeeeseseneseneeenees A 309 al PICK UN aa E A E A 310 To pick up a call on a DT710 ITL 2E phone o nnnnnnnnannnennnnnnnnennnennnnn A 310 To pick up a call on DT710 ITL 6DE DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D ITL 32D and DT730G ITL 12DG ITL 12CG phones A 310 SC VLE Mal Ene eee ee ee ee ae eee ee eee eee A 312 DTT TO ITL 2E OMOMG oehs decides ceicoscnscttecededine iape a Er Ebai A 312 DT710 ITL 6DE DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D ITL 32D and DT730G ITL 12DG ITL 12CG Phones cece ceecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees A 312 3C System Telephone Set Star Code Commands ccceceeeeeeee eee A 313 viii Contents DT700 Phone User Guide CONTENTS B SIP Net System Features ccccccseceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneneees B 319 Programmable Keys Speed Dial keys ccccccceeceseeceseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeees B 319 EKAMOS EE a B 319 SIP Net PICKS sobeiesins cxice nts cous cn cobbassonsapenoredieyeniduetisestesstanscsnoteadscsieneneseese B 320 Message Waiting INGICATION ccc cccccceeceeeeeceeeceeeseeeceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeaeeeees B 320 Desk Sharing and User Portabllity 0 0c cccccecccececeeeceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeneeeees B 320 To log on to a Desk Sharing Terminal cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaes B 320 To log out of a Desk Sharing Terminal
318. sing the Microbrowser Note This only clears the handset forwarding settings applied to the phone Administrator configured or system level forwarding settings are not deleted CALL RECORDING Note If you select Start Recording Call and call recording is not enabled for you at the system level any Start Recording requests will fail and an error message is displayed Contact your system administrator if you need call recording enabled START RECORDING CALL Press the Record key while on an active call to start an On Demand recording STOP RECORDING CALL Press the Record key while an an On Demand recording is active to stops recording SUPERVISE A CALL SUPERVISE A CALL BARGE MONITOR The 3C system allows users to be granted rights to Supervise an address group If a user has supervisor rights they can monitor or barge into a call in progress on any address in the group Selecting Supervise invokes the following XML page allowing the user to select an address group they have the right to supervise Address groups that the user does not have the right to supervise are not shown Note Supervise shows only connected calls Held calls are not shown Calls made to a secondary address are shown as if they were made to the primary address Conference calls cannot be supervised When you select Supervise a Call one of the following occurs e lf you do not have Supervise privileges the following error is shown No Supervise Pr
319. softkey to initiate the call or wait a few seconds for the call to be automatically dialed Note This call is treated as a separate phone call and cannot be added to any 3 party conference call that is in progress CONFERENCE SPLIT To split a conference call 1 Start a 3 way conference call with two other parties Note You can only split a conference call that you have initiated 2 Press the Split softkey to split the conference into two separate calls DT700 Phone User Guide 7 113 BASIC PHONE OPERATION P o Call Transferring and Conferencing Figure 7 38 Split softkey mre Thu Apr 22 1232 PM 18475559976 Wroblewski Victoria t646 End all Each party is now treated as a separate phone call Note After you have split a conference you cannot rejoin the calls in a conference without having one party hang up so you can start a new 3 way conference call CONFERENCE SHUTTLE The Conference Shuttle feature allows you to switch between two separate phone calls putting one on hold while you are on the other call before you join the calls in a conference Note You cannot shuttle between calls after you have joined two calls in a conference call To switch between two calls 1 While on a call press the Conf key or press the Conf or Conference softkey Figure 7 39 Conf key on DT710 ITL 2E phone Figure 7 40 Conf softkey on DT710 ITL 6DE phone I o Mon Mas 3 04 45PM _ 01 2411 Lab 346 i i EndCall
320. ss Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to return to the Personal Directory Figure 8 114 Delete Entry Complete Menu Display The entry has been deleted Note For Directory entries that are set as read only by your system administrator an error is displayed and the entry is not deleted If you go to the Personal Directory you will still see that the entire entry has been deleted Figure 8 115 Personal Directory detail Directory Entries oG Home 618475551234 Lab 2 371 Lab 3 373 To delete a Speed Dial only entry For Speed Dial entries that do not have a Personal Directory entry you can delete the Speed Dial entry 1 Enter the programmable mode for your phone The Feature key LED lights a steady red Figure 8 116 Feature Key cD Note For information on how to enter the programmable mode for your phone see Using the Feature Key on page 8 132 2 Do one of the following ITL 24CG ITL 12CG ITL 24DG ITL 12DG ITL 32D ITL 24D ITL 12D and ITL 6DE Phones e Press the programmable key that you want to delete The programmable key LED flashes Figure 8 117 Programmable Key LED T 8 170 DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys ITL 8LD Phones e Press the Scroll Key to scroll to the desired page then press the Speed Dial Key that you want to delete The programmable key LED flashes and the Speed Dial information for the key is shown Figure 8 118 Sc
321. ss the 4 Up LY Down key multiple times and cannot press and hold to adjust the volume Figure D 15 Adjust Headset ringing volume 2586 Tue Aug 24 03 18 PM 111 Wroblewski Victoria t646 In addition to the headset ringing volume setting on your phone you may also need to adjust the headset ring volume using the base of your wireless headset See the documentation for your headset for more information To adjust the call volume headset e Press the 4 Up LY Down key on the Cursor pad during call operation You must press the 4 Up LY Down key multiple times and cannot press and hold to adjust the volume Figure D 16 Adjust Headset call volume I Tue May 4 09 30 AM Wroblewski Victoria 646 In addition to the call volume setting on your phone you may also need to adjust the call volume using the base of your wireless headset See the documentation for your headset for more information Headset Operation Table D 2 Wireless Headset Functions Incoming Answer an Multifunction Call Incoming Call button Reject an Incoming Call D 338 DT700 Phone User Guide JABRA BLUETOOTH HEADSET SUPPORT FOR DT700 PHONES Jabra Headset Phone State On a Call Terminate a Call Multifunction Tap button Once Mute Unmute the Volume Tap Headset Control Twice Microphone touch panel Headset Volume Adjust Up Down Outgoing Call Dial Multifunction Tap tone button Once Redial Tap Twice JABRA HEADSET TROUB
322. ss the Shuttle softkey to switch between the calls Shuttle Calls i Thu Apr 22 12 24 PM Wroblewski victoria 646 Shuttle Conference EndCall Press the Shuttle softkey again to switch back to the other call CALL TRANSFERRING AND CONFERENCING CONFERENCING CALLS The phones support 3 party conferencing 7 111 BASIC PHONE OPERATION F el Call Transferring and Conferencing Conference Reminder Tone A Conference Reminder tone may be enabled on your phone If enabled a reminder tone is played periodically when you have established a 3 party conference call from your telephone You may also hear the phone if you a called party on another 3 party conference that was established from another phone enabled for the conference reminder tone To conference two calls 1 Figure 7 32 Figure 7 33 Figure 7 34 Figure 7 35 7 112 While on a call press the Conf key or press the Conf or Conference softkey Conf key on DT710 ITL 2E phone Conf softkey on DT710 ITL 6DE phone I Mon Mas 3 04 49PM 0424 14 Lab 346 E EndCall Conference softkey on DT730 ITL 8LD ITL 12D ITL 24D and ITL 32D phones lr Thu Apr 22 1727 AM Wroblewski Victoria 646 ot EndCall Use the key pad to dial the telephone number of the party to be joined in the conference Press the Dial softkey to initiate the call or wait a few seconds for the call to be automatically dialed a If you
323. swers the call you can speak to that person before you transfer the call 5 Press the Transfer button to transfer the original call to the new party You will be disconnected from both calls Blind transfer A blind transfer is when the call transfers immediately to the dialed extension without waiting to see if the extension rings or is picked up If the other caller does not answer or rejects the call the call is routed to voice mail or according to forwarding conditions If there is no voice mail or forwarding conditions set for the line you transfer to the call will continue to ring 1 While on a call press the Transfer key Figure 7 45 Transfer Key C This puts the current call on hold so you can start to transfer the call 2 Press the Blind softkey then use the key pad to dial the telephone number to which the call is to be transferred Figure 7 46 Blind softkey D Thu Apr 22 1255 PM aj Enter Number Blind Ao EndCall 3 Press the Dial softkey or wait a few seconds for the call to be automatically dialed 7 116 DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC PHONE OPERATION Call Transferring and Conferencing 4 The call is immediately transferred when the number is dialed You will be disconnected from both callers lf your system administrator has enabled forwarding to external numbers you may be able to transfer calls to external numbers You will be disconnected from both calls when your phone dials the externa
324. t show if first menu item is selected Move to next menu item does not show if last menu item is selected Exit Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Monitor If no calls are being monitored Set up a monitor call to the selected extension If a call is being monitored Shows the details for the monitored call Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the Select Address Group screen Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Set up a monitor call to the selected extension Directory key Volume UP Key Move to previous menu item 4 way scroll UP key 4 way scroll DOWN key Move to next menu item Volume DOWN Key ENTER key If no calls are being monitored Set up a monitor call to the selected extension If a call is being monitored Shows the details for the monitored call Off Hook handset If speaker is ON turn speaker OFF move audio to handset and keep focus on current screen If headset is active move audio to handset and keep focus on current screen Speaker key On Hook handset behavior If speaker is ON turn speaker OFF and keep focus on current screen Off Hook handset behavior If speaker is OFF turn Speaker ON and keep focus on current screen If speaker is ON activate handset and keep focus on current screen Headset active behavior Turn Speaker ON and keep focus on current screen DT700 Phone User Guide 9 189 DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMAB
325. tar codes 1 Lift the handset from the phone 2 Dial 63 lt forwarding number gt When your phone is Busy all other calls will forward to the configured number s Multiple handset forwarding conditions may be enabled for your phone To enter additional numbers hang up the phone and then lift the handset to enter an additional number example 63 forwarding number hang up 63 another forwarding number hang up To clear Handset Forwarding Conditions Note This clears all handset forwarding conditions that are applied to the phoneset You cannot clear only a subset of the forwarding conditions You would need to clear all forwarding conditions and then re enter any specific conditions you wish to apply Press the Feature Key Press the Home soft key or wait 2 seconds to connect to the microbrowser home page Oo N Select Forwarding 4 Select Clear forwarding Figure 10 18 Clear forwarding Handset Forwarding Forward immediately Forward when busy Forward after 30 seconds Select This page handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Move to previous menu item does not show if first menu item is selected Move to next menu item does not show if last menu item is selected 10 228 DT700 Phone User Guide 5 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Soft Key Features Explanation Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status scre
326. tems 1 Dial the De Activate DNR prefix e g 91 plus your phone number For example a user with the configured number of 1234 would dial 911234 2 After the Confirmation Tone is given end the call You should now be logged off to the terminal and the terminal should display the default terminal name and number All User Settings Personal Directory Speed Dial key settings and Call History information should return to the values for the phoneset terminal DT700 Phone User Guide B 321 B 322 DT700 Phone User Guide DT 730G USB PORT One USB Port is mounted on this terminal With this port it is possible to charge USB Devices Std SIP 3 0 x only supports the charging function The other USB functions are not supported Note There may cases where a USB Device does not charge even if it meets the specifications described in this manual Figure C 1 USB Port Location Back of phone USB Port To Connect a USB Device Note Before connecting USB Devices connect the terminal to the system 1 Lift the USB Port Cover Figure C 2 Open USB Port DT700 Phone User Guide C 323 2 Insert a USB Device connector into the USB Port Figure C 3 Insert USB connector Make sure you are inserting the plug with the correct orientation and push the USB connector into the port until it stops 3 The USB Device is now connected Figure C 4 Connected USB Device To Remove a USB Device The USB device does not need
327. tes a blind transfer to another extension 96 96 extension extension dial Note A confirmation tone will sound after applying this star code command Logoff Remotely from 61 Ext 61 Ext Terminates any existing Hot Desking session from Hot Desking Session Password Password any phone on the system regardless of the service is optional in SIP status DT700 Phone User Guide A 313 Analog SIP Star Code Explanation Star Code Conditional Handset 62 62 Incoming calls are forwarded to another extension if Forwarding No number number the ringing call is not answered in 30 seconds answer Note Supported SIP phones may play an audible indication that this star code is active Depending on the system configuration this indication remains active until the star code is deactivated 63 Conditional Handset 63 Incoming calls are forwarded to another extension Forwarding Busy number number when a call is already in progress Note Supported SIP phones may play an audible indication that this star code is active Depending on the system configuration this indication remains active until the star code is deactivated Cancel Call Waiting 70 Not available Cancels call waiting for the call being placed number Note 70 also disables this feature A 314 DT700 Phone User Guide 3C SYSTEM FEATURES Analog SIP Star Code Explanation Star Code Activates the station n
328. the microphone Press this key to access the features and settings provided on the local telephone menu such as Call History Personal Directory or User Settings Press this key to place a call on hold Press this key to transfer a call Controls the built in soeaker which can be used for Hands Free dialing and conversations The LED on this key lights when the speaker is active Use this key to navigate to various features The up and down keys on the cursor pad can be used to adjust the volume of the phone This port located behind the LCD screen can be used to charge USB devices INTRODUCTION TO THE DT700 AND DT730G PHONES Po o DT700 and DT730G Series Phones Figure 2 4 Table 2 7 ITL 12DG DT730G SERIES PHONE LAYOUT AND PARTS ITL 12DG DT730G Series 16 3 2 4 5 T 7 ins A 10 EEE N EAA 11 12 13 14 15 ITL 12DG DT730G Series Keys and Parts 1 Call Indicator Lamp The Call Indicator Lamp at top corner of the display flashes when a Call is offered to the phone Also if you have Voice Mail service the Lamp lights steadily when a message has been left 2 LCD The LCD Liquid Crystal Display provides call status activity information plus date time and softkey operation 3 Exit key This key allows you to exit from the Menu or Help mode and go back to the telephone main screen 4 Softkeys The softkeys show the available features for your current activity Any feature shown at the bottom of the LCD
329. these settings on your phone To change any of these settings contact your system administrator SPEED DIAL AND PERSONAL DIRECTORY CHARACTER SETS The following tables show the character sets uppercase lowercase and numeric that are available on your DT700 phone ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS When entering the name you can enter uppercase and lowercase standard and European characters The keypad is in upper case entry mode upon entering the screen You can switch between upper and lower case character sets by pressing the key An icon in the title bar will show which entry mode uppercase lowercase or numeric set is selected The following tables show the available characters Table 4 8 Uppercase Alphabetic Character Set Uppercase Characters DT700 Phone User Guide 4 85 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION oag Speed Dial and Personal Directory Character Sets Uppercase Characters Table 4 9 Lowercase Alphabetic Character Set NUMERIC CHARACTER SET When in numeric character entry mode you can use the numbered keys on the phone to enter numbers and the key to enter special characters 4 86 DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION Speed Dial and Personal Directory Character Sets You can switch between character sets by pressing the key Note The full numeric character set is only available when you are in a field that also allows alphabetic input If you are not in a field that allows for alphabetic in
330. thods listed above to answer the call Note If you are changing any settings on your phone or adding a Personal Directory or Speed Dial entry your changes will be discarded if you press the Line Key to view the incoming call To reject an incoming call Figure 7 7 DT700 Phone User Guide Press the Reject softkey Reject softkey 4 Thu Apr 22 1116 AM Wroblewski victoria 646 Reject f Newall The call will be routed in accordance with your defined forwarding conditions INCOMING CALL RINGING TONES Different ring tones can be used to distinguish between internal external and auto answer intercom call calls The cadences of the ring tones are established through 7 103 BASIC PHONE OPERATION I 25 21 ocean configuration parameters For more information about the incoming call ringing tones for your system contact your system administrator Note Soft Ring is only valid for SIP Net platforms Contact your system administrator to determine if Soft Ring is available on your system PLACING CALLS EXTERNAL CALLS To place an external call Figure 7 8 Figure 7 9 Figure 7 10 7 104 Calls made to numbers that are outside of your system usually require an outside line access code Lift the handset press the Speaker key or press the NewCall softkey to receive dial tone NewCall softkey Tue Jan 25 10 31 AM ay z a ee Voicemail HewCall Enter the outside line access code using the keyp
331. timeout DT700 Phone User Guide 4 75 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION og Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Figure 4 44 Set Backlight Timeout LCD Backlight Timeout 6 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to accept the setting You can also press the Cancel softkey to exit without making any changes Note Setting the Backlight Timeout to O zero disables the timeout and the LCD Backlight will remain lit at all times To enable or disable the Backlight Fade DT730G ITL 12CG only You can enable or disable low power mode on the main screen of the color DT730G CG phones Note Although this setting is available on DT 730G DG phones it does not have any impact on the main screen of DT 730G DG phones 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select User Settings 3 Select LCD Settings Figure 4 45 LCD settings LCD Settings G Select 4 Select LCD Low Power Mode 4 76 DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION Basic Setup with the Menus and Cursor Pad Figure 4 46 LCD Low Power Mode settings Backlight Fade Control Disable 0G 5 Select Enable or Disable By default low power mode is enabled on the phone 6 Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey to accept the setting You can also press the Cancel softkey to exit without making any changes To edit the Dial Preference Note If you do not see this menu option it has been disabled by your system administrator
332. to be un mounted from the phone since the USB Port only supports the charging function e Disconnect the USB connector from the phone C 324 DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G USB PORT To Remove the USB Port Cover The USB Port Cover can be removed 1 Open the USB Port Cover Figure C 5 Open USB Port 2 Lift up the USB Port Cover and pull it while sliding it to the left Figure C 6 Remove USB Port cover Note Do not pull the cover upward If the USB Port Cover is pulled upward the cover may rip apart from the connector DT700 Phone User Guide C 325 3 The USB Port Cover is removed Figure C 7 Removed USB Port Cover Store the USB Port Cover in a safe location so you can replace it later if required USB PORT DRAIN This phone has a port drain over current detection function for USB Devices connected to the phone Table C 1 USB Port Drain Icons USB Port Drain Fai Note This feature is only available on USE DT730G phones This icon indicates that the device connected to the USB port of the DT730G phone is drawing current beyond the normal Max 500mA range If a device is overdrawing current from USB port power supply to the USB port is stopped until the device is removed When an over current of USB Device is detected power supply to the USB Port is stopped To restart power supply remove the USB Device and reset the terminal according to the following procedure To restart USB Port Power Supply
333. to select which line to operate on Any programmable keys not used as Line Keys can be programmed as Speed Dial Keys by the user or system administrator Numbers up to 24 digits can be assigned to Speed Dial Keys The numbers may be a telephone number or star nash codes This key displays a set of menu options that provide additional capabilities such as speed dial key programming and microbrowser applications 3C systems Press this key to get a dial tone If you are currently on a call the current call will be placed on hold and a new call will be started SIP Net Platforms See the Hold key Press this key to answer an incoming call If you have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the headset If you do not have a headset attached to the phone the audio will go through the speaker on the phone You can also press this key to answer a waiting call Press key to mute the microphone The LED on this key flashes when the microphone is muted Press the key again to un mute the microphone Press this key to access the features and settings provided on the local telephone menu such as Call History Personal Directory or User Settings Press this key to place a call on hold Press this key to transfer a call Controls the built in soeaker which can be used for Hands Free dialing and conversations The LED on this key lights when the speaker is active Use this key to navigate to various features Th
334. to the Personal Directory or to not add the entry to the Personal 8 135 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Directory If an entry is not added to the Personal Directory it will not show up when you view or search the Personal Directory For example if you are programming a Speed Dial entry for a star or hash code you may not want to add the entry to your Personal Directory You can also program the Speed Dial Key information when you are adding a Personal Directory Entry By default the entry is saved to the Personal Directory SPEED DIAL KEYS WITHOUT PERSONAL DIRECTORY ENTRIES To program a Speed Dial that does not also show up in your Personal Directory use the Feature Key to program the Speed Dial To add a Programmable Key Speed Dial Key without a Personal Directory entry 8 136 1 Figure 8 31 Figure 8 32 Figure 8 33 Figure 8 34 Enter the programmable mode for your phone The Feature key LED lights a steady red Feature Key Note For information on how to enter the programmable mode for your phone see Using the Feature Key on page 8 132 Do one of the following ITL 24CD ITL 12CG ITL 24DG ITL 12DG ITL 32D ITL 24D ITL 12D and ITL 6DE Phones Press the programmable key that you want to set as a Speed Dial Key The programmable key LED flashes Programmable Key LED fa Ga ITL 8LD Phones Press the Scroll Key to scroll to the desired page then press the Speed
335. to the call logs maintained by the phone s Call History For example the 3C system may choose to present call logs for all extensions assigned to the terminal Note The Microbrowser only displays the last 32 calls or the last 7 days of calls whichever comes first To view call logs via the Microbrowser 1 Press the Feature key 2 Press the Home soft key or wait 2 seconds to connect to the microbrowser home page 3 Select Call History Figure 10 23 View System Call History Cs s Hot Desking Forwarding Recording On Start A 6 Supervise Conferences Select Exit Selecting the View System Call History item invokes the Call History page Figure 10 24 Call History page Call History 15 14 No 1 DT730DG 11 46 No 1 DT730DG 11 46 SRV3C Support 11 46 SRV3C Support 11 46 No 5 DT730 old M Exit Dial DT700 Phone User Guide 10 235 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 siccoronse The Call Log page handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Move to previous menu item does not show if first menu item is selected Move to next menu item does not show if last menu item is selected Exit Exit the microbrowser and return to the appropriate call screen Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to microbrowser home page Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Dial the highlighted number Directory key 4 way scroll UP key Move to previous entry
336. top the recording a call Table 9 3 Send to Voice Mail DT700 Phone User Guide Press the Record key The call recording will stop CALL RECORDING INDICATION If call recording indication is enabled for your account the DT 700 phone indicates call recording status If call recording indication is enabled a call recording icon is shown in the call control home screen and through the LED on the Record key for DT730 ITL 8LD Desi less phones Call recording indications Icon Call Record Key contro ang T Event Desi less Description LED Secondary Screen On Demand recording Steady Red Indicates that the call is being recorded by On Demand Recording On Demand recording Off None When the recording is stopped the On Hold local or indication is also stopped remote hold When the call is resumed call recording indication is displayed again Auto Recording Steady Red Indicates that the call is being recorded by Auto Recording No recording Off None Indicates that no call is being recorded Call terminated If the call you were recording is recording terminated ended the call recording automatically stops Call recording Off None No call recording indication is shown indication is not on the phone even when there is a enabled call recording When multiple calls are being recorded the DT700 keeps track of all the calls that are being recorded and updates the state of the Record key LED and the call record
337. turn to the appropriate call status screen Monitor Monitor listen to the selected call HOT DESKING Hot desking allows a single phone to assume different identities at different times Hot desking users do not have an assigned desk or physical phone but they do have a line on the system They use any available desk and phone for a short period of time usually measured in days and then move on The Hot Desking menu item does not appear if your phone is not enabled for Hot Desking To Login using Hot Desking 1 Press the Feature Key 2 Press the Home soft key or wait 2 seconds to connect to the microbrowser home page 3 Select Hot Desking On Figure 10 6 Hot Desking Login Forwarding Recording Start A re Supervise Call History Conferences Next Select Exit 4 Use the keypad to enter your Extension and Password then click the OK soft key DT700 Phone User Guide 10 217 DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS I 1 siccorouse Figure 10 7 Log in Hot Desking Login Extension 2001 Delete Back The Hot Desking Extension field has focus when entering the Hot Desking Login page and the keypad is in numeric entry mode When the Hot Desking Password field has focus the characters entered are hidden by characters The Hot Desking Extension and Password fields accept a maximum of 24 characters The Hot Desking Login page handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation
338. u create an entry with the same name and same number as an existing entry Figure 11 59 Directory Duplicate Not Allowed Menu Display Duplicate Entry Mot Allowed To add an entry to the Personal Directory 1 Press the Menu key or cursor pad to access the Personal Directory 2 Press the More softkey and then the Add softkey Figure 11 60 More Soft and Add softkeys Directory Entries Horne 61647555 1254 Lab 346 Lab 2 371 5 i i T Search Edit Delete EE PT Detail Exit eee 3 Use the telephone keypad to enter the name and press Enter onthe cursor pad or the OK softkey Figure 11 61 Personal Directory Name Screen Enter Name Up to 24 characters may be entered for the name e Press the Delete softkey to delete the last character entered or press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen e To switch between first letter uppercase all uppercase all lowercase and numbers for keypad entry press the key on the keypad e To add a space to an entry press A 11 278 DT700 Phone User Guide 4 CALL HISTORY AND THE CORPORATE AND PERSONAL DIRECTORIES The Personal Directory e To enter special characters press the LH key For a list of special characters see Speed Dial and Personal Directory Character Sets in the DT700 Phone User Guide e To move the cursor position in the LCD screen use the right and left cursor pad keys Use the telephone keypad to enter a phone num
339. uesoseh ea aAa Aa 4 80 TO restart your PNONGE cccccecccscccseeceneceeeeceeecueeceeecseecaeecueesaeessaeseaeenas 4 82 To view the Phone settings ccccccccceecceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeees 4 82 To view the firmware information for your phone cccseeeseeeeeeeeeeees 4 83 To view the IP address of your phone cccceccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 4 83 To view the maximum numbers of calls you can handle YOU ONONO reene eee ere en renee ene een eee ee eee 4 84 Speed Dial and Personal Directory Character Sets ccccceseeeeeeseeeeeees 4 85 5 DT730 ITL 8LD with Display sccessccscsesecseceeseereeeeeeeseees 5 89 DT730 ITL 8LD DESI Less Display cc cccccccccceeceeeeceeeeeeseeeesaeeeseeeeseeeens 5 90 Startup Display eo nen eee ee eee ee aE a eee er een 5 90 Programmable Key Information Display ccccccceeceeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeas 5 90 The Scroll Key eee eee en eee ene eee nee eee a eee ree 5 93 Using the Scrol IK CY sercis sabmenanaedtemoduiendiaes 5 93 Speed Dial Key Numbering for ITL 8LD Phones cccceceeeeneeeee es 5 94 ii Contents DT700 Phone User Guide CONTENTS 6 DT700 Security Features cccecccseceseeseeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeneneeeeees 6 95 I ANS N EEA E A E EN A E E E aevecn 6 95 Secur Signaling secsssrsisairea aae EAEE EE 6 95 Sec re Medid occa iccededecasteinbsesaneetedvseticysntecedceeoiacedist
340. uje ze DT700 jest zgodny z wymaganiami i innymi warunkami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC http www nec unified com doc PORTUGU S NEC Unified Solutions declara que este DT700 est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Directiva 1999 5 CE http www nec unified com doc SLOVENSKO NEC Unified Solutions izjavlja da je ta DT700 v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES http www nec unified com doc SLOVENSKY NEC Unified Solutions t mto vyhlasuje Ze DT700 sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia Smernice 1999 5 ES http www nec unified com doc SUOMI NEC Unified Solutions vakuuttaa t ten ett DT700 tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen http www nec unified com doc SVENSKA H rmed intygar NEC Unified Solutions att denna DT700 st r verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG http www nec unified com doc E 348 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 Phone User Guide NOTICES WEEE Product Disposal Information WEEE PRODUCT DISPOSAL INFORMATION PRODUCT DISPOSAL INFORMATION UK FOR COUNTRIES IN THE EUROPEAN UNION The symbol depicted here has been affixed to your product in order to X inform you th
341. umber to which all calls are to number number be forwarded e The number can be an extension on the phone system or an outside telephone number with the appropriate outside service i e 8 1 857 5551234 varies by region If the number is not already on the call forwarding setup it will be added and enabled Only a single handset entered forwarding number is entered at a time Calls may be forwarded to multiple numbers example 72 extension hang up 72 another extension hang up Note A confirmation tone will sound after applying this star code command Note Calls can be forwarded to one or more internal addresses or one or more external addresses Note User centric Call Forwarding Setup The behavior of this setting varies by system Contact your 3C system administrator for more information on how this feature behaves on your system users cannot use this star code Contact your system administrator for information on call forwarding setup for user centric users Note Supported SIP phones may play an audible indication that this star code is active Depending on the system configuration this indication remains active until the star code is deactivated DT700 Phone User Guide A 315 Call Forwarding Deactivation Transfer Directly to Voice Mail Call detail information sent to call detail record Intercom from non intercom phone to intercom enabled phone Conferencing
342. uniquely defining an entry the name is case insensitive Multiple entries with the same number and different names are allowed and multiple entries with the same name and different numbers are allowed Multiple entries with the same name and same number are not allowed An error is displayed if you create an entry with the same name and same number as an existing entry Directory Duplicate Not Allowed Menu Display Duplicate Entry Mot Allowed If the Speed Dial number for a new Personal Directory entry is already used for another entry you will see an error when you try to save the Personal Directory entry Press the OK softkey then select L31 Speed Dial to edit the Speed Dial number before trying to save the entry again Speed Dial In Use Menu Display A confirmation displays telling you the speed dial has been updated Press Enter on the cursor pad or the OK softkey 8 165 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Figure 8 100 Speed Dial Edit Confirmation Confirmation Entry Updated successtully 8 Doone of the following e To edit more Speed Dial Keys press the Speed Dial Key for that entry and repeat steps 3 through 7 e To return to the main phone screen press the Exit softkey or the Feature Key Figure 8 101 Exit softkey Press soft key or wait to load page DELETING SPEED DIAL KEYS A Speed Dial entry can be just a Speed Dial key or it can be a Personal Directory entry that is ass
343. ur system administrator SECURE CALLS SECURE CALL ICON DISPLAY A call is secure when both the signaling and the media are secure Different icons are used to indicate the security of the phone s signaling and the security of the media Secure Signaling A lock symbol appears in the registration icon when secure signaling is used such as a TLS connection Table 6 1 Secure Registration Icon A locked or unlocked icon is displayed adjacent to the call appearance icon to indicate when secure media such as SRTP is used Secure Media Table 6 2 Secure Media Icon Secure Media Unsecure Signaling White Background Black Background DT700 Phone User Guide 6 95 Fo o DT700 SECURITY FEATURES Secure Media Icon Secure Media Secure Signaling White Background Black Background Figure 6 1 Table 6 3 The following table provides the details for possible scenarios with secured and unsecured signaling and media Secured Unsecure Signaling and Media Scenarios Icons Registrationlcon Registrationlcon Media Security Icon White Black 6 96 Music On Hold When the phone is placed on hold the media is renegotiated The media may change from SRTP to RTP The Media Icon will update accordingly Conferencing When the phone acts as conference initiator or a conference bridge the Secure Media Icon is displayed only if all call legs are secure 802 1X AUTHENTICATION 802 1x Authentication Status Screens The LCD
344. urn to the appropriate call status screen Join Dial the conference bridge address in the title bar and display the call status screen Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the previous screen Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Dial the conference bridge address in the title bar and Directory key display the call status screen 4 way scroll UP key Remain on existing screen and move cursor up Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key Remain on existing screen and move cursor down Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Dial the conference bridge address in the title bar and display the call status screen Off Hook handset If speaker is ON turn speaker OFF move audio to handset and keep focus on current screen If headset is active move audio to handset and keep focus on current screen 9 194 DT700 Phone User Guide DT700 MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Hard Key Features Explanation Speaker key On Hook If speaker is ON turn speaker OFF and keep focus on handset current screen behavior Off Hook If speaker is OFF turn Speaker ON and keep focus on handset current screen If speaker is ON activate handset and behavior keep focus on current screen Headset active Turn Speaker ON and keep focus on current screen behavior Each conference entry shows the time the conference participant has been connected e g 01 30 the participant s addres
345. us 10 248 DT700 Phone User Guide Table 10 3 Send to Voice Mail DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Enhanced Programmable Keys If call recording indication is enabled a call recording icon J is shown in the call control home screen Call recording indications Icon Call Event Secora agy Control Description LED Screen On Demand recording Steady Red Indicates that the call is being recorded by On Demand Recording On Demand recording Off None When the recording is stopped the On Hold local or indication is also stopped remote hold When the call is resumed call recording indication is displayed again Auto Recording Steady Red Indicates that the call is being recorded by Auto Recording No recording Off None Indicates that no call is being recorded Call terminated If the call you were recording is recording terminated ended the call recording automatically stops Call recording Off None No call recording indication is shown indication is not on the phone even when there is a enabled call recording When multiple calls are being recorded the DT700 keeps track of all the calls that are being recorded and updates the state of the call recording icon based on the call state SEND TO VM KEY While your phone is ringing press the Send to VM key The call will be sent directly to your voice mail box and the phone will stop ringing HOT DESK KEY To log in to a Hot
346. vevenesousceignetabecien a 8 122 The MENU KGY onines E a a EEEE E a EE EE 8 123 Speed Dial and Programmable KeyS cccccccecccseeeaeeeseeeeaeeeseeeseeeseeeeaees 8 124 Programmable Key Manageme n ccccceccceeeceeceseeeseeeeaeeeaeeeaeeseeeeaees 8 124 DCL 60 Console Type A ccccssccccesececesseecseeseeseecesseaseeseaeeeseeseesaaeeessags 8 126 Speed Dial Key Configuration cccccccccccseceseeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeees 8 127 Speed Dial Key NUMDETING ccccccceeeceececeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeesaeeenes 8 128 Speed Dial Key Numbering for ITL 8LD Phones ccceceeeeeeeee es 8 129 Speed Dial Key Numbering for Expansion Modules 0 c 00ceees 8 130 Presence Monitor Settings and Speed Dial Keys ccceceeeeee sees 8 130 Duplicate Entries in Speed DialS ccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeees 8 131 Using the Feature Key cccccsccsscecscecseeceeeceeeceaeeceeesaeesaeeeeeeeseeeneess 8 132 To view Speed Dial Key information for Programmed Speed Dial Keys cccseccsscccsceceeeceeeccececseecaeesseeecseceeeceeecaeesseeseaeeaeesas 8 133 Speed Dial Key Operation cccccccssccssccceeecececeueceucecueeceeecseeseeeesaeesaes 8 134 To originate a call from Speed Dial KeyS cccccccsecceeeaeeeseeeeaeeeaees 8 134 Speed Dial Key Programming Examples cccccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 135
347. w you to dial a number to place a call If the trunk is not available the phone will not enter the dialing state You must wait for the trunk to become available or use another Trunk Dial key to access different trunk You can enter the number using the keypad Note Using a Speed Dial key or a Personal or Corporate directory to dial the number is not supported If you use a Speed Dial key or navigate to a Personal or Corporate directory entry it overrides Trunk dialing and the call is placed as a normal outbound call to the configured number DND KEY The DND key can be used to enable and disable Do Not Disturb on your phone If configured for your system it can also serve as an indicator of DND status on the system The key will reflect the DND status as set by the phone star codes or set using a supported client application DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Enhanced Programmable Keys DND LEDS AND ICONS Table 10 5 DND LEDs and Icons LED Call Control Comments Home Screen LED is not a DND is not enabled lit DND is enabled Note DND may have been enabled through the DND key through the star codes or using a supported client application To set Do Not Disturb for your phone e While the LED for the DND key is not lit le press the DND key The DND key s LED turns red and a DND icon Q is shown in the call control home screen to indicate that DND is set for your pho
348. will be connected to the original caller To continue to switch between the two callers press the Shuttle softkey You can also press the Conf or Conference softkey to connect both callers to you in a three party conference call TRANSFER SPLIT To split calls into two calls when transferring Transfer split 7 118 1 Figure 7 50 3 Figure 7 51 A Transfer Split can be done when you have started a transfer and then want to keep each call as a separate call After you split the calls you will not be able to continue a transfer between the two callers While on a call press the Transfer key Transfer Key cS Use the key pad to dial the telephone number of the party to be transferred then press Dial softkey or wait a few seconds for the call to be automatically dialed Press the Split softkey to split the transferred call into two separate calls Split Call ie Thu Apr 22 1250 PM Wroblewski Victoria 646 Split Shuttle Conference You will stay connected to each party but each will be treated as a separate phone call You can use the Shuttle softkey to switch between calls DT700 Phone User Guide BASIC PHONE OPERATION Advanced Messaging Features ADVANCED MESSAGING FEATURES MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION The DT700 phones have a call indicator lamp at the right top corner of the unit that lights steadily when a voice message has been left An icon also displays on call status screens Depe
349. wn visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory Visual and Soft Ring Presence state is shown visually using the LED on the Speed Dial Key and a Presence icon is shown in the Personal Directory When a call is ringing on the monitored terminal play a soft ring tone Note Option l2 Visual and Soft Ring is only valid for SIP Net platforms Contact your system administrator to determine if Soft Ring is available on your system If you have Visual Monitor Settings for an entry in the Directory that also has an assigned Speed Dial the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown in the Directory DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Table 8 3 Monitor Presence Icons eae ee Speed Dial Key Not Available No Monitoring Ringing Ringing SIP Net Ringing 3C system Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use ey amp You can also press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen 7 Select Do Not Show in Directory and press the OK softkey Figure 8 39 Do Not Show in Directory Directory Entry ir 1 Do Not Show in Directory C 2 Show in Directory Cancel You can also press the Cancel softkey to return to the previous screen 8 Press the Save softkey to save the entry DT700 Phone User Guide 8 139 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Speed Dial and Programmable Keys
350. y Transfer key The Call Indicator Lamp at top corner of the display flashes when a Call is offered to the phone Also if you have Voice Mail service the Lamp lights steadily when a message has been left The LCD Liquid Crystal Display provides call status activity information plus date time and softkey operation This key allows you to exit from the Menu or Help mode and go back to the telephone main screen The softkeys show the available features for your current activity Any feature shown at the bottom of the LCD is available The appropriate key is displayed on the screen according to the call handling process Press the Help key and then press a softkey to display information about that softkey The first programmable key is reserved as the Line Key Line Keys allow the user to select which line to operate on Any programmable keys not used as Line Keys can be programmed as Speed Dial Keys by the user or system administrator Numbers up to 24 digits can be assigned to Speed Dial Keys The numbers may be a telephone number or star nash codes This key displays a set of menu options that provide additional capabilities such as speed dial key programming and microbrowser applications 3C systems Press this key to get a dial tone If you are currently on a call the current call will be placed on hold and a new call will be started SIP Net Platforms See the Hold key Press this key to answer an incoming call
351. y buttons on the phone and then push the four corners of the panel until the panel clicks into place If you need to replace the Button Panel align the holes in the Button Panel with the telephone keypad buttons on the phone and then push the four corners of the panel until the panel clicks into place Line Key Card Install Line Key Panel Line Key Card WALL MOUNTING OPTIONAL A separate wall mount unit is used to mount the phone to the wall This unit connects to the back of the phone CAUTION BE CAREFUL NOT TO DROP THE PHONE WHILE MOUNTING IT ON THE WALL IT CAN CAUSE INJURY CAUTION MAKE SURE THE PHONE IS FIRMLY MOUNTED ON THE WALL TO PREVENT THE PHONE FROM FALLING OUT IT CAN CAUSE INJURY DT700 Phone User Guide INSTALLATION Wall Mounting Clearance Requirements The phone should be mounted to allow for the following clearances for the phone with the DT730 ITL 24D shown as an example Figure 3 21 Wall Mounting Clearance Diagram Exit OcmacocmolmO ii lil ili OOOO 008 5000 HOLD Transfer To mount the phone on the wall 1 Remove the handset from the handset cradle 2 Remove the hanger piece from the handset cradle flip it over and then turn it upside down and then insert it into the hanger slot until the hanger clicks DT700 Phone User Guide 3 53 Figure 3 22 Mount hanger piece Figure 3 23 6 Figure 3 24 T 3 54 Hanger piece Phone Turn the phone u
352. y scroll BACK key Remain on existing screen move cursor to left Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key Remain on existing screen move cursor to right Directory key 4 way scroll UP key No operation Volume UP Key 4 way scroll DOWN key No operation Volume DOWN Key ENTER key Sends contents of number field to the Web Server to set handset forwarding The forwarding number can be either an internal extension or an outside telephone number e Valid Internal extensions must have a physical endpoint associated to the number e Valid outside telephone numbers must include the outside dialing access number before the telephone number e PSTN numbers can be 7 or 11 digits e 1 as first dialed digit If the first digit is a 1 the number is assumed to be an 11 digit number If the first digit is not 1 then the first 7 digits are assumed to be a 7 digit number A page displays the success or failure of the operation DT700 Phone User Guide DT730G COLOR MICROBROWSER AND ENHANCED PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Using the Microbrowser Figure 10 17 Handset forwarding added success Handset Forwarding Call Forwarding added The Handset Status screens handles the following events Soft Key Features Explanation Exit the microbrowser to the appropriate call status screen Hard Key Features Explanation 4 way scroll BACK key Return to the previous screen Redial key 4 way scroll FORWARD key No operation Di
353. y scroll FORWARD key gt Select highlighted menu item Directory key 4 way scroll UP key 4 Move to previous menu item Volume UP key 4 way scroll DOWN key v Move to next menu item Volume DOWN key ENTER key Select highlighted menu item center button on cursor pad DT710 ITL 6DE ECONOMY PHONE DISPLAY The DT710 ITL 6DE LCD area shows three lines of information while the DT730 and DT730G phones are capable of showing five lines of information Most screen examples in this guide are for DI 730 phones Main Menu Display for ITL 6DE Directory Call History Select The T Up and Down softkeys on the phone indicate to the user when there are more options than displayed on the LCD screen T Up and Down softkeys on Change or Select Monitor Menu Display for DT710 ITL 6DE Phones T LENTE EEA 4 61 BASIC SETTINGS CONFIGURATION g Basic Setup with the Cursor Pad or Up Down Keys BASIC SETUP WITH THE CURSOR PAD OR UP DOWN KEYS For the DT710 ITL 2E phone you can use the up down keys on your phone to adjust the volume settings Figure 4 3 DT710 ITL 2E Up Down Keys For all other phones use the up down keys on the cursor pad Figure 4 4 DT710 ITL 6DE and DT730 ITL 12D ITL 24D and ITL 32D Cursor Pad Up Down Keys To adjust the ringing volume e Press the 4 Up LY Down key on the Cursor pad while on hook You must press the Up LY Down key multiple times and cannot press and hold to ad
354. your system If you have Visual Monitor Settings for an entry in the Directory that also has an assigned Speed Dial the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown in the Directory Monitor Presence Icons ee Unregistered EA met E Speed Dial Key Not Available TE No Monitoring DT700 Phone User Guide PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Speed Dial and Programmable Keys SS se Ringing SIP Net SIP Net Ringing 3C system Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use If you have Visual monitor settings for a Speed Dial entry the presence Available Busy or Offline of the line is shown by the LED Color Table 8 10 Monitor Presence LED Colors for Speed Dial Keys Type Programmable Line Key Registered LED is not lit Unregistered LED is not lit fa Speed Dial Key Not Available LED is not lit No Monitoring DT700 Phone User Guide 8 163 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS og Speed Dial and Programmable Keys Tbe Programmable yP Key LED LED is not lit fa Ga Ringing SIP Net Blinking Red Ringing 3C system Blinking Green Subscription Failed LED not lit Online 3C system Phone is Online On the Phone Phone is in use Held 3C system Blinking Red Note DT700 phones do not publish presence information Depending on other phones on your system and any phone application software that you use you may see different LED behavior for different prese

DT700 Phone User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents